Technical reference manual

System parameters

Controller software IRC5

RobotWare 5.0
 Technical reference manual
Controller Software IRC5
System parameters
RobotWare 5.0

Document ID: 3HAC17076-1

Revision: F
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that
may appear in this manual.
Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be
construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons
or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from
use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written
permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for
any unauthorized purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB All rights reserved.

ABB AB
Robotics Products
SE-721 68 Västerås
Sweden
 Table of Contents

Manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Product documentation, M2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1 About system parameters 23

1.1 About system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2 Topic Communication 25
2.1 The Communication topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2 Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.1 How to define an application protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.2 How to define a physical channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.3 How to define a transmission protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3 Type Application Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.1 The Application Protocol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3.3 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.3.4 Transmission Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3.5 Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3.6 Trusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3.7 Local Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.3.8 Server Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.9 Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.10 Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.3.11 User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3.12 Group ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.13 Maximum File Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3.14 Memory Partition Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.4 Type Physical Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4.1 The Physical Channel type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4.3 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.4.4 Baudrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.4.5 Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.4.6 Number of Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.4.7 Number of Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

2.4.8 Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.9 Flow Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5 Type Transmission Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.1 The Transmission Protocol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.5.3 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.5.4 Physical Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.5.5 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.5.6 Remote Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3 Topic Controller 59
3.1 The Controller topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.2 Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.2.1 How to activate hold-to-run control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.2.2 How to define path return region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.3 Type Auto Condition Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.3.1 The Auto Condition Reset type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.3.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 3
Table of Contents

3.3.3 Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.4 Type Automatic Loading of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.4.1 The Automatic Loading of Modules type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.4.2 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.4.3 Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.4.4 Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.4.5 Shared. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.4.6 All Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.4.7 Hidden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.5 Type Event Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.5.1 The Event Routine type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.5.2 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.5.3 Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.5.4 Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.5.5 Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.5.6 All Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.6 Type Mechanical Unit Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.6.1 The Mechanical Unit Group type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.6.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.6.3 Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.6.4 Mechanical Unit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.6.5 Use Motion Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.7 Type ModPos Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.7.1 The ModPos Settings type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.7.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.7.3 Limited ModPos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.7.4 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.7.5 Limit Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.7.6 Limit Rot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.7.7 Limit External Trans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.7.8 Limit External Rot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.7.9 Change to LModPos in Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.8 Type Operator Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.8.1 The Operator Safety type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.8.2 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.8.3 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
3.9 Type Path Return Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.9.1 The Path Return Region type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.9.2 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.9.3 TCP Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.9.4 TCP Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.9.5 External Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.9.6 External Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.10 Type Run Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.10.1 The Run Mode Settings type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.10.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.10.3 Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.11 Type Safety Run Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.11.1 The Safety Run Chain type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.11.2 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.11.3 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.12 Type System Misc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.12.1 The System Misc type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Table of Contents

3.12.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

3.12.3 Action values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.12.3.1 NoOfRetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.12.3.2 SimulateMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.12.4 Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.13 Type Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.13.1 The Task type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.13.2 Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.13.3 Task in Foreground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.13.4 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.13.5 Check Unresolved References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.13.6 Main Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.13.7 TrustLevel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.13.8 Use Mechanical Unit Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.13.9 MotionTask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.13.10 Hidden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.13.11 RMQ Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.13.12 RMQ Max Message Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.13.13 RMQ Max No Of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4 Topic I/O 129

4.1 The I/O topic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.2 Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.2.1 How to define I/O units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.2.2 How to list available I/O unit types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.2.3 How to define the I/O unit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.2.4 How to define input and output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2.5 How to define a signal group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2.6 How to define system inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.3 Type Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.3.1 The Access Level type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.3.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3.3 Rapid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
4.3.4 Local Client in Manual Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.3.5 Local Client in Auto Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

4.3.6 Remote Client in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

4.3.7 Remote Client in Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4.4 Type Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.4.1 The Bus type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.4.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.4.3 Type of Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.4.4 Connector ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.4.5 Label at Fieldbus Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.4.6 Automatic Bus Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.4.7 Recovery Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.4.8 Path to Bus Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.5 Type Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.5.1 The Cross Connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.5.2 Resultant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.5.3 Actor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.5.4 Invert Actor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.5.5 Operator 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.5.6 Actor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.5.7 Invert Actor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 5
Table of Contents

4.5.8 Operator 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

4.5.9 Actor 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.5.10 Invert Actor 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.5.11 Operator 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.5.12 Actor 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.5.13 Invert Actor 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.5.14 Operator 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.5.15 Actor 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.5.16 Invert Actor 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.6 Type Fieldbus Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.6.1 The Fieldbus Command type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.6.2 Assigned to Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.6.3 Type of Fieldbus Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.6.4 Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.7 Type Fieldbus Command Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.7.1 The Fieldbus Command Type type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.7.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.7.3 Type of Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.7.4 Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.7.5 Download Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.8 Type Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.8.1 The Signal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.8.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.8.3 Type of Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.8.4 Assigned to Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
4.8.5 Signal Identification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.8.6 Unit Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.8.7 Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.8.8 Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.8.9 Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.8.10 Store Signal Value at Power Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.8.11 Filter Time Passive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4.8.12 Filter Time Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.8.13 Invert Physical Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.8.14 Analog Encoding Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

4.8.15 Maximum Logical Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.8.16 Maximum Physical Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.8.17 Maximum Physical Value Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.8.18 Maximum Bit Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.8.19 Minimum Logical Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.8.20 Minimum Physical Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.8.21 Minimum Physical Value Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.8.22 Minimum Bit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.8.23 Signal Value at System Failure and Power Fail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4.9 Type System Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.9.1 The System Input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.9.2 Signal Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.9.3 Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.9.4 Action Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.9.4.1 Motors On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.9.4.2 Motors On and Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.9.4.3 Motors Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.9.4.4 Load and Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.9.4.5 Interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

6 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Table of Contents

4.9.4.6 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

4.9.4.7 Start at Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.9.4.8 Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.9.4.9 Quick Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.9.4.10 Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.9.4.11 Stop at End of Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.9.4.12 Stop at End of Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.9.4.13 Reset Execution Error Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.9.4.14 Reset Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.9.4.15 System Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
4.9.4.16 Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.9.5 Argument 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4.9.6 Argument 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4.10 Type System Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.10.1 The System Output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.10.2 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.10.3 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.10.4 Status values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.10.4.1 Auto On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.10.4.2 Simulated I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.10.4.3 Cycle On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.10.4.4 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.10.4.5 Execution Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.10.4.6 Motors Off State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.10.4.7 Motors On State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.10.4.8 Motors Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.10.4.9 Motors On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.10.4.10 Motion Supervision On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.10.4.11 Motion Supervision Triggered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.10.4.12 Power Fail Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4.10.4.13 Path Return Region Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.10.4.14 Run Chain OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.10.4.15 TCP Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.10.4.16 TCP Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.10.4.17 Mechanical Unit Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.10.4.18 TaskExecuting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

4.10.5 Argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

4.10.6 Argument 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.11 Type Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.11.1 The Unit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.11.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.11.3 Type of Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.11.4 Connected to Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.11.5 Unit Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4.11.6 Unit Trustlevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4.11.7 Unit Startup State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4.11.8 Store Unit State at Power Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.11.9 Regain Communication Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.11.10 PROFIBUS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.11.11 Interbus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.12 Type Unit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.12.1 The Unit Type type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
4.12.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.12.3 Type of Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 7
Table of Contents

4.12.4 Vendor Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

4.12.5 Product Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.12.6 Product ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.12.7 Internal Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4.12.8 Internal Slave Input Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.12.9 Internal Slave Output Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

5 Topic Man-machine Communication 277

5.1 The Man-machine Communication topic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
5.2 Type Most Common I/O Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.2.1 The Most Common I/O Signal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.2.2 Signal Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.2.3 Signal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.3 Type Production Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
5.3.1 The Production Permission type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
5.3.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.3.3 Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
5.4 Type Most Common Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.4.1 The Most Common Instruction types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.4.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
5.4.3 Parameter Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.4.4 Alternative Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.4.5 Instruction Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.4.6 Only for Motion Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

6 Topic Motion 291

6.1 The Motion topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
6.2 Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
6.2.1 How to define base frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
6.2.2 How to define work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6.2.3 How to define arm check point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
6.2.4 How to define arm loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
6.2.5 How to optimize drive system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
6.2.6 How to tune motion supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
6.2.7 How to define transmission gear ratio for independent joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
6.2.8 How to define external torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
6.2.9 How to define supervision level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
6.3 Type Acceleration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
6.3.1 The Acceleration Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
6.3.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
6.3.3 Nominal Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
6.3.4 Nominal Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
6.3.5 Acceleration Derivate Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
6.3.6 Deceleration Derivate Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
6.4 Type Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
6.4.1 The Arm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
6.4.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
6.4.3 Independent Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
6.4.4 Upper Joint Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6.4.5 Lower Joint Bound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
6.4.6 Independent Upper Joint Bound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
6.4.7 Independent Lower Joint Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
6.4.8 Calibration Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

8 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Table of Contents

6.4.9 Load Id Acceleration Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

6.4.10 Performance Quota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
6.4.11 Jam Supervision Trim Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
6.4.12 Load Supervision Trim Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
6.4.13 Speed Supervision Trim Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
6.4.14 Position Supervision Trim Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
6.4.15 External Const Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
6.4.16 External Proportional Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
6.4.17 External Torque Zero Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
6.4.18 Angle Acceleration Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6.5 Type Arm Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
6.5.1 The Arm Check Point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
6.5.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
6.5.3 Position x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.6 Type Arm Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6.6.1 The Arm Load type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6.6.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
6.6.3 Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
6.6.4 Mass Center x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
6.6.5 Inertia x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
6.7 Type Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.7.1 The Brake type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.7.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
6.7.3 Control Off Speed Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
6.7.4 Control Off Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
6.7.5 Brake Control On Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
6.7.6 Brake Control Min Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
6.7.7 Absolute Brake Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
6.7.8 Brake Ramp Speed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
6.8 Type Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
6.8.1 The Control Parameters type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
6.8.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
6.8.3 Friction FFW On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
6.8.4 Friction FFW Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
6.8.5 Friction FFW Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

6.9 Type Drive Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

6.9.1 The Drive Module type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
6.9.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
6.9.3 Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
6.10 Type Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
6.10.1 The Drive System type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
6.10.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
6.10.3 Use Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.10.4 Current Vector On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
6.11 Type Force Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
6.11.1 The Force Master type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
6.11.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
6.11.3 Use Force Master Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
6.11.4 References Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.11.5 Use Ramp Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.11.6 Ramp when Increasing Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
6.11.7 Ramp Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
6.11.8 Collision LP Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 9
Table of Contents

6.11.9 Collision Alarm Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

6.11.10 Collision Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
6.11.11 Collision Delta Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
6.11.12 Force Detection Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6.11.13 Delay ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.11.14 Ramp to real contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
6.12 Type Force Master Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.12.1 The Force Master Control type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.12.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
6.12.3 No. of Speed Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
6.12.4 torque 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
6.12.5 torque 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
6.12.6 torque 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6.12.7 torque 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
6.12.8 torque 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
6.12.9 torque 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6.12.10 Speed Limit 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
6.12.11 Speed Limit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
6.12.12 Speed Limit 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
6.12.13 Speed Limit 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
6.12.14 Speed Limit 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
6.12.15 Speed Limit 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
6.12.16 Kv 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
6.12.17 Kv 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
6.12.18 Kv 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
6.12.19 Kv 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
6.12.20 Kv 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
6.12.21 Kv 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
6.13 Type Friction Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
6.13.1 The Friction Compensation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
6.13.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
6.13.3 Friction FFW On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
6.13.4 Friction FFW Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
6.13.5 Friction FFW Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
6.14 Type Jog Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

6.14.1 The Jog Parameters type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
6.14.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
6.14.3 Configurable Linear Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
6.14.4 Configurable Reorient Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
6.14.5 Configurable Joint Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
6.15 Type Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
6.15.1 The Joint type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
6.15.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
6.15.3 Logical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
6.15.4 Use Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
6.15.5 Lock Joint in Ipol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
6.15.6 Follower to Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
6.16 Type Lag Control Master 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
6.16.1 The Lag Control Master 0 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
6.16.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
6.16.3 Kp, Gain Position Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
6.16.4 Kv, Gain Speed Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
6.16.5 Ti Integration Time Speed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
6.16.6 Forced Control Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

10 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Table of Contents

6.16.7 Forced Factor for Kp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

6.16.8 Forced Factor for Ki . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
6.16.9 Raise Time for Kp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
6.16.10 Notch Filter Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
6.16.11 Notch Filter Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
6.16.12 Notch Filter Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
6.16.13 Notch Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
6.16.14 Auto No Weave Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
6.16.15 Auto Min Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
6.16.16 Auto Max Relative Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
6.16.17 FFW Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
6.16.18 Bandwidth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
6.16.19 Df . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
6.16.20 Dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
6.16.21 Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
6.16.22 Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
6.16.23 K Soft Max Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
6.16.24 K Soft Min Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
6.16.25 Kp/Kv Ratio Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
6.16.26 Ramp Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
6.17 Type Linked M Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
6.17.1 The Linked M Process type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
6.17.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
6.17.3 Offset Adjust Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
6.17.4 Max Follower Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
6.17.5 Max Offset Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
6.17.6 Offset Speed Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
6.17.7 Ramp Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
6.17.8 Master Follower kp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
6.18 Type Mains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
6.18.1 The Mains type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
6.18.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
6.18.3 Mains Tolerance Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
6.18.4 Mains Tolerance Max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
6.19 Type Measurement Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

6.19.1 The Measurement Channel type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

6.19.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
6.19.3 Use Measurement Board Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
6.19.4 Disconnect at Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
6.19.5 Measurement Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
6.19.6 Board Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
6.20 Type Mechanical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
6.20.1 The Mechanical Unit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
6.20.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
6.20.3 Use Activation Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
6.20.4 Use Brake Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
6.20.5 Use Connection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
6.20.6 Use Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
6.20.7 Use Single 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
6.20.8 Allow Move of User Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
6.20.9 Activate at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
6.20.10 Deactivation Forbidden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
6.20.11 Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
6.20.12 Activate from any motion task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 11
Table of Contents

6.21 Type Motion Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

6.21.1 The Motion Planner type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
6.21.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
6.21.3 Brake on Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
6.21.4 Dynamic Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
6.21.5 Path Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
6.21.6 Queue Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
6.21.7 Teach Mode Max Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
6.21.8 Process Update Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
6.21.9 Prefetch Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
6.21.10 Event Preset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
6.21.11 CPU Load Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
6.21.12 Use Motion Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
6.21.13 Motion Supervision Permanent Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
6.21.14 Motion Supervision Max Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
6.21.15 Remove Corner Path Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
6.21.16 Time Event Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
6.21.17 High Interpolation Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
6.21.18 Speed Control Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
6.21.19 Speed Control Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
6.22 Type Motion Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
6.22.1 The Motion Supervision type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
6.22.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
6.22.3 Path Collision Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
6.22.4 Jog Collision Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
6.22.5 Path Collision Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
6.22.6 Jog Collision Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
6.22.7 Collision Detection Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
6.23 Type Motion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
6.23.1 The Motion System type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
6.23.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
6.23.3 Min Temperature Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
6.23.4 Max Temperature Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
6.23.5 Min Temperature Robot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
6.23.6 Max Temperature Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

6.24 Type Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
6.24.1 The Motor type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
6.24.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
6.24.3 Use Motor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
6.24.4 Use Motor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
6.25 Type Motor Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
6.25.1 The Motor Calibration type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
6.25.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
6.25.3 Commutator Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
6.25.4 Commutator Offset Valid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
6.25.5 Calibration Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
6.25.6 Calibration Offset Valid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
6.25.7 Calibration Sensor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
6.26 Type Motor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
6.26.1 The type Motor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
6.26.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
6.26.3 Pole Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
6.26.4 Stall Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
6.26.5 ke Phase to Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

12 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Table of Contents

6.26.6 Max Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

6.26.7 Phase Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
6.26.8 Phase Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
6.27 Type Path Sensor Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
6.27.1 The Path Sensor Synchronization type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
6.27.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
6.27.3 Max Advance Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
6.27.4 Max Delay Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
6.27.5 Max Synchronization Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
6.27.6 Min Synchronization Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
6.27.7 Synchronization Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
6.28 Type Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
6.28.1 The Process type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
6.28.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
6.28.3 Use SG Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
6.28.4 Use Linked Motor Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
6.29 Type Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
6.29.1 The Relay type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
6.29.2 Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
6.29.3 Input Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
6.30 Type Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
6.30.1 The Robot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
6.30.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
6.30.3 Use Old SMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
6.30.4 Use Joint 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
6.30.5 Base Frame x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
6.30.6 Base Frame q1, q2, q3, q4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
6.30.7 Base Frame Moved by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
6.30.8 Gravity Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
6.30.9 Gravity Beta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
6.30.10 Gamma Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
6.30.11 Upper Work Area x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
6.30.12 Lower Work Area x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
6.30.13 Upper Check Point Bound x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
6.30.14 Lower Check Point Bound x, y, z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

6.30.15 Use Six Axes Corvec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

6.30.16 Track Conveyor with Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
6.30.17 7 axes high performance motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
6.30.18 Time to Inposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
6.31 The Robot Serial Number type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
6.31.1 The Robot Serial Number type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
6.31.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
6.31.3 Robot Serial Number High Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
6.31.4 Robot Serial Number Low Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
6.32 Type SG Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
6.32.1 The SG Process type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
6.32.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
6.32.3 Use Force Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
6.32.4 Sync Check Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
6.32.5 Close time adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
6.32.6 Close position adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
6.32.7 Force Ready Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
6.32.8 Max Force Control Motor Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
6.32.9 Post-synchronization Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 13
Table of Contents

6.32.10 Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

6.32.11 Calibration Force High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
6.32.12 Calibration Force Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
6.32.13 Calibration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
6.32.14 Number of Stored Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
6.32.15 Tip Force 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
6.32.16 Motor Torque 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
6.32.17 Soft Stop Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
6.33 Type Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
6.33.1 The Single type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
6.33.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
6.33.3 Use Single Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
6.33.4 Use Joint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
6.33.5 Base Frame x, y, z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
6.33.6 Base Frame q1, q2, q3, q4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
6.33.7 Base Frame Coordinated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
6.34 Type Single Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
6.34.1 The Single Type type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
6.34.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
6.34.3 Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
6.35 Type SIS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
6.35.1 The SIS Parameters type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
6.35.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
6.35.3 Operational Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
6.35.4 Calendar Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
6.35.5 Operational Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
6.35.6 Calendar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
6.35.7 Gearbox Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
6.36 Type Stress Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
6.36.1 The Stress Duty Cycle type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
6.36.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
6.36.3 Speed Absolute Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
6.36.4 Torque Absolute Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
6.37 Type Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
6.37.1 The Supervision type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
6.37.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
6.37.3 Brake Release Supervision On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
6.37.4 Speed Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
6.37.5 Position Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
6.37.6 Counter Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
6.37.7 Jam Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
6.37.8 Load Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
6.37.9 Power Up Position Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
6.37.10 In Position Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
6.37.11 Zero Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
6.37.12 Affects Forced Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
6.37.13 Forced on Position Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
6.37.14 Forced off Position Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
6.38 Type Supervision Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
6.38.1 The type Supervision Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
6.38.2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
6.38.3 Max Force Control Position Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
6.38.4 Max Force Control Speed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
6.38.5 Dynamic Power Up Position Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

14 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Table of Contents

6.38.6 Teach Max Speed Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

6.38.7 Max Jam Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
6.38.8 Max Overload Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
6.38.9 Teach Normalized Low Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
6.38.10 Auto Max Speed Supervision Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
6.38.11 Influence Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
6.38.12 Alarm Position Limit for Brake Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
6.38.13 Position OK Ratio for Brake Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
6.39 Type Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
6.39.1 The Transmission type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
6.39.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
6.39.3 Rotating Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
6.39.4 Transmission Gear Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
6.39.5 Transmission Gear High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
6.39.6 Transmission Gear Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
6.40 Type Uncalibrated Control Master 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
6.40.1 The Uncalibrated Control Master 0 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
6.40.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
6.40.3 Kp, Gain Position Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
6.40.4 Kv, Gain Speed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
6.40.5 Ti Integration Time Speed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
6.40.6 Speed Max Uncalibrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
6.40.7 Acceleration Max Uncalibrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
6.40.8 Deceleration Max Uncalibrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Index 637
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 15
16
Table of Contents

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
 Manual overview

Manual overview

About this manual

This manual describes the IRC5 system parameters by topic and type in an overview. It also
covers some basic workflow descriptions on how to add, edit and delete parameters. This can
be done via specific software tools, which are not described here, nor how to use them.
The manual covers the most common types and parameters in the topics Communication,
Controller, I/O, Man-machine Communication, and Motion.

Usage
This manual should be used as a reference during configuration of the robot system.
The manual includes parameters for both the basic robot system and selected software and
hardware options. The option parameters require that you have the specified option installed
in your robot system.
It is recommended that you create a backup or save the configuration files before changing
any parameters.
Note! This should only be performed by a trained technician!

Who should read this manual?

This manual is intended for:
• production technicians
• programmers
• service technicians

Prerequisites
The reader should be familiar with:
• industrial robots and terminology
• the RAPID programming language
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• how to configure system parameters using RobotStudio Online or FlexPendant.

Organization of chapters
The manual is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter Content
1. About system parameters
2. Topic Communication
3. Topic Controller
4. Topic Man-machine Communication
5. Topic I/O
6. Topic Motion

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 17
Manual overview

Continued

References
The manual contains references to the following information products:

Reference Document id
Operating manual - Getting started, IRC5 and RobotStudio Online 3HAC027097-001
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant 3HAC16590-1
Operating manual - RobotStudio Online 3HAC18236-1
Operating manual - Trouble shooting 3HAC020738-001
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum 3HAC16578-1
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and 3HAC16581-1
Data types
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview 3HAC16580-1
Technical reference manual - RAPID kernel 3HAC16585-1
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller 3HAC021395-001
Application manual - DeviceNet 3HAC020676-001
Application manual - Engineering tools 3HAC020434-001
Application manual - InterBus 3HAC023009-001
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision 3HAC18154-1
Application manual - Motion functions and events 3HAC18152-1
Application manual - Motion performance 3HAC18153-1
Application manual - MultiMove 3HAC021272-001
Application manual - PROFIBUS-DP 3HAC023008-001
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control 3HAC020435-001
Application manual - Servo motor control 3HAC020436-001

Revisions
The following revisions of this manual have been released.

Revision Description
- First edition, released with IRC5 RW 5.04. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
A Released with IRC5 RW 5.05.
The printed manual split in two parts.
Chapter Man-machine Communication added.
Chapter Motion extended with more types and parameter descriptions.
B Released with IRC5 RW 5.06.
Chapter Motion extended to include all visible parameters.
C Released with IRC5 RW 5.07.
D Released with IRC5 RW 5.08.
New parameters added in topics Motion and I/O.
Type Drive System added in topic Motion.
E Released with IRC5 RW 5.09.
New parameters in Motion and I/O.
New types Auto Condition Reset and Run Mode Settings added in topic
Controller.
All DeviceNet parameters moved to Application manual - DeviceNet.

Continues on next page

18 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Manual overview

Continued

Revision Description
F Released with IRC5 RW 5.10.
Changes in topic I/O: System Input has new action value, Load. System Output
has new parameter, Argument 2, and new status value, TaskExecuting. In
addition, there are several minor changes in the sections about System Input
and System Output.
Changes in topic Controller: New parameters in type Task for the new function-
ality RAPID Message Queue.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 19
Product documentation, M2004

Product documentation, M2004

General
The robot documentation is divided into a number of categories. This listing is based on the
type of information contained within the documents, regardless of whether the products are
standard or optional. This means that any given delivery of robot products will not contain all
documents listed, only the ones pertaining to the equipment delivered.
However, all documents listed may be ordered from ABB. The documents listed are valid for
M2004 robot systems.

Product manuals
All hardware, robots and controllers, will be delivered with a Product manual that contains:
• Safety information
• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation, electrical
connections)
• Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures
including intervals)
• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare parts)
• Additional procedures, if any (calibration, decommissioning)
• Reference information (article numbers for documentation referred to in Product
manual, procedures, lists of tools, safety standards)
• Part list
• Foldouts or exploded views
• Circuit diagrams

Technical reference manuals

The following manuals describe the robot software in general and contain relevant reference
information:

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• RAPID Overview: An overview of the RAPID programming language.
• RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types: Description and syntax for all
RAPID instructions, functions and data types.
• System parameters: Description of system parameters and configuration workflows.

Application manuals
Specific applications (for example software or hardware options) are described in
Application manuals. An application manual can describe one or several applications.
An application manual generally contains information about:
• The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful)
• What is included (for example cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system
parameters, CD with PC software)
• How to use the application
• Examples of how to use the application

Continues on next page

20 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 Product documentation, M2004

Continued

Operating manuals
This group of manuals is aimed at those having first hand operational contact with the robot,
that is production cell operators, programmers and trouble shooters. The group of manuals
includes:
• Emergency safety information
• Getting started - IRC5 and RobotStudio Online
• IRC5 with FlexPendant
• RobotStudio Online
• Trouble shooting - IRC5 for the controller and robot
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 21
Product documentation, M2004

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

22 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 1 About system parameters
1.1. About system parameters

1 About system parameters

1.1. About system parameters

Overview
System parameters describe the configuration of the robot system. The parameters are
configured according to order on delivery.
By changing the parameters' values, the performance of the system can be adjusted. The
system parameters usually only need changing if the robot system is modified due to a
changed process.

Parameter structure
The parameters are grouped together in a number of different configuration areas, named
topics. These topics are divided into sections, named types. Each type represents a specific
configuration task defined by the settings of the system parameters in the type.

Topic definition
A topic is a configuration area with a specific collection of parameters.
There are six topics in the controller, each describing different areas in the robot system.
• Communication: serial channels and file transfer protocols
• Controller: safety and RAPID specific functions
• I/O: I/O boards and signals
• Man-machine Communication: functions to simplify working with the system
• Motion: the robot and external axes
• Process: process-specific tools and equipment

Type definition
A type is a section of a topic, and defines a configuration task. The type can sometimes be
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

reused many times, but the combination of parameter values is unique.

A combination of parameters for a type is called an instance. The instance is named after the
type, e.g. an instance (set of parameters) of the type Signal is called a Signal.

System parameters definition

The parameters are assigned a value to describe a task in the robot system configuration.
The parameter values are normally predefined on delivery. The values are restricted to data
type, and sometimes intervals, this is described for each parameter in Technical reference
manual - System parameters.
Most parameters require a restart of the controller to take effect after being changed.
Some parameters are visible but not editable since they are a part of the system and should
not be changed.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 23
1 About system parameters
1.1. About system parameters

Continued

Working with system parameters

System parameters are configured using RobotStudio Online or the FlexPendant. This is
detailed in Operating manual - RobotStudio Online and Operating manual - IRC5 with
FlexPendant.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

24 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.1. The Communication topic

2 Topic Communication
2.1. The Communication topic

Overview
This chapter describes the types and parameters of the Communication topic. Each parameter
is described in the section for its type.

Description
The Communication topic contains parameters for configuring the controller's serial channels
and file transfer protocols. The parameters are organized in three types:
1. Application protocol
2. Physical channel
3. Transmission protocol
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 25
2 Topic Communication
2.2.1. How to define an application protocol

2.2 Workflows

2.2.1. How to define an application protocol

Overview
Application protocols are options for data transmission in the robot system.

Prerequisites
A physical channel and a transmission protocol must be defined before an application
protocol can be defined.
The option NFS Client or FTP Client must be installed in the robot system.

How to define an application protocol

To define an application protocol:
1. In the topic Communication, choose the type Application Protocol.
2. Select the application protocol to define, or add a new one.
3. Enter, delete or change the parameters of the application protocol. Note that the required
parameters vary depending on the option installed. See description of the type Application
Protocol for examples.
For detailed information about each parameter and examples of typical configurations,
see the descriptions in the type Application Protocol.
4. Save the changes

Related information
The Application Protocol type on page 29.
How to define a physical channel on page 27.
How to define a transmission protocol on page 28.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

26 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.2.2. How to define a physical channel

2.2.2. How to define a physical channel

Overview
With the Physical Channels you configure the serial channels, which can be used for
communication with printers, terminals, computers, and other equipment.

How to define a physical channel

To define a physical channel:
1. In the topic Communication, choose the type Physical Channel.
2. Select the physical channel to define, or add a new one.
3. Enter, delete or change the parameters of the physical channel.
For detailed information about each parameter, see the descriptions in the type Physical
Channel.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
The Physical Channel type on page 44.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 27
2 Topic Communication
2.2.3. How to define a transmission protocol

2.2.3. How to define a transmission protocol

Overview
Transmission protocols are standards for data transmission.

Prerequisites
A physical channel must be defined before a transmission protocol can be defined.

How to define a transmission protocol

To define a transmission protocol:
1. In the topic Communication, choose the type Transmission Protocol.
2. Select the transmission protocol to define, or add a new one.
3. Edit the parameters of the transmission protocol.
For detailed information about each parameter, see descriptions in the type Transmission
Protocol.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
The Transmission Protocol type on page 53.
How to define a physical channel on page 27.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

28 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.1. The Application Protocol type

2.3 Type Application Protocol

2.3.1. The Application Protocol type

Overview
This section describes the type Application Protocol, which belongs to the topic
Communication. Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in
this section.

Cfg name
COM_APP

Type description
Application protocols are standards for data transmission on application level. The robot
system can use different protocols, but only one at a time.
The application protocols are options for the robot system.

Prerequisites
A physical channel and a transmission protocol must be defined before an application
protocol can be defined.

Related information
How to define an application protocol on page 26.
How to define a physical channel on page 27.
How to define a transmission protocol on page 28.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

Example: FTP
This is a typical example of a configuration for FTP Client.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Parameter: Value:
Name MyFTP
Type FTP
Transmission Protocol MyTransmissionProtocol
Server Address 100.100.1.10
Trusted Yes
Local Path pc:test.prg
Server Path c:\backup
Username Operator1
Password robot
Maximum File Size 1000
Memory Partition Size 500

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 29
2 Topic Communication
2.3.1. The Application Protocol type

Continued

Example: NFS
This is a typical example of a configuration for NFS Client.

Parameter: Value:
Name MyNFS
Type NFS
Transmission Protocol TCP/IP
Server Address 255.255.100.105
Trusted Yes
Local Path pc:test.prg
Server Path c:backup
User ID 10
Group ID 0

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

30 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.2. Name

2.3.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The name of the application protocol.

Usage
Used as a protocol label (to tell the application protocols apart).

Allowed values
A string with maximum 40 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 31
2 Topic Communication
2.3.3. Type

2.3.3. Type

Parent
Type belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Type

Description
The type of application protocol.

Usage
Specify the type of application protocol, FTP or NFS.

Allowed values
FTP or NFS

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

32 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.4. Transmission Protocol

2.3.4. Transmission Protocol

Parent
Transmission Protocol belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Trp

Description
Specifies which transmission protocol is used by the application protocol.

Usage
Transmission Protocol is set to the same value as the parameter Name, in the type
Transmission Protocol, for the transmission protocol you want to use (e.g. TCP/IP).

Allowed values
A string with maximum 40 characters.

Related information
Name on page 54.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 33
2 Topic Communication
2.3.5. Server Address

2.3.5. Server Address

Parent
Server Address belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
ServerAddress

Description
The IP address of the computer that runs the server application that the application protocol
communicates with.

Usage
If the application protocol is used for communication with a remote computer, the IP address
of that computer is specified in Server Address.

Allowed values
Four integers between 0 and 255, separated with dots.

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

Example
An IP address typically looks like this:
100.100.100.100

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

34 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.6. Trusted

2.3.6. Trusted

Parent
Trusted belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Trusted

Description
A flag that specifies if losing the connection should make the program stop.

Usage
An application protocol used for backups or similar can have Trusted set to No. If the
connection is lost, the program continues and the backup can be made later.
An application protocol that relies on the connection for safety must have Trusted set to Yes.
If the connection is lost, the program will stop and no hazardous situations can occur because
of the lost connection.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 35
2 Topic Communication
2.3.7. Local Path

2.3.7. Local Path

Parent
Local Path belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
LocalPath

Description
The controller's reference to the connection.

Usage
When the connection is used from a RAPID program or the FlexPendant, it is referenced with
the name defined in Local Path.
Defines what the shared unit will be called on the robot. The parameter value must end with
a colon (:).

Allowed values
A string with a maximum of 20 characters. The string must end with a colon (:).

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

Example
The application protocol is used for a connection with unit C: on a remote PC. Local Path is
set to pc:. The file C:\test.prg can then be accessed from a RAPID program or the
FlexPendant as pc:test.prg.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

36 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.8. Server Path

2.3.8. Server Path

Parent
Server Path belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
ServerPath

Description
The name of the disk or folder to connect to, on a remote computer.

Usage
Specify the path of the disk or folder that the application protocol should connect to.
NOTE!
If communicating with an FTP server of type Distinct FTP or MS IIS, the exported path
should not be specified.

Allowed values
A string with a maximum of 40 characters.

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

Example
The usage of Server Path may depend on which FTP server is being used.

For most FTP servers

If the application protocol should connect to the folder C:\Robot1\Backup on a remote
computer, Server Path is set to C:\Robot1\Backup.

For FTP servers Distinct FTP and MS IIS

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

If the server exports C:\Robot1 and the application protocol want to connect to
C:\Robot1\Backup, Server Path is set to Backup.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 37
2 Topic Communication
2.3.9. Username

2.3.9. Username

Parent
Username belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
UserName

Description
The user name used by the robot when it logs on to an FTP server on a remote computer.

Usage
Create a user account on the FTP server. The user name of this account is then specified in
Username, and the password in Password.

Limitations
Username is only used with the RobotWare option FTP Client.

Allowed values
A string with a maximum of 40 characters.

Related information
Password on page 39.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

38 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.10. Password

2.3.10. Password

Parent
Password belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Password

Description
The password used by the robot when it logs on to an FTP server on a remote computer.

Usage
Create a user account on the FTP server. The user name of this account is then specified in
Username, and the password in Password.

Limitations
Password is only used with the RobotWare option FTP Client.

Allowed values
A string with a maximum of 40 characters.

Additional information
Note that the password written here will be visible to all who have access to the system
parameters.

Related information
Username on page 38.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 39
2 Topic Communication
2.3.11. User ID

2.3.11. User ID

Parent
User ID belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
UserID

Description
Used by the NFS protocol as a way of authorizing the user to access a specific server.

Usage
If the NFS server requires a User ID and Group ID for access to the server, these numbers are
specified in the parameters User ID and Group ID.
If this parameter is not used, set it to the default value 0.
Note that User ID must be the same for all mountings on one controller.

Limitations
User ID is only used with the RobotWare option NFS Client.

Allowed values
An integer between 0 and 2,147,483,647.
Default value is 0.

Related information
Group ID on page 41.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

40 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.12. Group ID

2.3.12. Group ID

Parent
Group ID belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
GroupID

Description
Used by the NFS protocol as a way of authorizing the user to access a specific server.

Usage
If the NFS server requires a User ID and Group ID for access to the server, these numbers are
specified in the parameters User ID and Group ID.
If this parameter is not used, set it to the default value 0.
Note that Group ID must be the same for all mountings on one controller.

Limitations
Group ID is only used with the RobotWare option NFS Client.

Allowed values
An integer between 0 and 2,147,483,647.
Default value is 0.

Related information
User ID on page 40.
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 41
2 Topic Communication
2.3.13. Maximum File Size

2.3.13. Maximum File Size

Parent
Maximum File Size belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
MaxFileSize

Description
The parameter Maximum File Size defines the maximum file size for files to be transferred
between the controller and remote clients.

Usage
Transferring large files between the controller and remote clients, e.g. a pc, can make the
system slow. By setting the maximum allowed file size to be transferred, the system will not
be slowed down when files are being transferred.
If the file size is larger than the value of Maximum File Size, an error report is generated in
the event handler.

Limitations
Maximum File Size is only used with the RobotWare option FTP Client.

Allowed values
File size in kB (kilo bytes), between 1 and 2000.
Default value is 500 kB.

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

42 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.3.14. Memory Partition Size

2.3.14. Memory Partition Size

Parent
Memory Partition Size belongs to the type Application Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
CommPartSize

Description
The parameter Memory Partition Size defines the size of the allocated memory partition for
the FTP communication.

Usage
By using a separate memory partition for the FTP communication, the risk of disturbing other
program execution is avoided.
If no separate memory partition is desired, set the value to 0.

Prerequisites
Memory Partition Size is only used with the RobotWare option FTP Client.

Allowed values
Partition size in kB (kilo bytes), between 0 and 2000.
Default value is 300 kB.
Note that values above default value cannot be guaranteed to function. The available memory
partition size depends on what other options are installed.

Related information
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 43
2 Topic Communication
2.4.1. The Physical Channel type

2.4 Type Physical Channel

2.4.1. The Physical Channel type

Overview
This section describes the type Physical Channel, which belongs to the topic Communication.
Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
COM_PHY_CHANNEL

Type description
Physical channels are used for configuring the serial channels on the controller.
As standard, the controller has one serial channel, which can be used for communication with
printers, terminals, computers, and other equipment.
If the controller has option Multiple Serial Ports installed, there can be three serial channels
available.

Serial channel: Description:

COM1 A standard RS232 port
COM2 Only available if Multiple Serial Ports is installed
COM3 Only available if Multiple Serial Ports is installed

Related information
How to define a physical channel on page 27.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

44 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.4.2. Name

2.4.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Name specifies the logical connection. It is used when accessing the physical serial channel.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 16 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 45
2 Topic Communication
2.4.3. Connector

2.4.3. Connector

Parent
Connector belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Connector

Description
Connector connects a physical communication port with a specific configuration in the
system.

Allowed values
COM1 in a standard system.
Also, COM2 and COM3, in a system with Multiple Serial Ports installed.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

46 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.4.4. Baudrate

2.4.4. Baudrate

Parent
Baudrate belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Baudrate

Description
Baudrate defines the baud the controller will operate on for the selected physical channel.

Usage
Baud is the signalling rate of the communication, which determines the maximum speed of
the data transfer in serial channels. The higher the baud, the faster the communication can be.

Limitations
Both devices, the serial ports in both ends, that communicate on the channel have to use the
same baud. The devices have to be defined with the same transmission speed. Therefore,
Baudrate must be set to the baud of the device that is connected to the controller.

Allowed values
A value between 300-38,400, specifying the signal rate.
The default value is 9,600.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 47
2 Topic Communication
2.4.5. Parity

2.4.5. Parity

Parent
Parity belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Parity

Description
Parity configures the parity check for the data transfer.

Usage
Parity check is an error detection method to help detect data corruption that might occur
during transmission of data. The parity check adds a parity bit to each byte that is transmitted.
Depending on whether the transmitted byte contains an odd or even number of 1-bits, the
parity bit will be either 0 or 1. Each time a data byte is received, it is checked that the number
of 1-bits matches the parity bit.

Limitations
Both receiver and transmitter of data must agree on the type of parity.

Allowed values
Value:: Description:
Odd The number of 1-bits in a transfer byte must be odd. If they are odd, the
parity bit is set to 0.
Even The number of 1-bits in a transfer byte must be odd. If they are even, the
parity bit is set to 1.
None No parity check is performed.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

48 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.4.6. Number of Bits

2.4.6. Number of Bits

Parent
Number of Bits belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
NoOfBits

Description
Number of Bits defines the number of data bits in each byte.

Usage
The number of bits depends on the device the controller should communicate with. Both
receiver and transmitter must agree on the number of data bits as well as the baudrate. There
may either be 7 or 8 data bits depending on the selection made.

Limitations
Both receiver and transmitter of data must agree on the number of bits.

Allowed values
7 or 8, specifying the number of data bits.

Related information
Baudrate on page 47.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 49
2 Topic Communication
2.4.7. Number of Stop Bits

2.4.7. Number of Stop Bits

Parent
Number of Stop Bits belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
NoOfStopBits

Description
Number of Stop Bits defines the number of stop bits.

Usage
A stop bit is used to identify the end of a data byte when it is transmitted. A stop bit can be
detected correctly even if the previous data bit also had a value of 1. This is accomplished by
the stop bit's duration.

Limitations
Both receiver and transmitter of data must agree on the number of bits.
Stop bits are excluded from the parity calculation. For more information about parity, see
Parity.

Allowed values
1 or 2, specifying the number of stop bits.

Related information
Parity on page 48.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

50 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.4.8. Duplex

2.4.8. Duplex

Parent
Duplex belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Duplex

Description
Duplex defines whether or not the controller shall be able to send and receive data
simultaneously on this physical channel.

Usage
Duplex is the ability to transport data in both directions.
With full duplex the controller is able to both send and receive data at the same time.
With half duplex the data flow is limited to one direction at a time.

Allowed values
FULL or HALF.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 51
2 Topic Communication
2.4.9. Flow Control

2.4.9. Flow Control

Parent
Flow Control belongs to the type Physical Channel, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
FlowControl

Description
Flow Control defines which type of data flow control is used between the devices that are
communicating on the physical channel.

Usage
Flow control adjusts the data transfer so that no data is sent before the receiving device can
receive it. Flow control is extra important when the sending device can send data at a higher
speed than the receiving device is able to receive.

Limitation
Both receiver and transmitter of data must agree on the type of flow control used.

Allowed values
Value: Description:
RTS/CTS Hardware flow control, uses signals on the serial cable to control if sending or
receiving is enabled.
XON/XOFF Software flow control, uses characters in the communication stream to control
sending and receiving of data.
NONE Flow control will not be used.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

52 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.5.1. The Transmission Protocol type

2.5 Type Transmission Protocol

2.5.1. The Transmission Protocol type

Overview
This section describes the type Transmission Protocol which belongs to the topic
Communication. Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in
this section.

Cfg name
COM_TRP

Type description
Transmission protocols are standards for data transmission.

Related information
How to define a transmission protocol on page 28.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 53
2 Topic Communication
2.5.2. Name

2.5.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Transmission Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Name specifies the name of the transmission protocol. Transmission protocols are used for
transferring data.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 16 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

54 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.5.3. Type

2.5.3. Type

Parent
Type belongs to the type Transmission Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
Type

Description
Type defines the type of transmission protocol to be used.

Limitations
TCP/IP settings can only be viewed from the Configuration Editor in RobotStudio Online.
For detailed information, see Operating manual - RobotStudio Online, chapter Configure the
system.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
PPP Point-To-Point protocol, provides communication for simple links which transport
packets between two nodes. Thereby, it is only possible to run PPP on the serial
channels, i.e. COM1.
RAW Protocol without handshakes.

Related information
The Physical Channel type on page 44.
Operating manual - RobotStudio Online.
For configuration of the LAN port, see Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 55
2 Topic Communication
2.5.4. Physical Channel

2.5.4. Physical Channel

Parent
Physical Channel belongs to the type Transmission Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
PhyChannel

Description
Physical Channel connects a transmission protocol with a physical channel.

Limitations
It is not possible to connect to the LAN port. For configuration of the LAN port, see
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

Allowed values
COM1, in a standard system.
Also, COM2 and COM3, in a system with Multiple Serial Ports installed.

Related information
The Physical Channel type on page 44.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

56 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 2 Topic Communication
2.5.5. Local Address

2.5.5. Local Address

Parent
Local Address belongs to the type Transmission Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
LocalAdress

Description
Local Address specifies an IP address of the controller's serial port, i.e. COM1.

Limitations
The parameter Local Address can only be used when the parameter Type has the value PPP.

Allowed values
A string consisting of 4 integer values between 0 and 255, each specifying one of the four
parts, separated by dots.

Related information
Type on page 55.

Example
An IP address consists of four parts, each with eight bits, separated by dots:
100.100.100.100 or 138.227.1.45.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 57
2 Topic Communication
2.5.6. Remote Address

2.5.6. Remote Address

Parent
Remote Address belongs to the type Transmission Protocol, in the topic Communication.

Cfg name
RemoteAdress

Description
Remote Address specifies an IP address of the remote peer's serial port. This can be the IP
address of the serial port on a PC used for communication with the controller.

Limitations
The parameter Remote Address can only be used when the parameter Type has the value PPP.

Allowed values
A string consisting of 4 integer values between 0 and 255, each specifying one of the four
parts, separated by dots.

Related information
Type on page 55.

Example
An IP address consists of four parts, each with eight bits, separated by dots:
100.100.100.100 or 138.227.1.45.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

58 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.1. The Controller topic

3 Topic Controller
3.1. The Controller topic

Overview
This chapter describes the types and parameters of the Controller topic. Each parameter is
described in the section for its type.

Description
The Controller topic contains parameters for safety and RAPID specific functions.
The parameters are organized in the following types:
1. Auto Condition Reset
2. Automatic Loading of Modules
3. Event Routine
4. Mechanical Unit Group
5. ModPos Settings
6. Operator Safety
7. Path Return Region
8. Run Mode Settings
9. Safety Run Chain
10. System Misc
11. Task
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 59
3 Topic Controller
3.2.1. How to activate hold-to-run control

3.2 Workflows

3.2.1. How to activate hold-to-run control

Overview
Safety in program execution is essential. The function hold-to-run control is used when extra
safety is necessary in the operating mode Manual. The hold-to-run function only allows robot
movements when a button is manually actuated and immediately stops these movements
when released.

Additional information
The hold-to-run control is always activated in Manual Full Speed mode.

How to activate the hold-to-run control

To activate the hold-to-run control for manual reduced speed mode:
1. In the Controller topic, choose the type Operator Safety.
2. Edit the parameters for robot movement control and execution. Set the parameter Active
to True.
For detailed information about the parameters, see the descriptions in the Operator Safety
type.
3. Save the changes.

Related information
The Operator Safety type on page 96.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

60 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.2.2. How to define path return region

3.2.2. How to define path return region

Return movement
A return movement must take place if the current robot path deviates from the programmed
path. This happens for example if an uncontrolled stop has occurred or the robot has been
jogged away from its path. A return movement begins when program start is ordered and
stops before the program continues with the instruction that was interrupted.

Path return region

In a return movement, the path return region specifies the distance from the current robot
position to the last executed path. The maximum path return region can be set both for start
in manual mode and for start in automatic mode.

How to define path return region

To define the path return region:
1. In the Controller topic, choose the type Path Return Region.
2. Edit the Mode parameter to specify the operating mode.
3. Edit the parameters for movement in the selected mode. For detailed information about
each parameter, see the descriptions in the type Path Return Region.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
The Path Return Region type on page 99.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 61
3 Topic Controller
3.3.1. The Auto Condition Reset type

3.3 Type Auto Condition Reset

3.3.1. The Auto Condition Reset type

Overview
This section describes the type Auto Condition Reset, which belongs to the topic Controller.
Each parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
AUTO_COND_RESET

Type description
The type Auto Condition Reset defines if a number of conditions should be reset when
switching to auto mode.
A message box is displayed on the FlexPendant with information about the reset conditions.

Limitations
There can be only one instance of the type Auto Condition Reset.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

62 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.3.2. Name

3.3.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Auto Condition Reset, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
name

Allowed values
AllDebugSettings (cannot be changed).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 63
3 Topic Controller
3.3.3. Reset

3.3.3. Reset

Parent
Reset belongs to the type Auto Condition Reset, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
reset

Description
Reset defines if a number of conditions should be reset when switching to auto mode.

Usage
If Reset is set to YES then the following conditions are reset when switching to auto:
• The Program Pointer (PP) is set to Main module for Normal tasks if callchain doesn’t
originate from Main routine.
• All tasks are enabled.
• Simulation of all simulated I/O signals is removed.
• Speed is set to 100%.
If Reset is set to NO, then none of the above conditions are reset automatically.

Allowed values
YES or NO. Default value is YES.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

64 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.4.1. The Automatic Loading of Modules type

3.4 Type Automatic Loading of Modules

3.4.1. The Automatic Loading of Modules type

Overview
This section describes the type Automatic Loading of Modules which belongs to the topic
Controller. Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this
section.

Cfg name
CAB_TASK_MODULES

Type description
RAPID modules can be loaded automatically when the controller is restarted if they are
specified in the type Automatic Loading of Modules.

Usage
There must be one instance of the type Automatic Loading of Modules for each module to be
loaded.

System restart
All changes in the type Automatic Loading of Modules will take effect after a normal restart
or a restart of the program server (P-Start).

Additional information
If the configuration module is changed, it may in one case (see below) replace the loaded
module after a normal restart. In any other case, you will get a warning. To replace the loaded
module regardless of task type, do a P-start.
The configuration module replaces the loaded module if the:
• loaded module is a program module AND
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• the task is semi-static.

The program pointer is only lost if a configuration change results in unloading of the module
that the program pointer is in. If a shared or installed module is changed from True to False,
or is moved to another task, the task will be reinstalled and the program pointer is reset. All
previously loaded modules are reloaded and unsaved changes will not be lost.
If a changed and unsaved user-loaded module is unloaded due to configuration changes, it
will be saved to a recovery directory and pointed out in an ELOG message.
If a changed and unsaved configuration loaded module is unloaded due to configuration
changes, it will be saved from where it was loaded.
All tasks are reinstalled with modules according to the configuration after a P-Start. Note that
after a P-start, all user-loaded modules are lost.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 65
3 Topic Controller
3.4.1. The Automatic Loading of Modules type

Continued

Related information
The Task type on page 116.
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.
ELOG messages are described in Operating manual - Trouble shooting.
Restarts are described in Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

66 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.4.2. File

3.4.2. File

Parent
File belongs to the type Automatic Loading of Modules, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
File

Description
The parameter File describes a path to the module file.

Usage
The module file shall contain one module to be loaded, installed or shared.

Allowed values
A path, e.g. HOME:base.sys

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 67
3 Topic Controller
3.4.3. Task

3.4.3. Task

Parent
Task belongs to the type Automatic Loading of Modules, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Task

Description
Task is the symbolic name of the task to which the module will be loaded.

Usage
The task is defined in the type Task.
The available task(s) is shown under the type Task.

Limitations
Cannot be combined with All Tasks or Shared.

Allowed values
A task name with maximum 30 characters.

Additional information
All automatically loaded modules need information on which task they will be loaded/
installed in, even if only one task is configured in the system.

Related information
The Task type on page 116.
All Tasks on page 71.
Shared on page 70.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Application manual - Engineering tools.

68 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.4.4. Installed

3.4.4. Installed

Parent
Installed belongs to the type Automatic Loading of Modules, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Installed

Description
A module can be both installed or loaded. A loaded module is visible in remote clients, e.g.
RobotStudioOnline and FlexPendant. An installed module is not visible, it does not occur in the
list of modules.

Usage
Set Installed to Yes to install a module, and to No to load a module.

Limitations
Cannot be combined with Shared. Shared has higher priority.
An installed module cannot be removed, just as ordinary RAPID instructions. To remove an
installed module, the system must be restarted.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
The default value is No.

Related information
Shared on page 70.
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 69
3 Topic Controller
3.4.5. Shared

3.4.5. Shared

Parent
Shared belongs to the type Automatic Loading of Modules, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Shared

Description
It is possible to install the module so it (and all its objects) is reachable from all tasks.

Usage
If an installed module should be reachable from any task, set the parameter Shared to YES.
This installs the module to the system internal shared task, not visible from any user interface
or in the configuration.

Limitations
Cannot be combined with All Tasks, Task, or Installed.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
Default value is No.

Additional information
Shared has higher priority than Installed if both are set to Yes.

If Shared: and if Installed: Then:

Yes Yes or No The module is installed and available from all tasks.
No Yes The module is installed and only available from the named
task.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

No No The module is loaded.

Related information
All Tasks on page 71.
Task on page 68.
Installed on page 69.
Operating manual - RobotStudio Online.

70 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.4.6. All Tasks

3.4.6. All Tasks

Parent
All Tasks belongs to the type Automatic Loading of Modules, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
AllTask

Description
The All Tasks module will be loaded into all tasks available.

Usage
The tasks are defined in the type Task.

Limitations
Cannot be combined with Task or Shared.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
Default value is No.

Additional information
All automatically loaded modules need information on which task they will be loaded/
installed in, even if only one task is configured in the system.

Related information
Task on page 68.
Shared on page 70.
The Task type on page 116.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 71
3 Topic Controller
3.4.7. Hidden

3.4.7. Hidden

Parent
Hidden belongs to the type Automatic Loading of Modules, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Hidden

Description
RAPID modules, routines and data may be hidden, which may be used to prevent
inexperienced end users from tampering (accidentally deleting or changing) with the
contents.
Note that the hidden contents is not protected! It can easily be shown again by setting the
parameter value to NO.
Note that any hidden contents will still be available when using the SetDataSearch
instruction to search RAPID data.

Limitations
This parameter affects only modules, routines and data which are loaded automatically on
start-up, i.e. no programs etc. that are loaded by the operator once the system has been started.
Changes to the parameter will become effective only after performing a P-start.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
Default value is NO.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

72 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.5.1. The Event Routine type

3.5 Type Event Routine

3.5.1. The Event Routine type

Overview
This section describes the type Event Routine which belongs to the topic Controller. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
CAB_EXEC_HOOKS

Type description
The type Event Routine contains parameters for event handling. Special system events, such
as program stop, can be connected to a RAPID routine. When the event occurs, the connected
event routine is executed automatically.
An event routine is made up of one or more instructions. The routine runs in the task specified
in parameter Task or All Tasks.
The tasks available are dependent on the type Tasks.

Event routines
The following event routines are available:
• PowerOn
• Start
• Restart
• Stop
• QStop
• Reset
If the connected routine is not loaded, an error message is given.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

A Stop or Break instruction in an event routine will stop the program execution and continue
to the stop routine. However, if the event routine is a stop event routine (Qstop not included),
the stop event routines are not re-executed.
A Stop or Break instruction in an event routine included in a list of event routines will stop
program execution for the running routine. Program execution continues from the beginning
of the next event, i.e. instructions after a Stop or Break in a routine will never be executed.
A stopped event routine must be restarted by invoking the start command, either by pressing
the start button on the FlexPendant or calling the start command via a system I/O. It is not
possible to restart the interrupted event routine by triggering another system I/O interrupt.
The only way to cancel a stopped event routine from system I/O is to start the program from
main. E.g. pushing the stop button when the STOP event routine is executing does not
generate a new STOP event. The STOP event routine completes its execution.

System restart
Any changes in configuration of event routines are activated after a normal restart.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 73
3 Topic Controller
3.5.1. The Event Routine type

Continued

Related information
The Task type on page 116.
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

74 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.5.2. Routine

3.5.2. Routine

Parent
Routine belongs to the type Event Routine, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Routine

Description
Routine specifies which routine that should be run for an event.

Usage
Define the routine to be assigned to a system event.
It is advisable to use a routine in a system module.

Limitations
The specified routine must be a procedure without any parameters.
The event Reset requires a routine in a system module.

Allowed values
A string defining a routine.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 75
3 Topic Controller
3.5.3. Event

3.5.3. Event

Parent
Event belongs to the type Event Routine, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Shelf

Description
Event specifies which system event in the robot system the routine should run.

Usage
A system event can trigger a corresponding routine to be run, see Operating manual - IRC5
with FlexPendant.
It is advisable to keep the routines short and quick.

Limitations
The following limitation should be considered:
• The events are not activated when manually executing a routine without losing the call
hierarchy.
• A maximum of 20 routines may be specified for each system event and each task
(multitasking). The same routine can be used in more than one event (e.g. the same
routine can be run for both Start and Restart).
• The specified event routine cannot be executed if the task program has semantic errors
(reference errors etc.). If this is the case, the system generates an error.
• Only the event routine for Start can have motion instructions. A motion instruction in
any other event routine will result in an error.

Allowed values

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

The following values are allowed.

Value: Description:
Power On The specified routine is run when the robot is restarted (warm start or cold start)
from a remote client or by power on.
Start Execution is started from the beginning of the program. This is when you press
the start or step buttons after having:
• loaded a new program or a new module
• ordered Start from beginning
• ordered Debug/Move PP to Main
• ordered Debug/Move PP to Routine
• moved the program pointer in such a way that the execution order is lost.

Continues on next page

76 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.5.3. Event

Continued

Value: Description:
Stop The program was stopped:
• with the stop button
• with a STOP instruction
• stop after current instruction.
Note: A delayed stop after current cycle will not execute the routines connected
to this state.
The event is not activated at Exit instruction or stop due to execution error.
QStop The robot was quick stopped (emergency stop).
Restart Execution is started from the position where it was stopped, or from another
instruction the program pointer has been moved to, without having lost the
execution order. The event is not activated after having executed one instruction
in step by step mode (FWD or MStep).
Reset Close and load a new program using the FlexPendant. The event is not
activated after having loaded a system module or a program module.

Additional information
The following event routines are predefined for all tasks in all systems and must not be
removed.

Event: Routine: Sequence no.

Reset SYS_RESET 0
Start SYS_RESET 0
Power On SYS_POWERON 0

Related information
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 77
3 Topic Controller
3.5.4. Sequence Number

3.5.4. Sequence Number

Parent
Sequence Number belongs to the type Event Routine, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
SeqNo

Description
Sequence Number specifies in which order the routine should be executed for a specific event.

Usage
Order the event routines in a sequence where the first routine shall have a low value and the
routines that shall run last has the highest value.
0 will run first.
Note! If several event routines has the same sequence number, the execution order will be
unpredictable.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100.
Default value is 0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

78 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.5.5. Task

3.5.5. Task

Parent
Task belongs to the type Event Routine, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Task

Description
Task specifies the name of the task that the routine will run in.

Usage
The task is defined in the type Task.

Limitations
Cannot be combined with All Tasks.

Allowed values
Names of configured tasks of the type Task.

Additional information
All event routines need information on which task they will run, even though only one task
is configured in the system.

Related information
The Task type on page 116.
All Tasks on page 80.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 79
3 Topic Controller
3.5.6. All Tasks

3.5.6. All Tasks

Parent
All Tasks belongs to the type Event Routine, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
AllTasks

Description
All Tasks defines if the routine will run in all configured tasks.

Usage
The tasks are defined in the type Task.

Limitations
Cannot be combined with Task.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
The default behavior is No.

Additional information
All event routines need information on which task they will run, even though only one task
is configured in the system.

Related information
The Task type on page 116.
Task on page 79.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

80 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.6.1. The Mechanical Unit Group type

3.6 Type Mechanical Unit Group

3.6.1. The Mechanical Unit Group type

Overview
This section describes the type Mechanical Unit Group, which belongs to the topic
Controller. Each parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this
section.

Cfg name
MECHANICAL_UNIT_GROUP

Type description
With the option MultiMove comes the possibility to control several robots from one
controller. Each task can control one robot and up to six positioners. The mechanical units
that will be controlled by one task are grouped in a mechanical unit group.

Related information
Use Mechanical Unit Group on page 123.
Application manual - MultiMove.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 81
3 Topic Controller
3.6.2. Name

3.6.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Mechanical Unit Group, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The name of the mechanical unit group.

Usage
This is the public identity of the mechanical unit group. It is used by the parameter Use
Mechanical Unit Group in the type Tasks.

Limitations
Mechanical Unit Group is only used if you have the option MultiMove.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Use Mechanical Unit Group on page 123.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

82 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.6.3. Robot

3.6.3. Robot

Parent
Robot belongs to the type Mechanical Unit Group, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Robot

Description
Specifies the robot (with TCP), if there is any, in the mechanical unit group.

Usage
Robot is set to the same value as the parameter Name for the Mechanical Unit Group type that
it represents.

Limitations
The parameter Robot is only used if you have the option MultiMove.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Name on page 82.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 83
3 Topic Controller
3.6.4. Mechanical Unit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

3.6.4. Mechanical Unit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Parent
Mechanical Unit 1, Mechanical Unit 2, Mechanical Unit 3, Mechanical Unit 4, Mechanical
Unit 5, and Mechanical Unit 6 belongs to the type Mechanical Unit Group, in the topic
Controller.

Cfg name
MechanicalUnit_1
MechanicalUnit_2
MechanicalUnit_3
MechanicalUnit_4
MechanicalUnit_5
MechanicalUnit_6

Description
Mechanical Unit 1 specifies the first mechanical unit without TCP, if there is any, in the
mechanical unit group.
Mechanical Unit 2 specifies the second mechanical unit without TCP, if there is more than
one, in the mechanical unit group.
Mechanical Unit 3 specifies the third mechanical unit without TCP, if there are more than
two, in the mechanical unit group.
Mechanical Unit 4 specifies the fourth mechanical unit without TCP, if there are more than
three, in the mechanical unit group.
Mechanical Unit 5 specifies the fifth mechanical unit without TCP, if there are more than
four, in the mechanical unit group.
Mechanical Unit 6 specifies the sixth mechanical unit without TCP, if there are more than
five, in the mechanical unit group.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Usage
Mechanical Unit is set to the same value as the parameter Name for the Mechanical Unit
Group type that it represents.

Limitations
The parameters Mechanical Unit is only used if you have the option MultiMove.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Name on page 82.

84 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.6.5. Use Motion Planner

3.6.5. Use Motion Planner

Parent
Use Motion Planner belongs to the type Mechanical Unit Group, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
UseMotionPlanner

Description
Specifies which motion planner shall be used for calculating the movements of the
mechanical units in this group.

Usage
Use Motion Planner is set to the same value as the parameter Name for the Motion Planner
type that you want to use.

Limitations
The parameter Use Motion Planner is only used if you have the option MultiMove.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Motion Planner type on page 466 in the topic Motion.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 85
3 Topic Controller
3.7.1. The ModPos Settings type

3.7 Type ModPos Settings

3.7.1. The ModPos Settings type

Overview
This section describes the type ModPos Settings which belongs to the topic Controller. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
HOTEDIT_MODPOS

Type description
It is sometimes desirable to limit how much a robtarget position can be moved by a ModPos
or HotEdit operation. The limited deviation concerns both the linear distance and the
orientation.

Limitations
There can be only one set of parameters of the type ModPos Settings in the system.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

86 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.7.2. Name

3.7.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines that the parameter configuration is for ModPos.

Allowed values
modpos

Related information
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 87
3 Topic Controller
3.7.3. Limited ModPos

3.7.3. Limited ModPos

Parent
Limited ModPos belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
type

Description
Limited ModPos defines if a ModPos change must be within a limited sphere for the position
deviation and within a limited cone for the reorientation.

Usage
Set Limited ModPos to False when no limit is required, and to True when limits should apply.

Allowed values
FALSE or TRUE.
Default value is FALSE.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

88 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.7.4. Mode

3.7.4. Mode

Parent
Mode belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
mode

Description
Mode defines how the limit is defined; to an absolute point or relative to the current position.

Usage
Setting Mode to Absolute means that the limited sphere/cone is around a fixed original point,
i.e. position changes are accumulated and the accumulated deviation value is checked against
the set max limits each time a change is made.
Setting Mode to Relative means that the limited sphere/cone is around the current point and
will be moved when you modify the position.

Limitations
Mode is only available if Limited ModPos is set to TRUE.

Allowed values
Absolute or Relative.
Default value is Relative.

Related information
Limited ModPos on page 88.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 89
3 Topic Controller
3.7.4. Mode

Continued

Example
In this example, the original point P1 is moved two times, first to P2 and then to P3. In figure
A, Mode is set to Absolute, and in figure B, Mode is set to Relative.
The allowed move distance, R does not change in figure A. This makes it impossible to move
the point to P3, as this is beyond R.
In figure B however, the allowed move distance follows the last point. So from P1 it is
possible to move as far as R1 allows, and from P2, it is allowed to move as far as R2, etc.

en0500001454

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

90 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.7.5. Limit Trans

3.7.5. Limit Trans

Parent
Limit Trans belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
limittrans

Description
Limit Trans defines the maximum allowed deviation in mm from the current or original
position.

Limitations
This type is only available if Limited ModPos is set to TRUE.

Allowed values
0 - 1000 mm.
Default value is 5.

Related information
Limited ModPos on page 88.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 91
3 Topic Controller
3.7.6. Limit Rot

3.7.6. Limit Rot

Parent
Limit Rot belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
limitrot

Description
Limit Rot defines the maximum allowed reorientation in degrees from the current or original
position.

Limitations
This type is only available if Limited ModPos is set to TRUE.

Allowed values
0 - 360 degrees (0 - 6.280 radians).
Default value is 10 degrees (0.17 radians).

Additional information
Convert degrees to radians: radians = (degrees/360)*(2*pi)

Related information
Limited ModPos on page 88.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

92 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.7.7. Limit External Trans

3.7.7. Limit External Trans

Parent
Limit External Trans belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
limitexttrans

Description
Limit External Trans defines the maximum allowed deviation in mm from the current or
original position concerning external linear axes.

Limitations
Limit External Trans is only available if Limited ModPos is set to TRUE.

Allowed values
0 - 1000 mm.
Default value is 50.

Related information
Limited ModPos on page 88.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 93
3 Topic Controller
3.7.8. Limit External Rot

3.7.8. Limit External Rot

Parent
Limit External Rot belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
limitextrot

Description
Limit External Rot defines the maximum allowed deviation in degrees from the current or
original position concerning external rotational axes.

Limitations
Limit External Rot is only available if Limited ModPos is set to TRUE.

Allowed values
0 - 360 degrees (0 - 6.280 radians).
Default value is 10 degrees (0.17 radians).

Additional information
Convert degrees to radians: radians = (degrees/360)*(2*pi)

Related information
Limited ModPos on page 88.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

94 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.7.9. Change to LModPos in Auto

3.7.9. Change to LModPos in Auto

Parent
Change to LModPos in Auto belongs to the type ModPos Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
ifauto

Description
Change to LModPos in Auto defines if it is possible to force the system to change to Limited
ModPos automatically when switching from Manual to Auto. When going back to Manual
the configured value is valid.

Usage
Setting Change to LModPos in Auto to No means that Limited ModPos will not be activated
when switching from Manual to Auto.
Yes means that Limited ModPos will be activated when the operator's key is switched to Auto
Mode.

Limitations
Change to LModPos in Auto is only available if Name is ModPos.

Allowed values
Yes or No.
Default value is No.

Related information
Limited ModPos on page 88.
Name on page 87.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 95
3 Topic Controller
3.8.1. The Operator Safety type

3.8 Type Operator Safety

3.8.1. The Operator Safety type

Overview
This section describes the type Operator Safety which belongs to the topic Controller. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MASTER_BOOL

Type description
The Operator Safety type is used to define extra safety for system execution.

Related information
How to activate hold-to-run control on page 60.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant, chapter Safety.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

96 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.8.2. Function

3.8.2. Function

Parent
Function belongs to the type Operator Safety, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Function defines safety functions for the robot system.

Allowed values
Value: Description:
Hold-to-run Hold-to-run enables a functionality that requires a button to be pressed in to
allow execution in Manual Reduce Speed mode. When the button is released
the executions are immediately stopped.
Hold-to-run is always activated in Manual Full Speed operating mode.
Hold-to-run is further described in standard ISO 10218 (EN775).

Related information
How to activate hold-to-run control on page 60.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant chapter Safety.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 97
3 Topic Controller
3.8.3. Active

3.8.3. Active

Parent
Active belongs to the type Operator Safety, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Select

Description
Active defines whether the value of Function is activated.

Allowed values
Value: Description:
TRUE Activated
FALSE Not activated

Related information
Function on page 97.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

98 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 3 Topic Controller
3.9.1. The Path Return Region type

3.9 Type Path Return Region

3.9.1. The Path Return Region type

Overview
This section describes the type Path Return Region which belongs to the topic Controller.
Each parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
CAB_REGAIN_DIST

Type description
In a return movement, the path return region specifies the distance from the current robot
position to the last executed path. The maximum path region can be set both for start in
manual mode and for start in automatic mode.
There must be two sets of parameters defined for this type; one for automatic mode (AUTO)
and one for manual mode (MAN). Both are predefined on delivery.

Return movements
A return movement must take place when the current path of the robot deviates from the
programmed path. For example, this is required when an uncontrolled stop has occurred or
when the robot has been jogged away from its path.
A return movement begins when program start is ordered and stops before the program
continues with the instruction that was interrupted due to a stop request.

Predefined path return regions

AUTO
MAN
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 99
3 Topic Controller
3.9.2. Mode

3.9.2. Mode

Parent
Mode belongs to the type Path Return Region, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Mode defines in which operating mode a return movement will start.

Usage
Both Auto and Man mode must be defined in the system and are configured on delivery.

Allowed values
AUTO
MAN

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

100 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.9.3. TCP Distance

3.9.3. TCP Distance

Parent
TCP Distance belongs to the type Path Return Region, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
TCP_Dist

Description
TCP Distance defines the maximum allowed TCP distance from the current robot position to
the last executed path.

Usage
TCP Distance is used to limit the return movement if there is a risk that the robot will collide
with an object.

Prerequisites
Specify which operating mode the return movement is valid for. This is defined in the
parameter Mode.

Allowed values
A value between 0-2.000 meters, specifying the movement in meters.
The default value is 0.05 meter for manual mode and 0.5 meter for automatic mode.

Related information
Mode on page 100.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 101

3 Topic Controller
3.9.4. TCP Rotation

3.9.4. TCP Rotation

Parent
TCP Rotation belongs to the type Path Return Region, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
TCP_Rot

Description
TCP Rotation defines the maximum allowed TCP rotation from the current robot position to
the last executed path.

Usage
TCP Rotation is used to limit the return movement if there is a risk that the robot will collide
with an object.

Prerequisites
Specify which operating mode the return movement is valid for. This is defined in the
parameter Mode.

Allowed values
A value between 0-6.280, specifying the movement in radians.
The default value is 0.2 radians for manual mode and 1.57 radians for automatic mode.

Additional information
To convert degrees to radians, use this formula:
radians = 2*pi*degrees/360

Related information
Mode on page 100.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

102 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.9.5. External Distance

3.9.5. External Distance

Parent
External Distance belongs to the type Path Return Region, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Ext_Dist

Description
External Distance defines the maximum allowed external axes distance from the current
robot position to the last executed path.

Usage
External Distance is used to limit the return movement if there is a risk that the robot will
collide with an object.

Prerequisites
Specify which operating mode the return movement is valid for. This is defined in the
parameter Mode.

Allowed values
A value between 0-2.000, specifying the movement in meters.
The default value is 0.05 meter for manual mode and 0.5 meter for automatic mode.

Related information
Mode on page 100.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 103

3 Topic Controller
3.9.6. External Rotation

3.9.6. External Rotation

Parent
External Rotation belongs to the type Path Return Region, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Ext_rot

Description
External Rotation defines the maximum allowed external axes rotation from the current robot
position to the last executed path.

Usage
External Rotation is used to limit the regain movement if there is a risk that the robot will
collide with an object.

Prerequisites
Specify which operating mode the return movement is valid for. This is defined in the
parameter Mode.

Allowed values
A value between 0-6.280, specifying the movement in radians.
The default value is 0.2 radians for manual mode and 1.57 radians for automatic mode.

Additional information
To convert degrees to radians, use this formula:
radians = 2*pi*degrees/360

Related information
Mode on page 100.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

104 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.10.1. The Run Mode Settings type

3.10 Type Run Mode Settings

3.10.1. The Run Mode Settings type

Overview block
This section describes the type Run Mode Settings which belongs to the topic Controller.
Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
RUN_MODE_SETTINGS

Type description
The type Run Mode Settings defines if the run mode should change when changing operating
mode.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 105

3 Topic Controller
3.10.2. Name

3.10.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Run Mode Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name of the operating mode setting.

Usage
There can be only one instance with each allowed value, that is a maximum of two instances
in the system.

Allowed values

Value Description
AutoToManual Defines settings when switching from automatic to manual
operating mode.
ManualToAuto Defines settings when switching from manual to automatic
operating mode.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

106 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.10.3. Switch

3.10.3. Switch

Parent
Switch belongs to the type Run Mode Settings, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
SwitchTo

Description
Switch defines the run mode when switching operating mode.

Usage
Defines if the run mode should be changed when changing operating mode.

Allowed values

Value Description
Keep Keep current run mode.
Single Set run mode to single cycle.
Continuous Set run mode to continuous.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 107

3 Topic Controller
3.11.1. The Safety Run Chain type

3.11 Type Safety Run Chain

3.11.1. The Safety Run Chain type

Overview
This section describes the type Safety Run Chain which belongs to the topic Controller. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
RUNCHN_BOOL

Type description
It is possible to have a delayed stop that gives a smooth stop, this is called a Soft Stop. The
type of Soft Stop used in the system is defined in the Safety Run Chain type.
There can be more than one set of parameters defined for the type Safety Run Chain.

Soft Stop
In the Soft Stop, the robot stops in the same way as a normal program stop with no deviation
from the programmed path. After approximately 1 second the power supply to the motors
shuts off. The stopping distance can be longer than at a hard stop (e.g. emergency stop) where
the power shuts off immediately.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

108 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.11.2. Function

3.11.2. Function

Parent
Function belongs to the type Safety Run Chain, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Function defines if Soft Stop is activated or deactivated.

Usage
A Soft Stop is the same as a safety stop of category 1, which means that the robot will be
stopped by the servos.
The robot can easily be started again after a soft stop on path and continue with the activity
where it was interrupted.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
SoftES Soft emergency stop is activated by pressing the emergency stop push button on
the FlexPendant or the control module.
SoftES is only used in Auto. In manual mode, SoftES will be a category 0 stop
regardless of the value set in the parameter Active.
SoftAS Soft automatic mode stop is intended for automatic mode during normal program
execution. This stop is activated by safety devices such as light curtains, light
beams, or sensitive mats.
SoftGS Soft general stop is activated by safety devices such as light curtains, light beams,
or sensitive mats.
SoftSS Soft superior stop has the same function as a general stop but is intended for
externally connected safety devices.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant chapter Safety.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 109

3 Topic Controller
3.11.3. Active

3.11.3. Active

Parent
Active belongs to the type Safety Run Chain, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Select

Description
Active defines whether the Soft Stop is activated or not.

Usage
If Active is set to True, the Soft Stop is activated.

Allowed values
TRUE or FALSE.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

110 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.12.1. The System Misc type

3.12 Type System Misc

3.12.1. The System Misc type

Overview
This section describes the type System Misc, which belongs to the topic Controller. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SYS_MISC

Type description
System Misc contains parameters that are general for the controller.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 111

3 Topic Controller
3.12.2. Name

3.12.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type System Misc, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines either of the two arguments for retry or simulated menus.

Limitations
There can be only one instance with Name set to NoOfRetry, and one set to SimulateMenu.

Allowed values
NoOfRetry
SimulateMenu

Related information
NoOfRetry on page 113.
SimulateMenu on page 114.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

112 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.12.3.1. NoOfRetry

3.12.3. Action values

3.12.3.1. NoOfRetry

Parent
NoOfRetry is an action value for the parameter Name that belongs to the type System Misc, in
the topic Controller.

Cfg name
NoOfRetry

Description
The action value NoOfRetry specifies that there is a limit to the number of times the routine
with a recoverable error is called before the error is reported as fatal and execution is stopped.
The number of times is set by the parameter Value.

Usage
Can be useful e.g. if the network is shaky and the first attempt at opening a file does not work.

Limitations
Works only if an ERROR handler that takes care of the error situation is programmed with
the RETRY statement.

Additional information
Changes are activated after a normal restart.

Related information
Value on page 115.

Example
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

This example shows that it can take some time before an I/O unit is enabled. Several attempts
are needed before it is possible to set the digital output signal.
PROC A()
...
IOEnable "cell_1", 0;
SetDO cell_1_sig3, 1; !This might not work on the first attempt
...
ERROR IF ERRNO = ERR_IOENABLE THEN
RETRY;
ENDIF
ENDPROC

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 113

3 Topic Controller
3.12.3.2. SimulateMenu

3.12.3.2. SimulateMenu

Parent
SimulateMenu is an action value for the parameter Name that belongs to the type System Misc,
in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
SimulateMenu

Description
The WaitTime, WaitUntil, WaitDO, and WaitDI instructions generate an alert box in
manual mode to make it possible to simulate the instruction and continue to execute the next
instruction. The parameter Value defines if SimulateMenu is on or off.

Usage
It is useful to switch this parameter off if no alert boxes are desired. Set Value to 0 to disable
menus.

Limitations
The parameter is only active in manual mode. There are no alert boxes in automatic mode.

Additional information
Changes are activated after a normal restart.

Related information
Value on page 115Value on page 115.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

114 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.12.4. Value

3.12.4. Value

Parent
Value belongs to the type Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
value

Description
Defines the values for the action values defined in parameter Name.

Allowed values

Name: Value: Description:

NoOfRetry 1-1000 Defines number of times the number of times a
routine with a recoverable error is called before
the system is stopped.
SimulateMenu 0 or 1 Defines if instructions should be possible to
simulate in manual mode.

Related information
Name on page 112.
NoOfRetry on page 113.
SimulateMenu on page 114.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 115

3 Topic Controller
3.13.1. The Task type

3.13 Type Task

3.13.1. The Task type

Overview
This section describes the type Task, which belongs to the topic Controller. Each parameter
of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
CAB_TASKS

Type description
Each set of parameters of the Task type represents a program task on the controller.
If you have the option Multitasking, there can be up to 20 tasks. Otherwise there can be only
one.

Related information
Application manual - Engineering tools chapter Multitasking.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

116 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.13.2. Task

3.13.2. Task

Parent
Task belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The name of the task.

Usage
This is the public identity of the task.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 30 characters. The first character may not be a digit.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 117

3 Topic Controller
3.13.3. Task in Foreground

3.13.3. Task in Foreground

Parent
Task in Foreground belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Task_in_forground

Description
Used to set priorities between tasks.
Task in Foreground contains the name of the task that should run in the foreground of this
task. This means that the task for which the parameter is set will only execute if the
foreground task is idle.

Usage
The default behavior is that all tasks run at the same priority level. If you want to customize
the priorities, the Task in Foreground parameter can be set for the tasks that should run in the
background.
If Task in Foreground is set to empty string or to -1 for a task, it runs at the highest priority,
i.e. no other task can suspend its execution.

Limitations
The parameter Task in Foreground can only be used if you have the option Multitasking.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 30 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

118 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.13.4. Type

3.13.4. Type

Parent
Type belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Type

Description
Controls the start/stop and system restart behavior of a task.

Usage
When creating a new task, use the Type parameter to configure how the task should be started.

Limitations
A task that controls a mechanical unit must be of the type NORMAL.
The parameter Type can only be used if you have the option Multitasking.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
NORMAL The task reacts on START/STOP requests given from the FlexPendant or
other sources.
The task is stopped when an emergency stop occurs.
STATIC At warm start, the task restarts at the current position.
The task is not stopped by emergency stops.
The task is normally not stopped by the stop button on the FlexPendant.
This can be configured on the FlexPendant by the operator.
SEMISTATIC The task restarts from the beginning at all warm starts. Modules will be
reloaded if the file with automatic loaded modules is updated.
The task is not stopped by emergency stops.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

The task is normally not stopped by the stop button on the FlexPendant.
This can be configured on the FlexPendant by the operator.

Default value is SEMISTATIC.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 119

3 Topic Controller
3.13.5. Check Unresolved References

3.13.5. Check Unresolved References

Parent
Check Unresolved References belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
BindRef

Description
Check Unresolved References determines if the system shall check for unresolved references
or ignore them.

Usage
This parameter should be set to “0” if the system is to accept unsolved references in the
program while linking a module, or otherwise set to “1”.
If set to “1”, a runtime error will occur on execution of an unresolved reference.

Limitations
The parameter has no effect when using instructions Load, StartLoad, WaitLoad, or
Erase. In this case the system will never check for unresolved references.

Allowed values
1 or 0.
Default value is 1.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

120 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.13.6. Main Entry

3.13.6. Main Entry

Parent
Main Entry belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Entry

Description
The name of the start routine for the task.

Usage
The task starts its execution in the routine specified by Main Entry. It should be a RAPID
routine without any parameters and reachable in this task.

Allowed values
A routine name, with maximum 32 characters.
Default value is main.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 121

3 Topic Controller
3.13.7. TrustLevel

3.13.7. TrustLevel

Parent
TrustLevel belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
TrustLevel

Description
TrustLevel handles the system behavior when a SEMISTATIC or STATIC task is stopped or
not executable.

Usage
If a task that handles safety supervision stops, it might be dangerous to continue running the
task that controls the robot motion. Use TrustLevel to set the behavior of NORMAL tasks
when a SEMISTATIC or STATIC task stops.

Limitations
The parameter TrustLevel can only be used if you have the option Multitasking.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
SysFail All NORMAL tasks will be stopped. Besides that the system is set to
system failure state (SYS_FAIL). All jogging and program start orders will
be rejected. Only a new normal restart (warm start) resets the system. This
should be used when the task has some safety supervisions.
SysHalt All NORMAL tasks will be stopped. The system is forced to “motors off”.
Taking up the system to “motors on” resets the system.
SysStop All NORMAL tasks will be stopped but are restartable. Jogging is also
possible.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

NoSafety Only the task itself will stop.

The default value is SysFail.

122 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.13.8. Use Mechanical Unit Group

3.13.8. Use Mechanical Unit Group

Parent
Use Mechanical Unit Group belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
UseMechanicalUnitGroup

Description
Defines which mechanical unit group is used for the task.

Usage
A motion task (MotionTask set to Yes) controls the mechanical units in the mechanical unit
group. A non-motion task (MotionTask set to No) will still be able to read values (e.g. the TCP
position) for the mechanical units in the mechanical unit group.

Limitations
The parameter Use Mechanical Unit Group is only used if you have the option MultiMove.

Allowed values
Use Mechanical Unit Group is set to the same value as the parameter Name for the type
Mechanical Unit Group.
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
MotionTask on page 124.
Name on page 82.
Application manual - MultiMove.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 123

3 Topic Controller
3.13.9. MotionTask

3.13.9. MotionTask

Parent
MotionTask belongs to the type Tasks, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
MotionTask

Description
Indicates which task is the motion task, e.g. can be able to run RAPID move instructions.
MotionTask must be used even though only one task is configured in the system.

Usage
Set MotionTask to YES for the task that will be used for robot move instructions.

Limitations
Only one task in the system can be a motion task unless you have the option MultiMove.
The parameter MotionTask is only used if you have the option Multitasking.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
The default behavior is NO.
The value must be set to YES for one, and only one, task.

Related information
Application manual - MultiMove.
Application manual - Engineering tools.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

124 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.13.10. Hidden

3.13.10. Hidden

Parent
Hidden belongs to the type Task in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
Hidden

Description
RAPID tasks may be hidden, which may be used to prevent inexperienced end users from
tampering (accidentally deleting or changing) with the contents.
Note that the hidden contents is not protected! It can easily be shown again by setting the
parameter value to NO.
Note that any hidden contents will still be available when using the SetDataSearch
instruction to search RAPID data.

Limitation
This parameter is available when using multitasking systems only, such as MultiMove.
Changes to the parameter will become effective only after performing a P-start.

Allowed values
YES or NO.
Default value is NO.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 125

3 Topic Controller
3.13.11. RMQ Type

3.13.11. RMQ Type

Parent
RMQ Type belongs to the type Task, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
RmqType

Description
Used for the functionality RAPID Message Queue. RMQ Type defines if the queue of this
RAPID task should accept messages from anyone, only other tasks on the same controller or
from no one.

Usage
RMQ Type can be used to turn off all RAPID Message Queue communication to a RAPID
task. It can also be used to limit the communication so that only other RAPID tasks on the
same controller may send messages to this task.

Limitations
The parameter RMQ Type is only used if you have the functionality RAPID Message Queue.

Allowed values

Value Description
None Disable the receiving of RAPID Message Queue messages in this RAPID
task.
Internal Enable the receiving of RAPID Message Queue messages from other tasks
on the controller.
Remote Enable the receiving of RAPID Message Queue messages both from other
tasks on the controller, from the FlexPendant and from PC applications.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

The default value is None.

Related information
For more information about RAPID Message Queue, see Application manual - Robot
communication and I/O control, section RAPID Message Queue.

126 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 3 Topic Controller
3.13.12. RMQ Max Message Size

3.13.12. RMQ Max Message Size

Parent
RMQ Max Message Size belongs to the type Task, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
RmqMaxMsgSize

Description
The maximum data size, in bytes, for a RAPID Message Queue message.

Usage
The default value is 400, and there is normally no reason to change this value. The value
cannot be changed in RobotStudio Online or on the FlexPendant. The only way to change the
value is by editing the sys.cfg file.

Limitations
The parameter RMQ Max Message Size is only used if you have the functionality RAPID
Message Queue.

Allowed values
An integer between 400 and 3000.
Default value is 400.

Related information
For more information about RAPID Message Queue, see Application manual - Robot
communication and I/O control, section RAPID Message Queue.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 127

3 Topic Controller
3.13.13. RMQ Max No Of Messages

3.13.13. RMQ Max No Of Messages

Parent
RMQ Max No Of Messages belongs to the type Task, in the topic Controller.

Cfg name
RmqMaxNoOfMsg

Description
Maximum number of RAPID Message Queue messages in the queue to this task.

Usage
The default value is 5, and there is normally no reason to change this value. The value cannot
be changed in RobotStudio Online or on the FlexPendant. The only way to change the value
is by editing the sys.cfg file.

Limitations
The parameter RMQ Max No Of Messages is only used if you have the functionality RAPID
Message Queue.

Allowed values
An integer between 1 and 10.
Default value is 5.

Related information
For more information about RAPID Message Queue, see Application manual - Robot
communication and I/O control, section RAPID Message Queue.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

128 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.1. The I/O topic

4 Topic I/O
4.1. The I/O topic

Overview
This chapter describes the types and parameters of the I/O topic. Each parameter is described
in the section for its type.

Description
The I/O topic contains parameters for I/O boards and signals.
The parameters are organized in the following types:
1. Access Level
2. Bus
3. Cross Connection
4. Fieldbus Command
5. Fieldbus Command Type
6. Signal
7. System Input
8. System Output
9. Unit
10. Unit Type

Configuration results
Changed I/O parameters requires a restart of the controller. Otherwise the changes will have
no effect on the system.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 129

4 Topic I/O
4.2.1. How to define I/O units

4.2 Workflows

4.2.1. How to define I/O units

Overview
An I/O unit is a logical software representation of a fieldbus unit that is connected to a
fieldbus within the controller. I/O units allow you to control electronic devices and read
sensor data. They are used for controlling signals in the robot system.

Available I/O units

Several I/O units can be defined within the robot system. The types of units available depend
on what type of fieldbus is being used.
The following I/O units are examples of available units for DeviceNet:
1. Digital I/O
2. Analog I/O
3. AD Combi I/O
4. Relay I/O
5. Gateways
6. Simulated I/O
7. Encoder interface units

Prerequisites
Before defining a Unit, you must:
1. Configure the Bus.
2. Make sure the appropriate Unit Type is available, either by creating it or using a
predefined unit type.

How to define I/O units

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

To define an I/O unit:
1. In the topic I/O, choose the type Unit.
2. Select the unit to change, delete or add a new one.
3. Enter, delete or change the values for the parameters.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
The Unit type on page 254.
How to define the I/O unit type on page 132.
The Unit Type type on page 266.

130 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.2.2. How to list available I/O unit types

4.2.2. How to list available I/O unit types

Overview
The I/O units are of a specific type, defined for each unit. I/O devices that do not have a unit
type equivalent specified, need to be defined.

How to list available I/O unit types

To list all available I/O unit types:
1. In the topic I/O, choose the type Unit Type.
2. To get detailed information about a specific unit type, select the unit type.

Related information
How to define I/O units on page 130.
How to define the I/O unit type on page 132.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 131

4 Topic I/O
4.2.3. How to define the I/O unit type

4.2.3. How to define the I/O unit type

Overview
The I/O units are of a specific type, defined for each unit. I/O devices that do not have a unit
type equivalent specified, need to be defined.

How to define the I/O unit type

To define the I/O unit type:
1. In the topic I/O, choose the type Unit Type.
2. Select the Unit Type to change, delete or add a new one.
3. Enter, delete or change the values for the parameters.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
How to define I/O units on page 130.
How to list available I/O unit types on page 131.
The Unit Type type on page 266.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

132 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.2.4. How to define input and output signals

4.2.4. How to define input and output signals

Overview
An I/O signal is the logical software representation of an I/O signal located on a fieldbus unit
that is connected to a fieldbus within the controller.

Available input and output signals

The signals can be of different types.
The type of signals available depends on the actual unit. Typical physical signal types are:
1. Digital inputs and outputs 24 V DC
2. Digital inputs and outputs 120 V DC
3. Analog inputs and outputs +-10 V
4. Analog outputs 0 to +10 V
The signal types possible to configure are:
• Digital input, DI
• Digital output, DO
• Analog input, AI
• Analog output, AO
• Group input, GI
• Group output, GO

Limitations
A maximum of 2048 signals can be defined. This includes digital, analog, and group signals
of both input and output type.

Prerequisites
Before defining a Signal (that is not Virtual), you must:
1. Configure the Bus and
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

2. Make sure the appropriate Unit Type is available, either by creating it or by using a
predefined unit type, and
3. Configure the Unit, and
4. Make sure the appropriate Access Level is available, either by creating it or by using a
predefined access level.

How to define input and output signals

To define signals:
1. In the topic I/O, choose the type Signal.
2. Select the signal to change, delete or add a new one.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 133
4 Topic I/O
4.2.4. How to define input and output signals

Continued

3. Enter, delete or change the values for the parameters. The required parameters depend on
the type of signal.
See parameter descriptions and examples of typical configurations in the description of
the type Signal.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
How to define a signal group on page 135.
The Signal type on page 179.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

134 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.2.5. How to define a signal group

4.2.5. How to define a signal group

Signal group
Digital signals can be grouped together and be handled as if they were one signal. The value
of such a signal will thus be a positive integer that is binary coded using the individual digital
signals as a basis.

Limitations
When defining signal groups, you have to consider the following limitation in the robot
system:
• A maximum of 16 signals in a signal group can be defined.

How to define a signal group

To define a signal group:
1. In the I/O topic, choose the type Signal.
2. Select the signal to change, delete or add a new signal.
3. Enter, delete or change the values for the parameters. Set the parameter Type of Signal to
value Group Input or Group Output.
The required parameters depend on the type of signal. See parameter descriptions and
examples of typical configurations in the description of the type Signal.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
How to define input and output signals on page 133.
The Signal type on page 179.

Example
If a signal group spans over 4 bits, the maximum value is 15 (24-1) and the minimum value
is 0.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 135

4 Topic I/O
4.2.6. How to define system inputs

4.2.6. How to define system inputs

Overview
Input signals can be assigned specific inputs. The input triggers a system action that is
handled by the system, without using the FlexPendant or other hardware devices.

Prerequisites
A digital input signal with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.

Limitations
The following limitations have to be considered:
• Only one system action can be assigned to the input signal. However, several input
signals can be assigned the same system action.
• When deleting a system action the signal itself remains defined. The signal has to be
deleted separately.
• System input signals are only valid for the currently executed program in the system,
with exceptions on the action value level. These exceptions are described together
with the corresponding action value.
• The system must be in automatic mode to react on the system signal.

How to define system inputs

To define a system input:
1. In the topic I/O, choose the type System Input.
2. Select the system input to change, delete, or add a new one.
3. Enter, change or delete the values for the parameters.
To add or delete the system action values Interrupt, Load and Start, Motors On and Start,
Start, and Start at Main you must also define the parameter Argument 1.
To add or delete the system action values Interrupt and Load and Start you must also

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

define the parameter Argument 2.
4. Save the changes.

Rejected system inputs

If the system is in manual mode or cannot perform the defined system action due to any other
unfulfilled requirement, no error message is displayed. When a system action is rejected the
error message is stored in the error log (ELOG).

Related information
The System Input type on page 206.
The Signal type on page 179.

136 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.3.1. The Access Level type

4.3 Type Access Level

4.3.1. The Access Level type

Overview
This section describes the Access Level type which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter
of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_ACCESS

Type description
An I/O Access Level is a configuration that defines the write access to different I/O objects
for different categories of I/O controlling applications.

Usage
To configure and use an access level it is necessary to limit signal write access. E.g. it should
be possible to modify a set of signals from a remote client (e.g. RobotStudio Online) and
RAPID in automatic mode. To achieve this it is necessary to create an access level specifying
the limitations, and assign the signals to use the new access level.

Limitations
It is not possible to configure different write access levels for different types of remote clients,
since the controller does not differ e.g. RobotStudio Online from other remote clients.

Predefined access levels

Access level: Description:

INTERNAL No external clients have write access, typically used by safety signals.
DEFAULT Only allowed to write to signals from RAPID instructions and local clients
(e.g. FlexPendant).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

ALL Use with great care since full access are given from all clients (local and
remote).

Example

Parameter: Value:
Name DEFAULT
Rapid Write enabled
Local client in manual mode Write enabled
Local client in auto mode Read only
Remote client in manual mode Read only
Remote client in auto mode Read only

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 137

4 Topic I/O
4.3.2. Name

4.3.2. Name

Parent
The parameter Name belongs to the type Access Level, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the logical name of the access level.

Usage
The name of the access level is used as a reference to the specific access level when
configuring the signals.

Allowed values
A string following the RAPID rules described in the manual RAPID overview, chapter Basic
elements.
The name must be unique among all named objects in the I/O system configuration. Note that
names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

138 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.3.3. Rapid

4.3.3. Rapid

Parent
The parameter Rapid belongs to the type Access Level, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Rapid

Description
The parameter Rapid specifies the level of access granted to RAPID instructions.

Usage
Specify the level of access that should be granted to RAPID instructions when accessing
objects associated with this access level.

Allowed values
Write enabled
Read only
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 139

4 Topic I/O
4.3.4. Local Client in Manual Mode

4.3.4. Local Client in Manual Mode

Parent
The parameter Local Client in Manual Mode belongs to the type Access Level, in the topic I/
O.

Cfg name
LocalManual

Description
The parameter Local Client in Manual Mode specifies the level of access granted to local
RobAPI clients in manual mode.
A local client is a client using RobAPI and is connected directly to the controller, e.g. a
FlexPendant.

Usage
Specify the level of access that should be granted to local RobAPI clients in manual mode
when accessing objects associated with this access level.

Allowed values
Write enabled
Read only

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

140 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.3.5. Local Client in Auto Mode

4.3.5. Local Client in Auto Mode

Parent
The parameter Local Client in Auto Mode belongs to the type Access Level, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
LocalAuto

Description
The parameter Local Client in Auto Mode specifies the level of access granted to local
RobAPI clients in automatic mode.
A local client is a client using RobAPI and is connected directly to the controller, e.g. a
FlexPendant.

Usage
Specify the level of access that should be granted to local RobAPI clients in automatic mode
when accessing objects associated with this access level.

Allowed values
Write enabled
Read only
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 141

4 Topic I/O
4.3.6. Remote Client in Manual Mode

4.3.6. Remote Client in Manual Mode

Parent
The parameter Remote Client in Manual Mode belongs to the type Access Level, in the topic
I/O.

Cfg name
RemoteManual

Description
The parameter Remote Client in Manual Mode specifies the level of access granted to remote
RobAPI clients in manual mode.
A remote client is a client or application using RobAPI and not being connected directly to
the controller, e.g. RobotStudio Online.

Usage
Specify the level of access that should be granted to remote RobAPI clients in manual mode
when accessing objects associated with this access level.

Allowed values
Write enabled
Read only

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

142 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.3.7. Remote Client in Auto Mode

4.3.7. Remote Client in Auto Mode

Parent
The parameter Remote Client in Auto Mode belongs to the type Access Level, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
RemoteAuto

Description
The parameter Remote Client in Auto Mode specifies the level of access granted to remote
RobAPI clients in automatic mode.
A remote client is a client or application using RobAPI and not being connected directly to
the controller, e.g. RobotStudio Online.

Usage
Specify the level of access that should be granted to remote RobAPI clients in automatic
mode when accessing objects associated with this access level.

Allowed values
Write enabled
Read only
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 143

4 Topic I/O
4.4.1. The Bus type

4.4 Type Bus

4.4.1. The Bus type

Overview
This section describes the type Bus, which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter of this
type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_BUS

Type description
An I/O bus is a logical software representation of a fieldbus within the controller.

Usage
By specifying a bus, a logical representation of the real fieldbus is created. The bus
configuration defines the specific parameters that will determine the behavior for the
fieldbus, like communication speed and bus recovery time.
The bus is used when defining the units and other objects in the I/O system.

Prerequisites
Before defining a new bus it is necessary to have the desired fieldbus option installed in the
system.
The fieldbus option typically consists of software to configure buses of the specific type, and
the hardware required to equip the controller with the physical interfaces needed for the
specific fieldbus.

Limitations
The bus has the following limitations:
• The maximum number of buses in the system depends on the installed fieldbus
options. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• It is only possible to configure buses of types for which the respective option has been
installed in the system.

Predefined buses

Bus: Description:
Local Local is used for communication with the safety I/O boards and the built in 8DI/
8DO user I/O unit. No extra units can be configured to this bus beside the user
I/O unit.
Virtual1 Virtual1 is a virtual bus that can be used for configuration of virtual units.

Depending on the installed options, there can be other predefined buses not described in this
manual.

Continues on next page

144 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.4.1. The Bus type

Continued

Related information
More information about the bus configuration can be found in the manual for the respective
fieldbus option.
Application manual - DeviceNet.

Example DeviceNet
This is a typical DeviceNet bus. Please refer to Application manual - DeviceNet for more
information about DeviceNet.

Parameter: Value:
Name MyDeviceNet
Type of bus DeviceNet
Connector ID First board
Label at Fieldbus Connector DeviceNet connector on board in PCI slot 4
Recovery time 5
DeviceNet master address 2
DeviceNet communication speed 250 kbps
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 145

4 Topic I/O
4.4.2. Name

4.4.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the name of the bus.

Usage
The name of the bus is used as a reference to the specific bus when configuring the units on
the bus.

Allowed values
A string following the RAPID rules described in the manual Technical reference manual -
RAPID overview, chapter Basic elements.
The name must be unique among all named objects in the I/O system configuration. Note that
names differing only in upper and lower case are considered as equal.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

146 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.4.3. Type of Bus

4.4.3. Type of Bus

Parent
Type of Bus belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
BusType

Description
The parameter Type of Bus specifies the type of fieldbus this bus is representing.

Usage
Defining the type of bus is vital for being able to identify which fieldbus this bus is
representing. The unique identification of the specific fieldbus is made by the actual
combination of the parameters Type of Bus and Connector ID.

Prerequisites
The fieldbus option for the desired type of bus must have been installed in the controller.

Limitations
All configured buses in the system must have a unique combination of the parameters Type
of Bus and Connector ID.

Allowed values
Values are determined by the available and installed fieldbus options.
Examples of allowed values, depending on installed fieldbus options:
• Virtual (always available)
• Local (always available)
• DeviceNet
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• Profibus
• Interbus
• EtherNet/IP

Additional information
The value Virtual is useful if a configuration from another robot system should be temporarily
tested without having all the I/O hardware available. If Type of Bus is set to Virtual for buses
not available, it is possible to run the system in simulated mode using the imported
configuration.

Related information
Connector ID on page 148.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 147

4 Topic I/O
4.4.4. Connector ID

4.4.4. Connector ID

Parent
Connector ID belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
ConnectorID

Description
The parameter Connector ID specifies were the hardware is located for the specific type of
fieldbus being represented by this bus configuration.

Usage
Connector ID is used to connect a bus to a specific hardware. If the bus is representing a
hardware bus, for example DeviceNet, Connector ID is an enumeration of the hardware (of
the same type) located in the computer module. The enumeration is made on a left to right
basis, i.e. for the PCI bus the first board is the board located in the slot furthest to the left. If
the hardware supports multiple channels (e.g. the dual PCI card for DeviceNet) the
enumeration is made from the top to bottom.

Limitations
The fieldbus option installed in the system must support several boards/channels of the same
type in the controller, otherwise the value first board or channel is the only valid value.
There can be maximum two boards in the system.
Each board can have maximum two channels.

Allowed values
The values that the parameter Connector ID can assume are determined by the available and
installed fieldbus options.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Value: Description:
First board/channel Always available
Second board/channel Fieldbus specific
Third channel Fieldbus specific
Fourth channel Fieldbus specific

Additional information
If the type of bus is Virtual or if the installed fieldbus option supports several boards of the
same type, the value Second board and higher can be available.

148 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.4.5. Label at Fieldbus Connector

4.4.5. Label at Fieldbus Connector

Parent
Label at Fieldbus Connector belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
ConnectorLabel

Description
Label at Fieldbus Connector provides a way to label the actual bus.

Usage
Use of the parameter Label at Fieldbus Connector is optional. It provides a label to identify
the physical bus or connector that this bus configuration is representing.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 80 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 149

4 Topic I/O
4.4.6. Automatic Bus Restart

4.4.6. Automatic Bus Restart

Parent
Automatic Bus Restart belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
AutomaticBusRestartDisabled

Description
Automatic Bus Restart is used to enable and disable the automatically recovery for the bus.

Usage
If this parameter is enabled and the bus in some way have stopped (e.g. ended in error state)
it tries to automatically recover to running state.
If Automatic Bus Restart is set to Disable and the bus have stopped, the bus must be started
manually from the Flexpendant or from RAPID.

Allowed values
Enable or Disable.

Related information
The bus can be started manually from RAPID with the function IOBusStart , see Technical
reference manual - RAPID overview.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

150 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.4.7. Recovery Time

4.4.7. Recovery Time

Parent
Recovery Time belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
RecoveryTime

Description
The parameter Recovery Time defines how often bus recovery shall be performed by defining
the time of the interval in seconds.
Bus recovery is performed regularly to regain contact with I/O units that the controller has
lost communication with.

Limitations
The minimum value is 5 seconds.

Allowed values
Recovery Time is specified in intervals of 5 seconds.

Additional information
Enabling and disabling of I/O units can be done using the RAPID commands IOEnable and
IODisable, see Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 151

4 Topic I/O
4.4.8. Path to Bus Configuration File

4.4.8. Path to Bus Configuration File

Parent
Path to Bus Configuration File belongs to the type Bus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
CfgPath

Description
The parameter Path to Bus Configuration File specifies the path to a file containing detailed
bus configuration information necessary for some types of fieldbuses.

Prerequisites
The target file for this parameter must be created and transferred to the controller. Creation
and transfer must be done according to the requirements for the type of bus being represented
by this configuration.

Allowed values
A string following the requirements:
• Maximum 80 characters
• Must be a valid file path
The path can be specified as HOME. This is interpreted as the path to the home directory of
the current system.

Example
To target a file with the name my_pbus_cfg.bin located in the home directory of the current
system:
HOME\my_pbus_cfg.bin

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

152 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.1. The Cross Connection type

4.5 Type Cross Connection

4.5.1. The Cross Connection type

Overview
This section describes the type Cross Connection which belongs to the topic I/O. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_CROSS

Type description
An I/O cross connection is a software-configured connection between digital I/O signals that
allow one or several signals to automatically affect the state of other signals.

Usage
Using cross connections is a simple way to interconnect signals and let the system handle I/
O activity without having to execute any RAPID code.
Cross connecting signals is a good alternative if there is an input signal in the process that,
when activated, automatically activates one or several output signals. If logical conditions
between several actor signals is needed, the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections is
available.
For detailed information on how to use the Logical Cross Connections option, see
Application manual - Robot communication and I/O control.

Limitations
The maximum number of cross connections handled by the system is limited to 100.
Cross connections must not form a chain that is deeper than 20 levels. A chain is formed when
cross connections are interlinked so that a signal that is part of a resultant expression in one
cross connection is also part of the actor expression of another cross connection, and so on.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

The depth of such chain is the number of transitions from the first actor signal to the last
resultant signal.
Cross connections must not form closed chains since that would cause infinite evaluation and
oscillation. A closed chain appears when cross connections are interlinked so that the chain
of cross connections forms a circle.
Ambiguous resultant signals are not allowed since the outcome would depend on the order of
evaluation (which cannot be controlled). Ambiguous resultant signals occur when the same
signal is resultant in several cross connections.
The expressions are evaluated from left to right, i.e. the priorities of the logical operator OR
and the logical operator AND are the same. For clarity, our advise is to avoid mixing the
logical operator OR and the logical operator AND in the same expression.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 153
4 Topic I/O
4.5.1. The Cross Connection type

Continued

Additional information
Unless the option Logical Cross Connections is installed, only direct cross connections
consisting of the two parameters Actor 1 and Resultant signal can be specified.
If the option Logical Cross Connections is installed, more complex actor conditions can be
constructed by combining up to five different actor signals with operators. The actor signals
can also be inverted.

Related information
See the chapter about Logical Cross Connections in the manual Application manual - Robot
communication and I/O control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

154 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.2. Resultant

4.5.2. Resultant

Parent
Resultant belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Res

Description
The parameter Resultant specifies the digital signal to which the result of the condition
formed by the actor signals will be stored.
Whenever the outcome of the condition formed by the actor signals is altered the signal will
take the same value as that outcome.

Usage
Specify the signal that will be effected by the outcome of the condition formed by the actor
signals.

Allowed values
A digital signal that is defined in the system.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 155

4 Topic I/O
4.5.3. Actor 1

4.5.3. Actor 1

Parent
Actor 1 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act1

Description
The parameter Actor 1 specifies the first digital signal that forms the actor expression of the
cross connection.
Whenever the value of the signal referred to by Actor 1 is altered, the logical condition formed
by the cross connection will be evaluated and the value of the signal referred to by Resultant
will be updated (if needed).

Usage
Specify the first of the digital signals that forms the condition that will control the value of
the signal referred to by Resultant.
If you have the option Logical Cross Connections, the Actor 1 parameter can be part of a more
complex statement formed by combining it with other parameters such as Invert Actor 1,
Operator 1, and Actor 2.

Allowed values
A digital signal that is defined in the system.

Related information
Resultant on page 155.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

156 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.4. Invert Actor 1

4.5.4. Invert Actor 1

Parent
Invert Actor 1 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act1_invert

Description
The parameter Invert Actor 1 specifies whether the inverted value of the signal referred to by
parameter Actor 1 will be used in the evaluation instead of the actual signal value.

Usage
The Invert Actor 1 parameter can be used when forming complex cross connection
expressions by specifying if the inverted value of Actor 1 should be used.

Limitations
Invert Actor 1 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Actor 1 on page 156.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 157

4 Topic I/O
4.5.5. Operator 1

4.5.5. Operator 1

Parent
Operator 1 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Oper1

Description
The parameter Operator 1 specifies the logical operation to be performed between the signals
referred to by parameter Actor 1 and Actor 2.

Usage
The Operator 1 parameter is used to specify the logical operation between Actor 1 and Actor
2.
If only one actor signal is used, Operator 1 is left out.

Prerequisites
By specifying Operator 1 it is explicitly demanded that the parameter Actor 2 must also be
specified.

Limitations
Operator 1 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
AND or OR.

Related information
Actor 1 on page 156.
Actor 2 on page 159.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

158 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.6. Actor 2

4.5.6. Actor 2

Parent
Actor 2 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act2

Description
The parameter Actor 2 specifies the second digital signal that forms the actor expression of
the cross connection.
Whenever the value of the signal referred to by Actor 2 is altered, the logical condition formed
by the cross connection will be evaluated and the value of the signal referred to by Resultant
will be updated (if needed).

Usage
Specify the second of the digital signals that forms the condition that will control the value of
the signal referred to by Resultant. If only one actor signal is used, Actor 2 is left out.

Prerequisites
Actor 2 will be ignored unless the parameter Operator 1 is specified.

Limitations
Actor 2 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
A digital signal that is defined in the system.

Related information
Resultant on page 155.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Operator 1 on page 158.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 159

4 Topic I/O
4.5.7. Invert Actor 2

4.5.7. Invert Actor 2

Parent
Invert Actor 2 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act2_invert

Description
The parameter Invert Actor 2 specifies whether the inverted value of the signal referred to by
parameter Actor 2 will be used in the evaluation instead of the actual signal value.

Usage
The Invert Actor 2 parameter can be used when forming complex cross connection
expressions by specifying if the inverted value of Actor 2 should be used.

Limitations
Invert Actor 2 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Actor 2 on page 159.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

160 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.8. Operator 2

4.5.8. Operator 2

Parent
Operator 2 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Oper2

Description
The parameter Operator 2 specifies the logical operation to be performed between the signals
referred to by parameter Actor 2 and Actor 3.

Usage
The Operator 2 parameter is used to specify the logical operation between Actor 2 and Actor
3.
If no more than two actor signals are used, then Operator 2 is left out.

Prerequisites
By specifying Operator 2 it is explicitly demanded that the parameter Actor 3 must also be
specified.

Limitations
Operator 2 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
AND or OR.

Related information
Actor 2 on page 159.
Actor 3 on page 162.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 161

4 Topic I/O
4.5.9. Actor 3

4.5.9. Actor 3

Parent
Actor 3 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act3

Description
The parameter Actor 3 specifies the third digital signal that forms the actor expression of the
cross connection.
Whenever the value of the signal referred to by Actor 3 is altered, the logical condition formed
by the cross connection will be evaluated and the value of the signal referred to by Resultant
will be updated (if needed).

Usage
Specify the third of the digital signals that forms the condition that will control the value of
the signal referred to by Resultant. If no more than two actor signal are used, then Actor 3 is
left out.

Prerequisites
Actor 3 will be ignored unless the parameters Operator 1 and Operator 2 are specified.

Limitations
Actor 3 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
A digital signal that is defined in the system.

Related information

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Resultant on page 155.
Operator 1 on page 158.
Operator 2 on page 161.

162 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.10. Invert Actor 3

4.5.10. Invert Actor 3

Parent
Invert Actor 3 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act3_invert

Description
The parameter Invert Actor 3 specifies whether the inverted value of the signal referred to by
parameter Actor 3 will be used in the evaluation instead of the actual signal value.

Usage
The Invert Actor 3 parameter can be used when forming complex cross connection
expressions by specifying if the inverted value of Actor 3 should be used.

Limitations
Invert Actor 3 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Actor 3 on page 162.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 163

4 Topic I/O
4.5.11. Operator 3

4.5.11. Operator 3

Parent
Operator 3 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Oper3

Description
The parameter Operator 3 specifies the logical operation to be performed between the signals
referred to by parameter Actor 3 and Actor 4.

Usage
The Operator 3 parameter is used to specify the logical operation between Actor 3 and Actor
4.
If no more than three actor signals are used, then Operator 3 is left out.

Prerequisites
By specifying Operator 3 it is explicitly demanded that the parameter Actor 4 must also be
specified.

Limitations
Operator 3 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
AND or OR.

Related information
Actor 3 on page 162.
Actor 4 on page 165.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

164 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.12. Actor 4

4.5.12. Actor 4

Parent
Actor 4 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act4

Description
The parameter Actor 4 specifies the fourth digital signal that forms the actor expression of the
cross connection.
Whenever the value of the signal referred to by Actor 4 is altered, the logical condition formed
by the cross connection will be evaluated and the value of the signal referred to by Resultant
will be updated (if needed).

Usage
Specify the fourth of the digital signals that forms the condition that will control the value of
the signal referred to by Resultant. If no more than three actor signal are used, then Actor 4 is
left out.

Prerequisites
Actor 4 will be ignored unless the parameters Operator 1, Operator 2 and Operator 3 are
specified.

Limitations
Actor 4 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
A digital signal that is defined in the system.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Resultant on page 155.
Operator 1 on page 158.
Operator 2 on page 161.
Operator 3 on page 164.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 165

4 Topic I/O
4.5.13. Invert Actor 4

4.5.13. Invert Actor 4

Parent
Invert Actor 4 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act4_invert

Description
The parameter Invert Actor 4 specifies whether the inverted value of the signal referred to by
parameter Actor 4 will be used in the evaluation instead of the actual signal value.

Usage
The Invert Actor 4 parameter can be used when forming complex cross connection
expressions by specifying if the inverted value of Actor 4 should be used.

Limitations
Invert Actor 4 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Actor 4 on page 165.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

166 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.14. Operator 4

4.5.14. Operator 4

Parent
Operator 4 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Oper4

Description
The parameter Operator 4 specifies the logical operation to be performed between the signals
referred to by parameter Actor 4 and Actor 5.

Usage
The Operator 4 parameter is used to specify the logical operation between Actor 4 and Actor
5.
If no more than four actor signals are used, then Operator 4 is left out.

Prerequisites
By specifying Operator 4 it is explicitly demanded that the parameter Actor 5 must also be
specified.

Limitations
Operator 4 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
AND or OR.

Related information
Actor 4 on page 165.
Actor 5 on page 168.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 167

4 Topic I/O
4.5.15. Actor 5

4.5.15. Actor 5

Parent
Actor 5 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act5

Description
The parameter Actor 5 specifies the fifth digital signal that forms the actor expression of the
cross connection.
Whenever the value of the signal referred to by Actor 5 is altered, the logical condition formed
by the cross connection will be evaluated and the value of the signal referred to by Resultant
will be updated (if needed).

Usage
Specify the fifth of the digital signals that forms the condition that will control the value of
the signal referred to by Resultant. If no more than four actor signal are used, then Actor 5 is
left out.

Prerequisites
Actor 5 will be ignored unless the parameters Operator 1, Operator 2, Operator 3 and
Operator 4 are specified.

Limitations
Actor 5 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
A digital signal that is defined in the system.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Resultant on page 155.
Operator 1 on page 158.
Operator 2 on page 161.
Operator 3 on page 164.
Operator 4 on page 167.

168 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.5.16. Invert Actor 5

4.5.16. Invert Actor 5

Parent
Invert Actor 5 belongs to the type Cross Connection, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Act5_invert

Description
The parameter Invert Actor 5 specifies whether the inverted value of the signal referred to by
parameter Actor 5 will be used in the evaluation instead of the actual signal value.

Usage
The Invert Actor 5 parameter can be used when forming complex cross connection
expressions by specifying if the inverted value of Actor 5 should be used.

Limitations
Invert Actor 5 can only be used if you have the RobotWare option Logical Cross Connections.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Actor 5 on page 168.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 169

4 Topic I/O
4.6.1. The Fieldbus Command type

4.6 Type Fieldbus Command

4.6.1. The Fieldbus Command type

Overview
This section describes the type Fieldbus Command, which belongs to the topic I/O. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_COMMAND

Type description
A Fieldbus Command is a startup command for a specific unit on a fieldbus.

Usage
The Fieldbus Command type is used to send commands to specific units on the fieldbus.
This is done:
• at startup.
• when connecting the unit after a power fail.
• when activating the unit from RobotStudio Online or the FlexPendant.
Several units of the same type, e.g. all d350 units, can receive commands via the type
Fieldbus Command Type. To address one specific unit, use the type Fieldbus Command.

Related information
The Fieldbus Command Type type on page 174.

Example

Parameter: Value:

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Assigned to unit My_d350
Type of Fieldbus Command LinkAddr
Value 5

170 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.6.2. Assigned to Unit

4.6.2. Assigned to Unit

Parent
Assigned to Unit belongs to the type Fieldbus Command, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Unit

Description
The parameter Assigned to Unit specifies the name of the I/O unit to which this fieldbus
command is associated.

Allowed values
The parameter must correspond to the name of a defined unit.
Note: Names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
The Unit type on page 254.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 171

4 Topic I/O
4.6.3. Type of Fieldbus Command

4.6.3. Type of Fieldbus Command

Parent
Type of Fieldbus Command belongs to the type Fieldbus Command, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
CommandType

Description
The parameter Type of Fieldbus Command is a reference to a fieldbus command type that
describes this fieldbus command.

Allowed values
The parameter must correspond to the name of a defined fieldbus command type.
Note: Names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
The Fieldbus Command Type type on page 174.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

172 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.6.4. Value

4.6.4. Value

Parent
Value belongs to the type Type of Fieldbus, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Value

Description
The parameter Value specifies the value of the command for the unit specified.

Usage
The controller sends commands to the fieldbus on startup. Use the type Fieldbus Command
to address specific units on the fieldbus and the type Fieldbus Command Type to address all
units of a specific type.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Fieldbus Command Type type on page 174.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 173

4 Topic I/O
4.7.1. The Fieldbus Command Type type

4.7 Type Fieldbus Command Type

4.7.1. The Fieldbus Command Type type

Overview
This section describes the type Fieldbus Command Type, which belongs to the topic I/O. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_COMMAND_TYPE

Type description
A Fieldbus Command Type is a startup command for a specific type of unit on a fieldbus.

Usage
The type Fieldbus Command Type is used at startup to send commands to a specific type of
unit on the fieldbus, e.g. all units of the type d350.

Additional information
The type Fieldbus Command Type has lower priority than the type Fieldbus Command.

Related information
The Fieldbus Command type on page 170.

Example

Parameter: Value:
Name LinkAddr
Type of unit d350
Default value 1

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Download order 1
Path 6,20 64 24 01 30 01,C6,1
Service Set Attribute Single

174 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.7.2. Name

4.7.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Fieldbus Command Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the logical name of the fieldbus command type.

Usage
The name of the fieldbus command type is used as a reference to the specific fieldbus
command type when configuring the fieldbus commands.

Allowed values
A string following the RAPID rules described in the manual Technical reference manual -
RAPID overview, chapter Basic elements.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 175

4 Topic I/O
4.7.3. Type of Unit

4.7.3. Type of Unit

Parent
Type of Unit belongs to the type Fieldbus Command Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
UnitType

Description
The parameter Type of Unit specifies which type of fieldbus unit this fieldbus command type
is associated with.

Allowed values
The parameter must correspond to the name of a defined Unit Type.
Note: Names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
The Unit Type type on page 266.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

176 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.7.4. Default Value

4.7.4. Default Value

Parent
Default Value belongs to the type Fieldbus Command Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
DefValue

Description
The parameter Default Value specifies the default value for commands based on this fieldbus
command type.

Usage
If a fieldbus command of this fieldbus command type has its parameter Value omitted, this
default value will act as substitute.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Value on page 173.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 177

4 Topic I/O
4.7.5. Download Order

4.7.5. Download Order

Parent
Download Order belongs to the type Fieldbus Command Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
OrderNr

Description
The parameter Download Order specifies the sequence number in which fieldbus commands
of this fieldbus command type shall be downloaded to a unit that has more than one fieldbus
command assigned to it.

Usage
Use Download Order to control the order in which the fieldbus commands are downloaded
(and executed) on a unit.
Lower download orders are downloaded before higher download orders.

Allowed values
0 - 100.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

178 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.1. The Signal type

4.8 Type Signal

4.8.1. The Signal type

Overview
This section describes the type Signal, which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter of this
type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_SIGNAL

Type description
An I/O signal is the logical software representation of an I/O signal located on a fieldbus unit
that is connected to a fieldbus within the controller.

Usage
By specifying a signal, a logical representation of the real I/O signal is created. The signal
configuration defines the specific system parameters for the signal that will control the
behavior of the signal.
Many of the parameters depend on the type of signal, therefore it is recommended that the
parameter Type of Signal is assigned first.

Prerequisites
Before defining a new signal it is necessary to make sure that the appropriate Unit and Access
Level are available (either by creating them or using a predefined Unit respectively Access
Level).

Limitations
The signal has the following limitations:
• Maximum number of signals in the system is 2048.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• Maximum number of signals on one (1) unit is 512.

Predefined signals
There are a number of predefined signals in the robot controller. These are described in
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.
Depending on options installed there can also be other predefined signals.

Related information
The Unit type on page 254.
The Access Level type on page 137.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.
Application manual - DeviceNet.
Application manual - PROFIBUS-DP.
Application manual - InterBus.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 179
4 Topic I/O
4.8.1. The Signal type

Continued

Example digital input

This is a typical example of a digital input signal, DI.

Parameter: Value:
Name ObjectAtPlace
Type of Signal Digital Input
Assigned to Unit board10
Signal Identification Label X4:4
Unit Mapping 11
Category
Access Level DEFAULT
Default Value 0
Filter Time Passive 0
Filter Time Active 0
Invert Physical Value No

Example analog output

This is a typical example of an analog output signal, AO.

Parameter: Value:
Name Speed
Type of Signal AO
Assigned to Unit board10
Signal Identification Label X6:4
Unit Mapping 16-31
Category
Access Level DEFAULT
Default Value 0
Store Signal Value at Power Fail No
Analog Encoding Type Twos complement © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
Maximum Logical Value 21474.8
Maximum Physical Value 10
Maximum Physical Value Limit 0
Maximum Bit Value 32767
Minimum Logical Value -21474.8
Minimum Physical Value -10
Minimum Physical Value Limit 0
Minimum Bit Value -32767
Signal Value in System Failure State Keep current value (no change)

Continues on next page

180 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.8.1. The Signal type

Continued

Example group input

This is a typical example of a group input signal (GI).

Parameter: Value:
Name StatusGroup
Type of Signal Group input
Assigned to Unit board10
Signal Identification Label X2:1-X2:8
Unit Mapping 0-7
Category
Access Level DEFAULT
Default Value 0
Invert Physical Value No
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 181

4 Topic I/O
4.8.2. Name

4.8.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the name of the signal.

Usage
The name of the signal is used as a reference to the specific signal when:
• Accessing the signal (i.e. reading or writing its value) in RAPID
• Configuring cross connections
• Configuring system inputs and system outputs

Allowed values
A string following the RAPID rules described in the manual Technical reference manual -
RAPID overview, chapter Basic elements.
The name must be unique among all named objects in the I/O system configuration. Note that
names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
The Cross Connection type on page 153.
The System Input type on page 206.
The System Output type on page 231.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

182 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.3. Type of Signal

4.8.3. Type of Signal

Parent
Type of Signal belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
SignalType

Description
Type of Signal specifies the signal's representation, behavior and direction.

Usage
Each signal must be classified as one of the predefined types. The type of signal will
determine the behavior of the signal as well as how it will be represented and interpreted.
As the behavior of the signal depends upon its type, the settings of other parameters will vary,
therefore it is recommended that the Type of Signal parameter is assigned before any other
parameter of the signal.

Allowed values
Digital Input
Digital Output
Analog Input
Analog Output
Group Input
Group Output
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 183

4 Topic I/O
4.8.4. Assigned to Unit

4.8.4. Assigned to Unit

Parent
Assigned to Unit belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Unit

Description
The parameter Assigned to Unit specifies which unit the signal is connected to (if any).

Usage
A unit is made physical by mapping a signal to it. This means that the unit is physical in the
sense that the signal is associated with a real I/O signal (a signal that exists on the fieldbus).
Note also that signals mapped against virtual units will be considered and treated as physical
signals.
If the signal is not mapped against a unit (i.e. the Assigned to Unit is unspecified) it will be
considered as virtual.

Allowed values
The parameter must either be unspecified (i.e. denote a virtual signal) or it must correspond
to the name of a defined unit.
Note that names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
The Unit type on page 254.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

184 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.5. Signal Identification Label

4.8.5. Signal Identification Label

Parent
Signal Identification Label belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
SignalLabel

Description
The parameter Signal Identification Label provides a free-text label to a signal.

Usage
Signal Identification Label is optional for use in providing a label for the physical contact or
cable that this signal configuration represents.
Assign an easy-to-understand name (free-text) to the signal to make it easy to physically
identify the signal (e.g. map the signal to a physical identification such as a cable marking or
an outlet label).

Allowed values
A string of maximum 80 characters.

Example
Conn. X4, Pin 1
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 185

4 Topic I/O
4.8.6. Unit Mapping

4.8.6. Unit Mapping

Parent
Unit Mapping belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
UnitMap

Description
The parameter Unit Mapping specifies which bit(s) in the I/O memory map of the assigned
unit the signal is mapped to.

Usage
All physical signals (i.e. signals connected to a physical unit) must be mapped.

Limitations
A signal must be completely mapped to bits on the same unit, e.g. it is not possible to map a
group signal to bits on different units.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 80 characters.
The string should contain the mapping order of the individual bits of the signal, using the
following syntax:
• Refer to a bit in the I/O memory map by the index of the bit, the bits are indexed from
0 (zero) and upward
• If the signal is mapped to several continuous bits, these can be given as a
range:<first bit in range> - <last bit in range>
• If the signal is mapped to several discontinuous bits and/or ranges, these should
separated by commas:<bit/range>, <bit/range>, <bit/range>

Additional information © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Signals can be mapped to bits in the range 0 to 511 unless the physical characteristics of the
unit to which the signal is assigned adds further constraints on this range.
Overlapping unit maps is not allowed, i.e. the Unit Mapping must not refer to the same bit(s)
more than once.
The size of the signal (i.e. the number of bits in the Unit Mapping) is restricted. The restriction
depends upon the type of signal:
• Digital signals must be mapped to exactly one bit
• Analog signals must be mapped between 2 and 32 bits
• Group signals must be mapped between 2 and 32 bits

Continues on next page

186 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.8.6. Unit Mapping

Continued

Mapping more than one signal against the same bit(s) in the I/O memory map can cause
unpredictable start-up values for these signals since their order of evaluation cannot be
controlled. E.g. if an inverted group output signal is mapped to the same bits as some digital
output signals, the status of these bits will depend on the order in which the signals are dealt
with, a feature that cannot be controlled.
It is highly recommended that mapping of several signals to the same bit(s) be avoided.

Example
Examples of valid mapping of a digital signal (1 bit):
• 0
• 13
Examples of valid mapping of an analog or group signal (2-32 bits):
• 4, 6-7
• 16-31
• 8-15, 0-7
Example of invalid mapping (bit 7 is overlapped):
• 0-7, 15-7
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 187

4 Topic I/O
4.8.7. Category

4.8.7. Category

Parent
Category belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Category

Description
The parameter Category provides a free-text categorizing to a signal.

Usage
Category is optional for use in categorizing the signals in different categories so that tools
(e.g. software tools) will be able to offer filtering and sorting of signals based on these
categories.

Limitations
Signals defined as Safety or Internal are hidden for the user by RobotStudio Online and
FlexPendant.

Allowed values
A string of maximum 16 characters.

Additional information
The category of all safety-related signals (internally loaded by the system) are set to Safety.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

188 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.8. Access Level

4.8.8. Access Level

Parent
Access Level belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Access

Description
The parameter Access Level specifies which clients have write access to the signal.

Usage
Access Level defines the write access of the I/O signal for different categories of I/O
controlling applications, such as RobotStudio Online and RAPID programs.

Allowed values
A string corresponding to the name of a defined Access Level type.
Note: Names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
The Access Level type on page 137.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 189

4 Topic I/O
4.8.9. Default Value

4.8.9. Default Value

Parent
The parameter Default Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Default

Description
The parameter Default Value specifies the signal value to be used at start-up.

Usage
The default value:
• will be used for initializing the signal at start-up if the signal is neither stored nor a
resultant in a cross connection.
• is used for evaluation of cross connections whenever the unit to which this signal is
assigned is disconnected.
• is not used after a system failure if the value of Signal Value at System Failure and
Power Fail is set to Keep current value.

Limitations
This parameter has lower priority than the Store Signal Value at Power Fail parameter.

Allowed values
Depending on the type of signal, the following values are allowed:

Type of signal: Allowed value:

Digital 0 or 1
Analog Any value in the range Minimum Logical Value to Maximum Logical
Value

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Group Any value in the range 0 to 2size-1 (size = number of bits in the Unit
Mapping parameter)

Related information
Store Signal Value at Power Fail on page 191.
Signal Value at System Failure and Power Fail on page 205.
Minimum Logical Value on page 201.
Maximum Logical Value on page 196.
Unit Mapping on page 186.

190 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.10. Store Signal Value at Power Fail

4.8.10. Store Signal Value at Power Fail

Parent
Store Signal Value at Power Fail belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Store

Description
The parameter Store Signal Value at Power Fail specifies whether the signal should be set to
the value stored in the permanent memory pool or not at start up.

Usage
Setting this parameter will cause the system to initialize the signal with the last known value
at start up, i.e. the value that was stored in the permanent memory pool at the previous power
down.

Prerequisites
This parameter is applicable on output signals only, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the output signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Additional information
This parameter has higher priority than the Default Value parameter.

Related information
Default Value on page 190.
Type of Signal on page 183.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 191

4 Topic I/O
4.8.11. Filter Time Passive

4.8.11. Filter Time Passive

Parent
Filter Time Passive belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
FiltPas

Description
The parameter Filter Time Passive specifies the filter time for detection of negative flanks
(i.e. physical signal value goes from active to passive).

Usage
The passive filter time filters signals from noise that could otherwise be interpreted as a pulse
of the signal.
The passive filter time specifies the period in ms (milliseconds) that the physical value of the
signal must remain passive before the signal will be considered passive and the logical signal
is changed to passive, i.e. if the time period that the physical value is passive is shorter than
Filter Time Passive, the logical signal is not changed.

Prerequisites
This parameter is applicable on digital input and group input signals only, i.e. the Type of
Signal parameter must be set to one of these types or this parameter will be ignored.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
0 No filter
10-32000 Filter time in ms

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Additional information
Note that many units have built-in hardware for filtering signals. This filter time is then added
to the value of Filter Time Passive.

Related information
Type of Signal on page 183.
Filter Time Active on page 193.

192 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.12. Filter Time Active

4.8.12. Filter Time Active

Parent
Filter Time Active belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
FiltAct

Description
The parameter Filter Time Active specifies the filter time for detection of positive flanks (i.e.
physical signal value goes from passive to active).

Usage
The active filter time filters signals from noise that could otherwise be interpreted as a pulse
of the signal.
The active filter time specifies the period in ms (milliseconds) that the physical value of the
signal must remain active before the signal will be considered active and the logical signal is
changed to active, i.e. if the time period that the physical value is active is shorter than Filter
Time Active, the logical signal is not changed.

Prerequisites
This parameter is applicable on digital input and group input signals only, i.e. the Type of
Signal parameter must be set to one of these types or this parameter will be ignored.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
0 No filter
10 - 32000 Filter time in ms
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Additional information
Note that many units have built-in hardware for filtering signals. This filter time is then added
to the value of Filter Time Active.

Related information
Type of Signal on page 183.
Filter Time Passive on page 192.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 193

4 Topic I/O
4.8.13. Invert Physical Value

4.8.13. Invert Physical Value

Parent
Invert Physical Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Invert

Description
The parameter Invert Physical Value specifies whether the physical representation should be
the inverted of the logical representation.

Usage
Use this parameter to apply an inversion between the physical value of the signal and its
logical representation in the system.
How to invert the signal depends on the direction of the signal (see Type of Signal):
• The logical value of an input signal will be the inversion of its physical value
• The physical value of an output signal will be the inversion of its logical value.
Inverting a grouped signal will make each individual bit in the group inverted.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to non-analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to
one of the digital signal or group signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Type of Signal on page 183.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

194 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.14. Analog Encoding Type

4.8.14. Analog Encoding Type

Parent
Analog Encoding Type belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
EncType

Description
The parameter Analog Encoding Type specifies how the value of an analog signal is
interpreted.

Usage
Use this parameter to specify whether the physical representation of an analog signal should
be interpreted as a signed (twos complement) or unsigned value.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable on analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
Twos If the physical analog range for a specific signal is symmetric around 0, e.g.
complement -32768 to +32767, the signal is most likely coded as twos complement.
Unsigned Unsigned is used for signals ranging from 0 and upwards.

Related information
Type of Signal on page 183.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 195

4 Topic I/O
4.8.15. Maximum Logical Value

4.8.15. Maximum Logical Value

Parent
Maximum Logical Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MaxLog

Description
The parameter Maximum Logical Value specifies the logical value that will correspond to the
Maximum Physical Value.

Usage
The logical values offer a way to access the signals (e.g. through RAPID programs) by using
logical quantities rather than physical.
By setting up the extremes (minimum and maximum values) of the logical and physical
values the system will be able to calculate scale and offset factors for transforming signal
values between the different quantities.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be greater than the value of the Minimum Logical Value.

Allowed values
-3.4 x 1038 to 3.4 x 1038
If both Minimum Logical Value and Maximum Logical Value are set to zero (0), the logical
values will be directly mapped against the physical values:
• minimum logical value = minimum physical value © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• maximum logical value = maximum physical value

Hence there is no scaling or offset factor between the logical and physical representation of
the value of a signal.

Additional information
The logical value is a representation of a signal that makes it possible to handle the signal in
quantities known from the real world feature it corresponds to rather than the physical value
used to control it. E.g. it would be more natural to set the speed of a moving axis in mm/s (the
logical value) rather than the amount of voltage needed to attain that speed (the physical
value).

Continues on next page

196 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.8.15. Maximum Logical Value

Continued

Related information
Minimum Logical Value on page 201.
Maximum Physical Value on page 198.
Minimum Physical Value on page 202.
Type of Signal on page 183.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 197

4 Topic I/O
4.8.16. Maximum Physical Value

4.8.16. Maximum Physical Value

Parent
Maximum Physical Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MaxPhys

Description
The parameter Maximum Physical Value specifies the physical value that will correspond to
the Maximum Bit Value.

Usage
The physical value directly corresponds to the value of the I/O signal that this system
parameter corresponds to, e.g. the amount of voltage given by a sensor or the current feed into
a manipulator.
By setting up the extremes (minimum and maximum values) of the bit and physical values
the system will be able to calculate scale and offset factors for transforming signal values
between the bit and physical quantities.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be greater than the value of the Minimum Physical Value.

Allowed values
-3.4 x 1038 to 3.4 x 1038
If both Minimum Physical Value and Maximum Physical Value are set to zero (0), the physical
values will be directly mapped against the bit values: © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
• minimum physical value = minimum bit value
• maximum physical value = maximum bit value
Hence there is no scaling or offset factor between the physical and bit representation of the
value of a signal.

Related information
Minimum Physical Value on page 202.
Maximum Logical Value on page 196.
Maximum Bit Value on page 200.
Minimum Bit Value on page 204.
Type of Signal on page 183.

198 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.17. Maximum Physical Value Limit

4.8.17. Maximum Physical Value Limit

Parent
Maximum Physical Value Limit belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MaxPhysLimit

Description
The parameter Maximum Physical Value Limit specifies the maximum allowed physical
value, acting as a working range limiter.

Usage
The Maximum Physical Value Limit limits the allowed maximum physical value, e.g. if a bit
or logical value is given that would exceed this limit, the physical value is automatically
adjusted to Maximum Physical Value Limit.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be greater than the value of the Minimum Physical Value Limit.

Allowed values
-3.4 x 1038 to 3.4 x 1038
If both Minimum Physical Value Limit and Maximum Physical Value Limit are set to zero (0),
the physical value limits will be directly mapped against the physical values:
• minimum physical value limit = minimum physical value
• maximum physical value limit = maximum physical value
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Minimum Physical Value on page 202.
Maximum Physical Value on page 198.
Type of Signal on page 183.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 199

4 Topic I/O
4.8.18. Maximum Bit Value

4.8.18. Maximum Bit Value

Parent
Maximum Bit Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MaxBitVal

Description
The parameter Maximum Bit Value specifies the bit value that will correspond to the
Maximum Logical Value.

Usage
The bit value is the signals representation when transmitted on the fieldbus.
The bit value is used when calculating the physical and logical values.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be greater than the value of the Minimum Bit Value.

Allowed values
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
If both Minimum Bit Value and Maximum Bit Value are set to zero (0) then the bit values will
be calculated based on the selected Analog Encoding Type.
If Analog Encoding Type is set to Twos complement:
• maximum bit value = 2(no of bits in Unit Mapping)-1-1

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• minimum bit value = 2(no of bits in Unit Mapping)-1
If Analog Encoding Type is set to Unsigned:
• maximum bit value = 2(no of bits in Unit Mapping)-1
• minimum bit value = 0

Related information
Minimum Bit Value on page 204.
Maximum Logical Value on page 196.
Maximum Physical Value on page 198.
Analog Encoding Type on page 195.
Type of Signal on page 183.

200 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.19. Minimum Logical Value

4.8.19. Minimum Logical Value

Parent
Minimum Logical Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MinLog

Description
The parameter Minimum Logical Value specifies the logical value that will correspond to the
Minimum Physical Value.

Usage
See Maximum Logical Value.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be less than the value of the Maximum Logical Value.

Allowed values
See Maximum Logical Value.

Related information
Maximum Logical Value on page 196.
Minimum Physical Value on page 202.
Type of Signal on page 183.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 201

4 Topic I/O
4.8.20. Minimum Physical Value

4.8.20. Minimum Physical Value

Parent
Minimum Physical Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MinPhys

Description
The parameter Minimum Physical Value specifies the physical value that will correspond to
the Minimum Logical Value.

Usage
See Maximum Physical Value.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be less than the value of the Maximum Physical Value.

Allowed values
See Maximum Physical Value.

Related information
Maximum Physical Value on page 198.
Type of Signal on page 183.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

202 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.21. Minimum Physical Value Limit

4.8.21. Minimum Physical Value Limit

Parent
Minimum Physical Value Limit belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MinPhysLimit

Description
The parameter Minimum Physical Value Limit specifies the minimum allowed physical value,
hence it acts as a working range limiter.

Usage
See Maximum Physical Value Limit.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
if the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be less than the value of the Maximum Physical Value Limit.

Allowed values
See Maximum Physical Value Limit.

Related information
Maximum Physical Value Limit on page 199.
Type of Signal on page 183.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 203

4 Topic I/O
4.8.22. Minimum Bit Value

4.8.22. Minimum Bit Value

Parent
Minimum Bit Value belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MinBitVal

Description
The parameter Minimum Bit Value specifies the bit value that will correspond to the Minimum
Logical Value.

Usage
See Maximum Bit Value.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to analog signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the analog signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Limitations
The value must be less than the value of the Maximum Bit Value.

Allowed values
See Maximum Bit Value.

Related information
Maximum Bit Value on page 200.
Type of Signal on page 183.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

204 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.8.23. Signal Value at System Failure and Power Fail

4.8.23. Signal Value at System Failure and Power Fail

Parent
Signal Value at System Failure and Power Fail belongs to the type Signal, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
SysfailReset

Description
The parameter Signal Value at System Failure and Power Fail specifies whether this output
signal should keep its current value or take the signal's default value in case of system failure
or at a power fail.

Usage
If a signal is required to assume a specific value when the power to the robot controller is shut
off then it can be useful to use this parameter.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only applicable to output signals, i.e. the Type of Signal must be set to one
of the output signal types or this parameter will be ignored.

Allowed values
Keep current value (no change).
Set the default value.

Related information
Type of Signal on page 183.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 205

4 Topic I/O
4.9.1. The System Input type

4.9 Type System Input

4.9.1. The System Input type

Overview
This section describes the type System Input which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter
of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SYSSIG_IN

Type description
Input signals can be assigned specific inputs, e.g. Start or Motors on. The input triggers a
system action that is handled by the system, without using the FlexPendant or other hardware
devices.
It is possible to use a PLC to trigger the system inputs.

Rejected system inputs

If the system is in manual mode or cannot perform the action due to any other unfulfilled
requirement, no error messages are displayed. When a system action is rejected the error
messages are stored in the error log.

Limitations
The following limitations have to be considered:
• Only one system action can be assigned to the input signal. However, several input
signals can be assigned the same system action.
• When deleting a system action the input signal itself remains defined. The signal has
to be deleted separately.
• System input signals are only valid for the Main task, with exceptions on the action

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

value level. These are described together with the corresponding action value.

Additional information
All system inputs are 0 to 1 level sensitive. The pulse length has to exceed 50 ms or according
to the configured filter settings for I/O signals.

Related information
How to define system inputs on page 136.
Filter Time Passive on page 192.
Filter Time Active on page 193.

206 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.2. Signal Name

4.9.2. Signal Name

Parent
Signal Name belongs to the type System Inputs in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Signal

Description
Signal Name is the name of the configured digital input signal to use. It connects the system
input with a configured digital input signal.

Prerequisite
A digital input signal with a defined name has to be configured in the system.

Allowed values
Available configured digital input signal names.

Related information
The type The Signal type on page 179.
How to define system inputs on page 136.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 207

4 Topic I/O
4.9.3. Action

4.9.3. Action

Parent
Action belongs to the type System Inputs in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Action

Description
Input signals can be assigned specific system actions. Action defines the system action to be
triggered by the signal. The system actions are handled by the system without input from a
user.

Allowed values
The following values are allowed and described on the following pages:
• Motors On on page 209.
• Motors On and Start on page 210.
• Motors Off on page 211.
• Load and Start on page 212.
• Interrupt on page 214.
• Start on page 216.
• Start at Main on page 218.
• Stop on page 220.
• Quick Stop on page 221.
• Soft Stop on page 222.
• Stop at End of Cycle on page 223.
• Stop at End of Instruction on page 224.
• Reset Execution Error Signal on page 225.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
• Reset Emergency Stop on page 226.
• System Restart on page 227.
• Load on page 228.

Related information
How to define system inputs on page 136.

208 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.1. Motors On

4.9.4. Action Values

4.9.4.1. Motors On

Parent
Motors On is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input
in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotorOn

Description
The action value Motors On sets the controller in the Motors On state.
This action can be used by a PLC to set the controller in Motors On state.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The safety chain has to be closed. To check if the safety chain is closed, use the
parameter Run Chain OK of the type System Output.

Limitations
The action value has the following limitations:
• The controller has to be in automatic mode.
• The controller cannot be in the Motors On state if the system input signal action
Motors Off is high.

Additional information
The signal sequences for Motors On is:
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0400000949

A: Motors On (IN)
B: Motors On (OUT)

Related information
Motors Off on page 211.
Run Chain OK on page 247.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant, chapter Handling inputs and outputs, I/O.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 209

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.2. Motors On and Start

4.9.4.2. Motors On and Start

Parent
Motors On and Start is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type
System Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotOnStart

Description
The action value Motors On and Start sets the controller in the Motors On state and starts the
RAPID program from the current instruction, continuous or cycle execution.
Motor On and Start can be used by a PLC to set Motors On in one single step and start a
RAPID program, instead of using the FlexPendant and the control panel.

Arguments
When the parameter Action is set to Motors On and Start, the parameter Argument1 must also
be used, specifying Continuous or Cycle. The default value is Continuous.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The parameter Argument 1 has to be defined with the run mode Continuous or Cycle.

Limitations
The action value has the following limitations:
• The controller has to be in automatic mode.
• You cannot use this action value if the Stop, Stop at end of Cycle, Stop at end of
Instruction or Motors Off actions are set.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Argument 1 on page 229.
Action on page 208.
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant chapter Handling inputs and outputs, I/O.

210 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.3. Motors Off

4.9.4.3. Motors Off

Parent
Motors Off is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input
in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotorOff

Description
The action value Motors Off sets the controller in the Motors Off state. If a program is
executing, it is stopped before changing state.
Motors Off can be used by a PLC to set the controller in Motors Off state.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• It is advisable to stop the program execution before using the action Motors Off to
secure a controlled stop.

Additional information
The signal sequence for Motors Off is:

xx0400000949

A: Motors Off (IN)

B: Motors Off (OUT)
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant, chapter Handling inputs and outputs, I/O.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 211

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.4. Load and Start

4.9.4.4. Load and Start

Parent
Load and Start is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System
Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
LoadStart

Description
The action value Load and Start loads a RAPID program (files of type .mod, .prg, and .pgf)
from a mass storage device. The program starts from the beginning.
Note! The previously loaded files (of type .prg or .pgf) will be unloaded.
Load and Start can be used by a PLC to load and start a program, instead of using the
FlexPendant.

Arguments
When the parameter Action is set to Load and Start, the parameters Argument1 and
Argument2 must also be used.

Parameter: Allowed value:

Argument1 The name of the program file to load, including the file format (.mod, .prg
or .pgf). Always define the path to the file, e.g. HOME:ModuleA.mod
Argument2 The task in which the program defined in Argument 1 should be loaded.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The controller has to be in Motors On state and the program control has to be available,

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

i.e. not used by any other resource.
• The parameter Argument 1 has to be defined with an existing program file name.
• If the option MultiMove is installed, the parameter Argument 2 must be defined with a
task for which the program or module should be loaded.

Limitations
This action value has the following limitations:
• The controller has to be in automatic mode.
• You cannot use this action if the Stop, Stop at end of Cycle, or Stop at end of Instruction
actions are set.
• Load and Start action is not valid during program execution.
• The run mode will always be set to Cyclic.
• If the controller is in Motors Off state, only the load is performed.
• If the current program has been changed, the changes will not be saved before the load.

Continues on next page

212 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.4. Load and Start

Continued

Additional information
The signal sequence for Load Start is:

xx0400000949

A: Load and Start (IN)

B: Cycle On (OUT)

Related information
Action on page 208.
Argument 1 on page 229.
Argument 2 on page 230.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 213

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.5. Interrupt

4.9.4.5. Interrupt

Parent
Interrupt is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Interrupt

Description
The action value Interrupt executes a routine and after running the routine the execution will
resume to the same instruction as before. A regain movement is always performed before the
interrupt routine executes.
Interrupt can be used by a PLC to let the robot go to a service position.

Arguments
When the parameter Action is set to Interrupt, the parameters Argument1 and Argument2
must also be used.

Parameter: Allowed value:

Argument1 The name of the routine to be executed.
Argument2 The task in which the module or program defined in Argument 1 should be
loaded.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The program execution has to be stopped.
• The parameter Argument 1 has to be defined with the name of the routine to be

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

executed, e.g. routine 1.
• If the option MultiMove is installed, the parameter Argument 2 has to be defined with
a task in which the routine should execute.

Limitations
The parameter has the following limitations:
• The system has to be in automatic mode.
• You cannot use this action value if the Stop, Stop at end of Cycle, or Stop at end of
Instruction actions are set.
• The Interrupt action is not valid during program execution.

Continues on next page

214 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.5. Interrupt

Continued

Additional information
When the execution is stopped, the robot still remembers the point to which it is supposed to
go. To prevent the robot going to this position when the Interrupt routine starts and delay it
until after the Interrupt, the following RAPID sequence can be used in the Interrupt routine:
PROC A()
StopMove\Quick;!Prevent current move instruction to continue
StorePath;!For later use
currpos:=CRobT();!Save current position
-----
-----! Place the code for the routine to run here.
-----
MoveJ currpos,v600,fine,toolx;!Move back to programmed position
RestoPath;!Restore StorePath
StartMove;!Restore StopMove
ENDPROC
After the StartMove instruction, the stopped movement will continue to move to its fine
point. When the routine A has been executed, the normal program can be restarted.

Signal sequence
The signal sequence for Interrupt is:

xx0400000949

A: Interrupt (IN)
B: Cycle On (OUT)
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Action on page 208.
Argument 1 on page 229.
Argument 2 on page 230.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 215

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.6. Start

4.9.4.6. Start

Parent
Start is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
Start

Description
The action value Start starts a RAPID program from the current instruction, continuous or
cycle run mode.
Start can be used by a PLC to start the program execution.

Arguments
When the parameter Action is set to Start, the parameter Argument1 must also be used,
specifying Continuous or Cycle. The default value is Continuous.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The controller has to be in Motors On state and the program control has to be available,
i.e. not used by any other resource.
• The parameter Argument 1 has to be defined with the running mode Continuous or
Cycle.

Limitations
This action value has the following limitations:
• The controller has to be in automatic mode.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• You cannot use this action if the Stop, Stop at end of Cycle, or Stop at end of Instruction
actions are set.

Additional information
The signal sequence for Start is:

xx0400000949

A: Start (IN)
B: Cycle On (OUT)

Continues on next page

216 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.6. Start

Continued

Related information
Argument 1 on page 229.
Action on page 208.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 217

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.7. Start at Main

4.9.4.7. Start at Main

Parent
Start at Main is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input
in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
StartMain

Description
The action value Start at Main starts a RAPID program from the beginning, continuous or
cycle run.
Start at Main can be used by a PLC to start the program execution from the beginning.

Arguments
When the parameter Action is set to Start at Main, the parameter Argument1 must also be
used, specifying Continuous or Cycle. The default value is Continuous.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The controller has to be in Motors On state and the program control has to be available,
i.e. not used by any other resource.
• The parameter Argument 1 has to be defined with the running mode Continuous or
Cycle.

Limitations
This action value has the following limitations:
• The controller has to be in automatic mode.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• You cannot use this action if the Stop, Stop at end of Cycle, or Stop at end of Instruction
actions are set.
• Start at Main action is not valid during program execution.

Additional information
The signal sequence for Start at Main is:

xx0400000949

A: Start at Main (IN)

B: Cycle On (OUT)

Continues on next page

218 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.7. Start at Main

Continued

Related information
Argument 1 on page 229.
Action on page 208.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 219

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.8. Stop

4.9.4.8. Stop

Parent
Stop is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
Stop

Description
The action value Stop stops the RAPID program execution. A program cannot be started
when this signal is high.
Stop can be used by a PLC to stop the program execution.

Prerequisites
A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.

Additional information
The signal sequence for Stop is:
1
A 0

1
B 0
xx0400000950

A: Stop (IN)
B: Cycle On (OUT)

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

220 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.9. Quick Stop

4.9.4.9. Quick Stop

Parent
Quick Stop is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input,
in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
QuickStop

Description
The action value Quick Stop stops the RAPID program execution quickly, much like an
emergency stop. The robot may slid off path.
Note! Emergency stops should not be used for normal program stops as this causes extra,
unnecessary wear on the robot. Quick Stop can preferably be used for safety equipment, such
as gates.

Prerequisites
A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 221

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.10. Soft Stop

4.9.4.10. Soft Stop

Parent
Soft Stop is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input, in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
SoftStop

Description
The action value Soft Stop stops the RAPID program execution. Soft Stop is much like an
ordinary program stop, but slightly faster. The robot may slid off path.

Prerequisites
A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

222 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.11. Stop at End of Cycle

4.9.4.11. Stop at End of Cycle

Parent
Stop at End of Cycle is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type
System Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
StopCycle

Description
The action value Stop at End of Cycle stops the RAPID program when the complete program
is executed, i.e. when the last instruction in the main routine has been completed. A program
cannot be started when this signal is high.
Stop at End of Cycle can be used by a PLC to stop the program execution when the complete
program has been executed.

Prerequisites
A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.

Additional information
The signal sequence for Stop at End of Cycle is:

xx0400000951

A: Stop at end of Cycle (IN)

B: Cycle On (OUT)
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 223

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.12. Stop at End of Instruction

4.9.4.12. Stop at End of Instruction

Parent
Stop at End of Instruction is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type
System Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
StopInstr

Description
The action value Stop at End of Instruction stops program execution after the current
instruction is completed. A program cannot start when this signal is high.
Stop at end of Instruction can be used by a PLC to stop the program execution when the
current instruction is completed.

Prerequisites
A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.

Additional information
If using Stop at End of Instruction in combination with an instruction that is waiting for a
signal or an instruction, e.g. WaitSyncTask, WaitDI, or SyncMoveOn, then the waiting
instruction may not be finished. The recommendation is to use system input Stop together
with Stop at End of Instruction to avoid the program from hanging.

Related information
Stop on page 220.

Example
If a WaitTime instruction is executed, it may take a while before the execution is stopped.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

224 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.13. Reset Execution Error Signal

4.9.4.13. Reset Execution Error Signal

Parent
Reset Execution Error Signal is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the
type System Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
ResetError

Description
The action value Reset Execution Error Signal resets the system output signal action
Execution Error.
This action can be used by a PLC to reset the error signal.

Prerequisite
A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.

Related information
Execution Error on page 238.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 225

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.14. Reset Emergency Stop

4.9.4.14. Reset Emergency Stop

Parent
Reset Emergency Stop is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type
System Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
ResetEStop

Description
The action value Reset Emergency Stop confirms the reset of an emergency stop. When an
emergency stop has occurred, it must first be restored mechanically and the reset has to be
confirmed. The controller can then be set to the Motors On state.
It is possible to use a PLC to confirm the reset of the emergency stop instead of using the
Motors On button.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The safety chain must be closed by restoring the emergency stop mechanically.

Limitations
The controller has to be in automatic mode.

Additional information
To reset an emergency stop, set the signal sequences according to the image.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0400000948

A: Reset Emergency Stop (IN), Order

B: Emergency Stop (OUT), Response
C: Run Chain OK (OUT), Response

226 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.15. System Restart

4.9.4.15. System Restart

Parent
System Restart is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System
Input in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
SysReset

Description
The action value System Restart performs a controller restart, similar to power off/on.
This action can be used by a PLC to restart the controller.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• It is advisable to stop all RAPID programs before using the action.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 227

4 Topic I/O
4.9.4.16. Load

4.9.4.16. Load

Parent
Load is an action value for the parameter Action that belongs to the type System Input in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
Load

Description
The action value Load loads a RAPID program (files of type .mod, .mod, .prg and .pgf) from
a mass storage device. The program starts from the beginning.
Note! The previously loaded files (of type .prg or .pgf) will be unloaded.
Load can be used by a PLC to load a program, instead of using the FlexPendant.

Arguments
When the parameter Action is set to Load, the parameters Argument1 and Argument2 must
also be used.

Parameter: Allowed value:

Argument 1 The name of the program file to load, including the file format (.mod, .prg
or .pgf). Always define the path to the file, e.g. HOME:ModuleA.mod
Argument 2 The task in which the program defined in Argument 1 should be loaded.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites have to be considered:
• A digital signal input with a defined signal name has to be configured in the system.
• The program control has to be available, i.e. not used by any other resource.
• The parameter Argument 1 has to be defined with the program file name.
• If the option MultiMove is installed, the parameter Argument 2 must be defined with © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
a task for which the program or module should be loaded.

Limitations
This action value has the following limitations:
• The controller has to be in automatic mode.
• Load is not valid during program execution.
• If the current program has been changed, the changes will not be saved before the load.

Related information
Action on page 208.
Argument 1 on page 229.
Argument 2 on page 230.

228 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.9.5. Argument 1

4.9.5. Argument 1

Parent
Argument 1 belongs to the type System Inputs in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Arg1

Description
Argument 1 is an argument required to perform the system actions Interrupt, Load and Start,
Motors On and Start, Start, Start at Main or Load, i.e. when the parameter Action has one of
the action values listed above, Argument 1 must be set too.

Allowed values
The following values are allowed:
System action: Allowed value:
Interrupt The name of the routine to be executed.
Load and Start The name of the program file to load, including the file format (.mod,
.prg or .pgf). Always define the path to the file, e.g. HOME:Mod-
uleA.mod
Load The name of the program file to load, including the file format (.mod,
.prg or .pgf). Always define the path to the file, e.g. HOME:Mod-
uleA.mod
Motors On and Start Continuous or Cycle (default value is Continuous)
Start Continuous or Cycle (default value is Continuous)
Start at Main Continuous or Cycle (default value is Continuous)

Related information
Action on page 208.
Interrupt on page 214.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Load and Start on page 212.

Motors On and Start on page 210.
Start on page 216.
Start at Main on page 218.
Load on page 228.
Argument 2 on page 230.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 229

4 Topic I/O
4.9.6. Argument 2

4.9.6. Argument 2

Parent
Argument 2 belongs to the type System Input, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Arg2

Description
Argument 2 is an argument required to perform the system actions Load and Start, Interrupt
and Load, i.e. when the parameter Action is set to Load and Start, Interrupt or Load,
Argument 2 must be set too.

Usage
Argument 2 is used to define a task.

Prerequisites
Action must be set to Load and Start, Interrupt or Load.

Limitations
Argument 2 is only used with the option MultiMove.

Allowed values
System action: Allowed value:
Load and Start The task in which the program defined in Argument 1 should be
loaded.
Interrupt The task in which the module or program defined in Argument 1
should be loaded.
Load The task in which the program defined in Argument 1 should be
loaded.

If MultiMove is not installed, then Argument 2 must be set to T_ROB1. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
Action on page 208.
Load and Start on page 212.
Interrupt on page 214.
Load on page 228.
Argument 1 on page 229.

230 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.1. The System Output type

4.10 Type System Output

4.10.1. The System Output type

Overview
This section describes the type System Output which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter
of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SYSSIG_OUT

Type description
System output signals can be assigned for a specific system action. These signals are set
automatically by the system without user input when the system action occurs.
System output signals can be both digital and analog.

Prerequisites
A signal must be configured in the system. The signal name must be a string of maximum 32
characters.

Limitations
The following limitations have to be considered:
• Several output signals can be assigned the same system action, but several system
actions may not be assigned to the same signal.
• When deleting a system action the signal itself remains defined. The signal must be
deleted separately.
• The predefined system output for the Motors On lamp cannot be edited.

Predefined system outputs

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Motors On is predefined in the robot system. This output is linked to the Motors On lamp on
the controller.

Additional information
The actions are valid for both manual and automatic mode unless stated otherwise in the value
descriptions.

Related information
The Signal type on page 179.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 231

4 Topic I/O
4.10.2. Status

4.10.2. Status

Parent
Status belongs to the type System Output, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Status

Description
Output signals can be assigned specific system actions. Status defines the system status that
triggered the signal. The system actions are handled by the system without input from a user.

Allowed values
The following values are allowed and described on the following pages:
• Auto On on page 234.
• Simulated I/O on page 235.
• Cycle On on page 236.
• Emergency Stop on page 237.
• Execution Error on page 238.
• Motors Off State on page 239.
• Motors On State on page 240.
• Motors Off on page 241.
• Motors On on page 242.
• Motion Supervision On on page 243.
• Motion Supervision Triggered on page 244.
• Power Fail Error on page 245.
• Path Return Region Error on page 246.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• Run Chain OK on page 247.
• TCP Speed on page 248.
• TCP Speed Reference on page 249.
• Mechanical Unit Active on page 250.
• TaskExecuting on page 251.

232 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.3. Signal

4.10.3. Signal

Parent
Signal belongs to the type System Output, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Signal

Description
Signal is the name of the configured digital output signal to use. It connects the system output
with a configured digital output signal.

Prerequisites
A digital output signal with a defined name has to be configured in the system.

Allowed values
Available configured digital output signal names.

Related information
The Signal type on page 179.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 233

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.1. Auto On

4.10.4. Status values

4.10.4.1. Auto On

Parent
Auto On is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in the topic
I/O.

Cfg name
AutoOn

Description
If Status has the value Auto On, the signal is set when the controller is in automatic mode.

Related information
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

234 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.2. Simulated I/O

4.10.4.2. Simulated I/O

Parent
Simulated I/O is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
Blocked I/O

Description
If Status has the value Simulated I/O, the signal is set when at least one I/O signal at any I/O
unit is in simulated mode.

Additional information
I/O signals can be set to simulated mode during testing, using the FlexPendant.

Related information
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 235

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.3. Cycle On

4.10.4.3. Cycle On

Parent
Cycle On is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in the topic
I/O.

Cfg name
CycleOn

Description
If Status has the value Cycle On, the signal is set when the robot program is executing.
During path recovery operations, the signal is set.

Additional information
Cycle On is also active for Service and Event Routine execution.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

236 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.4. Emergency Stop

4.10.4.4. Emergency Stop

Parent
Emergency Stop is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
EmStop

Description
If Status has the value Emergency Stop, the signal is set when the controller is in the
Emergency Stop state.

Additional information
The signal sequence for Emergency Stop is:

xx0400000948

A: Reset Emergency Stop (IN), Order

B: Emergency Stop (OUT), Response
C: Run Chain OK (OUT), Response
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 237

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.5. Execution Error

4.10.4.5. Execution Error

Parent
Execution Error is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Error

Description
If Status has the value Execution Error, the signal is set when the robot program execution
has been stopped due to a program error.

Related information
Reset Execution Error Signal on page 225.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

238 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.6. Motors Off State

4.10.4.6. Motors Off State

Parent
Motors Off State is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotOffState

Description
If Status has the value Motors Off State, the signal is set when the controller is in the Motors
Off state.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 239

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.7. Motors On State

4.10.4.7. Motors On State

Parent
Motors On State is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotOnState

Description
If Status has the value Motors On State, the signal is set when the controller is in the Motors
On state.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

240 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.8. Motors Off

4.10.4.8. Motors Off

Parent
Motors Off is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotorOff

Description
If Status has the value Motors Off, the signal is set when the controller is in the Motors Off
state.

Additional information
When the controller is in Motors Off state and a safety chain is not closed, the output signal
pulses.
If only Motors Off state is requested, the action value Motors Off State is preferred.

Related information
Motors Off State on page 239.
Run Chain OK on page 247.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 241

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.9. Motors On

4.10.4.9. Motors On

Parent
Motors On is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotorOn

Description
If Status has the value Motors On, the signal is set when the controller is in the Motors On
state.

Additional information
If the controller is in guard stop, the output starts pulsing with a frequency of 1 sec. If the
controller is not calibrated or the revolution counter is not updated, the output will pulsate
even faster in manual mode.
Motors On can be used to detect if the controller is in Motors On and whether the controller
is synchronized or not.

Related information
Motors On State on page 240.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

242 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.10. Motion Supervision On

4.10.4.10. Motion Supervision On

Parent
Motion Supervision On is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System
Output in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotSupOn

Description
If Status has the value Motion Supervision On, the signal is set when the collision detection
function is active.

Prerequisites
When the parameter Status is set to Motion Supervision On, the parameter Argument must
also be used, specifying which robot the supervision is used for. The default value is ROB_1.
The option Collision Detection must be installed.

Additional information
Motion Supervision On is only valid when the robot is moving.

Related information
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 243

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.11. Motion Supervision Triggered

4.10.4.11. Motion Supervision Triggered

Parent
Motion Supervision Triggered is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type
System Output in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MotSupTrigg

Description
If Status has the value Motion Supervision Triggered, the signal is set when the collision
detection function has been triggered.

Prerequisites
If the parameter Argument specifies a robot, the signal will only show if collision detection
has been triggered for that robot. If the parameter Argument is not used, the signal will show
if collision detection has been triggered for any robot.
The option Collision Detection must be installed.

Additional information
The signal is reset by one of the following actions:
• The program is restarted.
• The Program Pointer is manually moved to Main.
• The error message is acknowledged.

Related information
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

244 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.12. Power Fail Error

4.10.4.12. Power Fail Error

Parent
Power Fail Error is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output
in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
PFError

Description
If Status has the value Power Fail Error, the signal is set when a program cannot continue
from its current position after a power failure.

Additional information
The program will not restart after the value Power Fail Error is set. Usually, the program can
be started, but it will always start from the beginning.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 245

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.13. Path Return Region Error

4.10.4.13. Path Return Region Error

Parent
Path Return Region Error is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System
Output in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
RegainDistError

Description
If Status has the value Path Return Region Error, the signal is set when an attempt to start
the robot program has been made but failed since the robot was too far from the programmed
path.

Prerequisites
If the parameter Argument specifies a robot, the signal will only show if that robot is too far
from the programmed path. If the parameter Argument is not used, the signal will show if any
robot is too far from the programmed path.

Additional information
The value Path Return Region Error is set if the current movement is interrupted and then:
• The robot is jogged too far from the programed path and then restarted.
• An emergency stop has occurred and the robot has slid too far away from its
programmed path and then restarted.
The signal is reset by one of the following actions:
• The program is restarted after the robot has been jogged into the regain zone.
• The Program Pointer is manually moved to Main.
• The Program Pointer is manually moved and the program is restarted.
The distances of the zones can be configured in the type Return Region in the topic
Controller. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
The Path Return Region type on page 99, in the topic Controller.

246 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.14. Run Chain OK

4.10.4.14. Run Chain OK

Parent
Run Chain OK is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
RunchOk

Description
If Status has the value Run Chain OK, the signal is set when the safety chain is closed. The
safety chain must be closed to be able to go to Motors On.

Additional information
Signal sequence:

xx0400000948

A: Reset Emergency Stop (IN), Order

B: Emergency Stop (OUT), Response
C: Run Chain OK (OUT), Response

Example
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

In Manual mode the safety chain is opened and Run Chain OK is not set.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 247

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.15. TCP Speed

4.10.4.15. TCP Speed

Parent
TCP Speed is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in the
topic I/O.

Cfg name
TCPSpeed

Description
If Status has the value TCP Speed, the signal is an analog signal that reflects the speed of the
robot's TCP.

Prerequisites
When the parameter Status is set to TCP Speed, the parameter Argument must also be used,
specifying which robot the speed refers to. The default value is ROB_1.

Additional information
The logical value of the signal is specified in m/s, e.g. a speed of 2000 mm/s corresponds to
the logical value 2 m/s. The scaling factor for the physical value is specified in the parameters
of the corresponding signal.
The analog output is set approximately 60 ms before the actual TCP speed occurs. This
prediction time is constant during acceleration and deceleration.

Related information
Maximum Logical Value on page 196.
Maximum Physical Value on page 198.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

248 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.16. TCP Speed Reference

4.10.4.16. TCP Speed Reference

Parent
TCP Speed Reference is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System
Output in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
TCPSpeedRef

Description
If Status has the value TCP Speed Reference, the signal is an analog signal describing the
programmed speed of the robot's TCP.

Prerequisites
When the parameter Status is set to TCP Speed Reference, the parameter Argument must also
be used, specifying which robot the programmed speed refers to. The default value is ROB_1.

Additional information
TCP Speed Reference works in the same way as TCP Speed but uses the programmed speed.
Note: TCP Speed can differ from TCP Speed Reference, e.g. at acceleration or if the override
speed has been changed.

Related information
TCP Speed on page 248.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 249

4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.17. Mechanical Unit Active

4.10.4.17. Mechanical Unit Active

Parent
Mechanical Unit Active is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System
Output in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
MechUnit Active

Description
If Status has the value Mechanical Unit Active, the signal is set when the configured
mechanical unit is active.

Arguments
When the parameter Status is set to Mechanical Unit Active, the parameter Argument must
also be used, specifying which mechanical unit the signal is reflecting. The default value is
ROB_1.

Additional information
If the configured mechanical unit is active, the system output will be set.
If the mechanical unit is configured to be active, the system output will already be set at
startup.
It is possible to deactivate a mechanical unit in the jogging window on the FlexPendant or via
RAPID.

Related information
Argument on page 252.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

250 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.4.18. TaskExecuting

4.10.4.18. TaskExecuting

Parent
TaskExecuting is a value for the parameter Status that belongs to the type System Output in
the topic I/O.

Cfg name
TaskExecuting

Description
If Status has the value TaskExecuting, the signal is set when the configured task is
executing.
During path recovery operations, the signal is not set.

Prerequisites
The parameter Argument 2 has to be defined with a task name.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 251

4 Topic I/O
4.10.5. Argument

4.10.5. Argument

Parent
Argument belongs to the type System Outputs, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Arg1

Description
Argument is an argument required to perform the system actions TCP Speed, TCP Speed
Reference, or Motion Supervision On, i.e. when the parameter Action has one of the action
values listed above, Argument must be set too.

Allowed values
If the parameter Status has the value TCP Speed, TCP Speed Reference, or Motion
Supervision On, the allowed value for Argument is a robot from the type Robot in the topic
Motion. Default value is ROB_1.
If the parameter Status has the value Path Return Region Error or Motion Supervision
Triggered, the allowed value for Argument is a robot from the type Robot in the topic Motion.
If no robot is specified, the signal reacts on any robot.
If the parameter Status has the value Mechanical Unit Active, the allowed value for Argument
is a mechanical unit of the type Mechanical Unit Group in the topic Motion. Default value is
ROB_1.

Related information
Action value TCP Speed on page 248.
Action value TCP Speed Reference on page 249.
Action value Motion Supervision On on page 243.
Action value Mechanical Unit Active on page 250.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

The Robot type on page 532 in the topic Motion.
The Mechanical Unit Group type on page 81.

252 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.10.6. Argument 2

4.10.6. Argument 2

Parent
Argument 2 belongs to the type System Outputs, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Arg2

Description
Argument 2 is an argument required to perform system action TaskExecuting, i.e when the
parameter Status has the value TaskExecuting, Argument 2 must be used to specify the task
name.

Allowed values
If the parameter Status has the value TaskExecuting, the allowed value is a task name from
the type Task in the topic Controller.

Related information
TaskExecuting on page 251
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 253

4 Topic I/O
4.11.1. The Unit type

4.11 Type Unit

4.11.1. The Unit type

Overview
This section describes the type Unit, which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter of this
type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_UNIT

Type description
An I/O unit is a logical software representation of a fieldbus unit that is connected to a
fieldbus within the controller. I/O units allow you to control electronic devices and read
sensor data. They are used for controlling signals in the robot system.

Usage
By specifying a unit, a logical representation of the real I/O unit is created. The unit
configuration defines the specific parameters that will control the behavior of the unit.
The Unit is used when defining the signals and other objects in the I/O system.

Prerequisites
Before defining a new unit:
1. Configure the Bus and
2. Make sure that the appropriate Unit Type is available (either by creating it or using a
predefined unit type).

Limitations
The unit has the following limitations:

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• Maximum number of units in the system is 40 (not including units on the bus Local)
• Maximum number of units on one bus is 20
• The type of unit and the bus referred to by parameters Type of Unit and Connected to
Bus must not be in conflict with each other, i.e. the bus types of the referenced unit
type and the referenced bus must be identical unless the bus type of the bus is Virtual.

Predefined units
The following units are predefined and located on the safety related signals:
• PANEL
• DRV_1
• DRV_2
• DRV_3
• DRV_4
Depending on installed options, there can be other predefined units not described in this
manual.

Continues on next page

254 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.11.1. The Unit type

Continued

Related information
Type of Unit on page 257.
Connected to Bus on page 258.
The Bus type on page 144.
The Unit Type type on page 266.
For more information on safety signals, please see Operating manual - IRC5 with
FlexPendant.

Example

Parameter: Value:
Name board10
Type of Unit d327
Connected to Bus MyDeviceNet
Unit Identification Level U137, placed in process cabinet C5
Unit Trust Level 1 - Error when lost
Unit Startup State Enabled
Store Unit State at Power Fail No
DeviceNet Address 10
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 255

4 Topic I/O
4.11.2. Name

4.11.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the name of the unit.

Usage
The name of the unit is used as a reference to the specific unit when configuring the signals
and fieldbus commands on the unit.

Allowed values
A string following the RAPID rules, as described in Technical reference manual - RAPID
overview, chapter Basic elements.
The name must be unique among all named objects in the I/O system configuration. Note that
names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

256 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.11.3. Type of Unit

4.11.3. Type of Unit

Parent
Type of Unit belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
UnitType

Description
The parameter Type of Unit specifies the type of the unit.

Usage
Instead of specifying all properties of a unit within the unit itself, a reference to a specific
fieldbus unit type is made. The referred unit type contains all characteristics that are common
for all units of that type.

Limitations
The bus type of the unit type referred to by this parameter must not be in conflict with the bus
referred to by the parameter Connected to Bus.

Allowed values
The parameter must correspond to the name of a defined Unit Type.
Note that names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
Connected to Bus on page 258.
The Unit Type type on page 266.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 257

4 Topic I/O
4.11.4. Connected to Bus

4.11.4. Connected to Bus

Parent
Connected to Bus belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Bus

Description
The parameter Connected to Bus specifies which bus this unit is physically connected to.

Limitations
The bus type of the bus referred to by this parameter must not be in conflict with the bus
referred to by the parameter Type of Unit.

Allowed values
The parameter must correspond to the name of a defined bus.
Note that names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

Related information
Type of Unit on page 257.
The Bus type on page 144.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

258 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.11.5. Unit Identification Label

4.11.5. Unit Identification Label

Parent
Unit Identification Label belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
UnitLabel

Description
The parameter Unit Identification Label provides a way to label the actual unit.

Usage
The parameter Unit Identification Label is an optional way to provide a label that will help
the operator to identify the unit physically.

Allowed values
A string of maximum 80 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 259

4 Topic I/O
4.11.6. Unit Trustlevel

4.11.6. Unit Trustlevel

Parent
Unit Trustlevel belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
TrustLevel

Description
The parameter Unit Trustlevel specifies the desired system behavior (i.e. error handling and
actions taken) in case communication with the unit is lost or re-established.

Usage
A state change message is logged every time the unit is connected (i.e. communication with
the unit is reestablished) unless the Unit Trustlevel is set to 2 - Loss accepted.

Allowed values
The value specifies system behavior when the unit is connected.

Value: Description:
0 - Required Error logged and system transferred to system failure mode.
1 - Error when lost Error logged.
2 - Loss accepted No action.
3 - Stop when lost Error logged and program stopped.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

260 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.11.7. Unit Startup State

4.11.7. Unit Startup State

Parent
Unit Startup State belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Disabled

Description
The parameter Unit Startup State specifies whether or not the I/O system should try to contact
this unit at startup.

Limitations
Unit Startup State has lower priority than Store Unit State at Power Fail.

Usage
If Unit Startup State for this unit is set to Enabled, the system tries to establish contact at
startup. A fault report is generated if no connection is established.
If the robot is used in a tool changing application, it is recommended that Unit Startup State
is set to Disabled and RAPID instructions (IOenable and IOdisable) are used to check
connections and enable connected units at start-up.

Allowed values
Enabled or Disabled

Related information
Store Unit State at Power Fail on page 262.
RAPID reference manual - Instructions.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 261

4 Topic I/O
4.11.8. Store Unit State at Power Fail

4.11.8. Store Unit State at Power Fail

Parent
Store Unit State at Power Fail belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
StoreLogicalState

Description
The parameter Store Unit State at Power Fail specifies whether this unit should assume the
disable or enable state it had before power down.

Usage
If Store Unit State at Power Fail is enabled (Yes), the unit assumes the state it had before
power down.
If the robot is used in a tool changing application, it is recommended that Store Unit State at
Power Fail is set to No and RAPID instructions (IOenable and IOdisable) is used to
check the state at startup.

Additional information
If Store Unit State at Power Fail is enabled, it has a higher priority than Unit Startup State.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Unit Startup State on page 261.
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

262 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.11.9. Regain Communication Reset

4.11.9. Regain Communication Reset

Parent
Regain Communication Reset belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
RegainCommunicationReset

Description
Regain Communication Reset defines if this unit should reset the signal values to the default
values when it regains communication (e.g. when a unit goes from unconnected to running
state).

Usage
If both Regain Communication Reset and Store Signal Value at Power Fail are used and the
system powers down, then Store Signal Value at Power Fail has higher priority when the
system starts up.

Allowed values
Enabled or Disabled.

Related information
Default Value on page 190, in the type Signal.
Store Signal Value at Power Fail on page 191, in the type Signal.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 263

4 Topic I/O
4.11.10. PROFIBUS Address

4.11.10. PROFIBUS Address

Parent
PROFIBUS Address belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
PB_Address

Description
The parameter PROFIBUS Address specifies the address of the I/O unit on the network.

Usage
PROFIBUS Address specifies the address that the I/O unit uses on the network, to which the
master should try to setup a connection.

Prerequisites
Profibus DP Master/Slave option must be installed.

Default value
The default value is 125.

Allowed values
Allowed values are the integers 0-125. The value must match the address specified for the
fieldbus adapter when configuring the PROFIBUS master.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

264 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.11.11. Interbus Address

4.11.11. Interbus Address

Parent
The parameter Interbus Address belongs to the type Unit, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
IB_Address

Description
The parameter Interbus Address specifies the address of the I/O unit on the network.

Usage
Interbus Address specifies the address that the I/O unit is assumed to use on the network and
which the master should try to setup a connection against.

Prerequisites
InterBus option must be installed.

Allowed values
The value can be:
• 0.240 (used for internal slave)
• 1.0 - 255.63
There are limitations for the values set by the vendor.

Related information
Application manual - InterBus.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 265

4 Topic I/O
4.12.1. The Unit Type type

4.12 Type Unit Type

4.12.1. The Unit Type type

Overview
This section describes the type Unit Type, which belongs to the topic I/O. Each parameter of
this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
EIO_UNIT_TYPE

Type description
An I/O Unit Type is a software description of a specific fieldbus unit type that can be
connected to a fieldbus within the controller.

Limitations
The following limitations must be considered:
• Maximum number of unit types in the system is 50.
• The maximum size of a Unit Type that can be handled by the controller is 64 bytes of
input data and 64 bytes of output data.

Usage
The Unit Type can be seen as an identification and description of the device that shall be
connected to the fieldbus.
The Unit Type is used when detecting Units and Fieldbus Command Types in the I/O system.

Predefined unit types

The following unit types are predefined:
• Virtual

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• LOCAL_GENERIC

Related information
How to define the I/O unit type on page 132.

Example
This is an example of a unit type with a DeviceNet bus from ABB Robotics.

Parameter: Value:
Name d327
Type of Bus DeviceNet
Vendor Name ABB Robotics
Product Name Combi Unit
Vendor ID 75
Product Code 2
Device Type 100

Continues on next page

266 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 4 Topic I/O
4.12.1. The Unit Type type

Continued

Parameter: Value:
Major Revision 5
Minor Revision 0
Production Inhibit Time 10
Explicit Messaging Enabled
Quick Connect Enabled
Connection 1 Type Polled connection
Connection 1 Interval 50
Connection 1 Output Size 6
Connection 1 Input Size 2
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 267

4 Topic I/O
4.12.2. Name

4.12.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
Name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the name of the unit type.

Usage
The name of the unit type is used as a reference to the specific unit type when:
• Configuring units
• Configuring cross connections

Allowed values
A string following the RAPID rules described in Technical reference manual - RAPID
overview, chapter Basic elements.
The name must be unique among all named objects in the I/O system configuration. Note that
names differing only in upper and lower case are considered to be equal.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

268 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.12.3. Type of Bus

4.12.3. Type of Bus

Parent
Type of Bus belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
BusType

Description
The parameter Type of Bus specifies the type of fieldbus this logical type of unit is
representing.

Usage
Defining the type of bus is vital for identifying which fieldbus this unit type is representing.

Prerequisites
The fieldbus option for the desired type of bus must be installed in the controller.

Allowed values
The values that the parameter Type of Bus can assume are determined by the available and
installed fieldbus options.
• DeviceNet
• Profibus-DP
• Virtual
• Interbus
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 269

4 Topic I/O
4.12.4. Vendor Name

4.12.4. Vendor Name

Parent
Vendor Name belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
VendorName

Description
The parameter Vendor Name specifies the name of the unit vendor.

Usage
This parameter is optional and only used as information.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 80 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

270 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.12.5. Product Name

4.12.5. Product Name

Parent
Product Name belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
ProductName

Description
The parameter Product Name specifies the name of the product for this unit type.

Usage
This parameter is optional and only used as information.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 80 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 271

4 Topic I/O
4.12.6. Product ID

4.12.6. Product ID

Parent
Product ID belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
PB_ProductId

Description
Product ID is used as an identification of the I/O unit and is only available for PROFIBUS
unit types. If the parameter is assigned the value 0 (zero), the robot controller ignores what
Product ID the connected unit has. The value of the parameter can be found in the Electronic
device data sheet (GSD) for the unit (called Ident_number in the GSD file). Note that
Ident_number is often expressed as a hexadecimal number in the GSD file.

Usage
Product ID is a PROFIBUS specific parameter.

Prerequisites
The Profibus DP Master/Slave option must be installed.

Default value
The default value is 0.

Allowed values
Allowed values are integers 0-65535.

Additional information
The I/O unit Product ID is assigned by PNO (Profibus Nützer Org.) to the vendor of the
specific I/O unit.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

272 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.12.7. Internal Slave

4.12.7. Internal Slave

Parent
Internal Slave belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
InternalSlave

Description
Internal Slave specifies if a unit with this Unit Type is an internal slave or not.

Usage
A slave device is either internal or not. The controller module has built-in slave modules that
are defined as internal slaves. Internal Slave is a general parameter available for all fieldbus
unit types.

Prerequisites
At least one fieldbus option must be installed.

Default value
The default value is No.

Allowed values
Allowed values are Yes or No.

Additional information
For more information about this parameter, see the application manual for the current
fieldbus.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 273

4 Topic I/O
4.12.8. Internal Slave Input Size

4.12.8. Internal Slave Input Size

Parent
Internal Slave Input Size belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
PB_InputSize

Description
The parameter Internal Slave Input Size defines the data size in bytes for the input area
received from the unit.

Usage
Internal Slave Input Size is a PROFIBUS specific parameter that is only available for internal
slave unit types.

Prerequisites
The Profibus DP Master/Slave option must be installed.

Limitations
A limitation is the maximum unit size for the Unit Type.

Default value
The default value is 0.

Allowed values
Allowed values are the integers 0-64, specifying the input data size in bytes. The value must
match the input size specified when configuring the PROFIBUS master.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

274 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 4 Topic I/O
4.12.9. Internal Slave Output Size

4.12.9. Internal Slave Output Size

Parent
Internal Slave Output Size belongs to the type Unit Type, in the topic I/O.

Cfg name
PB_OutputSize

Description
Internal Slave Output Size defines the data size in bytes for the output area transmitted by the
unit.

Usage
Internal Slave Output Size is a PROFIBUS specific parameter that is only available for
internal slave unit types.

Prerequisites
The Profibus DP Master/Slave option must be installed.

Limitations
A limitation is the maximum unit size for the Unit Type.

Default value
The default value is 0.

Allowed values
Allowed values are the integers 0-64, specifying the output data size in bytes. The value must
match the output size specified when configuring the PROFIBUS master.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 275

4 Topic I/O
4.12.9. Internal Slave Output Size

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

276 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.1. The Man-machine Communication topic

5 Topic Man-machine Communication

5.1. The Man-machine Communication topic

Overview
This chapter describes the types and parameters of the Man-machine Communication topic.

Description
The Man-machine Communication topic contains parameters for creating customized lists for
instructions and I/O signals, simplifying everyday work.
The parameters are organized in the following types:
1. Most Common I/O Signal
2. Production permission
3. Most Common Instruction - List 1
4. Most Common Instruction - List 2
5. Most Common Instruction - List 3
The types for Most Common Instructions are identical and therefore only described in one
section, but valid for all three types.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 277

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.2.1. The Most Common I/O Signal type

5.2 Type Most Common I/O Signal

5.2.1. The Most Common I/O Signal type

Overview
This section describes the type Most Common I/O Signal which belongs to the topic Man-
machine Communication.

Cfg name
IO_MOST_COMMON

Type description
It is possible to have hundreds of I/O signals in the system. To simplify working with them it
is possible to group them to a list of the mostly used signals. This list is defined by the type
Most Common I/O Signal.

Prerequisites
A signal must be configured in the system for the signal name.

Example
This is a typical example of an often used I/O to be included in the list.

Parameter: Value:
Signal Name MySignalDI1
Signal Type DI

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

278 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.2.2. Signal Name

5.2.2. Signal Name

Parent
Signal Name belongs to the type Most Common I/O Signal, in the topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg name
name

Description
The Signal Name is the I/O signal to be part of the Most Common List.

Prerequisites
A signal must be configured in the system.

Allowed values
A signal configured in the system, a name with a maximum of 16 characters.

Related information
The Signal type on page 179.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 279

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.2.3. Signal Type

5.2.3. Signal Type

Parent
Signal Type belongs to the type Most Common I/O Signal, in the topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg name
type

Description
Signal Type defines the type of signal to be used in the common list.

Allowed values
The following values are allowed.

Value: Description:
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
AI Analog Input
AO Analog Output
GI Group Input
GO Group Output

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

280 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.3.1. The Production Permission type

5.3 Type Production Permission

5.3.1. The Production Permission type

Overview
This section describes the type Production Permission which belongs to the topic Man-
Machine Communication.

Cfg name
PROD_PERMISSION

Type description
Different types of operating restrictions and other features may be connected to specific
operating modes. Such connections are specified in the Production Permission type.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 281

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.3.2. Name

5.3.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Production Permission in the topic Man-Machine Communication.

Cfg name
name

Description
The parameter Name specifies the name of the permission.

Usage
The name of the permission is used as a reference to a specific permission when configuring
the system.

Allowed values
RUN Mode.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

282 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.3.3. Permission

5.3.3. Permission

Parent
Permission belongs to the type Production Permission in the topic Man-Machine
Communication.

Cfg name
permission

Description
The parameter Permission specifies whether switching to Cycle_mode while running in the
Auto mode should be allowed or not.
While running in the Auto Mode, it is normally possible to choose between Cycle_mode and
Continuous_mode. In certain circumstances, this is not desired: always when running in the
Auto Mode, the Continuous_mode must be active.
The parameter type restricts or permits switching to Cycle_mode while in the Auto mode.
If the name is set to RUN Mode, the permission may be set to Restricted in Auto, and it will
not be possible to switch from Continuous_mode to Cycle_mode while in the Auto Mode.

Allowed values

Value Description
Changeable in Auto This setting enables the system to be switched to Cycle_mode or
Continuous_mode while running in the Auto Mode.
Restricted in Auto This setting prohibits the system to be switched to Cycle_mode
while running in the Auto Mode. Only Continuous_mode is
possible.

Default value is Changeable in Auto.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 283

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.1. The Most Common Instruction types

5.4 Type Most Common Instruction

5.4.1. The Most Common Instruction types

Overview
This section describes the types Most Common Instruction - List 1,Most Common Instruction
- List 2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3 which belongs to topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg names
MMC_MC1
MMC_MC2
MMC_MC3

Type description
The system contains lists of instructions to use when programming the robot. There are also
three lists available to adapt to personal requirements. These are called Most Common
Instruction - List 1, Most Common Instruction - List 2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3.
The three lists are set up of a number of parameters equal between the lists. Therefore the
parameters are described together in this manual.

Required parameters
Only the system parameter Name requires a value.

Related information
Instructions and their optional arguments and syntax are described in Technical reference
manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.

Example: Instruction without argument

To create a MoveJ instruction without arguments, only the parameter Name is required if
Name is set to MoveJ, exactly as spelled in RAPID. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Parameter: Value:
Name MoveJ
Parameter Number
Alternative Number
Instruction Name
Only for Motion Task

Example: Instruction with argument

To create a MoveL instruction with the option Time set to the alternative T for motion tasks,
use the following values.

Parameter: Value:
Name MoveL /T

Continues on next page

284 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.1. The Most Common Instruction types

Continued

Parameter: Value:
Parameter Number 5
Alternative Number 2
Instruction Name MoveL
Only for Motion Task Yes

By setting Name to MoveL/T, the button label in the picklist will clearly state to the user that
this is a MoveL instruction, using the Time option. The parameter number we use is 5, see
table below, and we use alternative 2 for [\T]. Since Name is not set to only MoveL, we must
use Instruction Name to specify to the system that it is a MoveL instruction. Only for Motion
Task states that it will only be available for motion tasks.
The syntax for the MoveL instruction is:

Parameter Number: Value:

<instr> MoveL
1 [\Conc]
2 ToPoint
3 [\ID]
4 Speed
5 [\V] or [ \T]
6 Zone
7 [\Z]
8 [\Inpos]
9 Tool
10 [\WObj]
11 [\Corr]
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 285

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.2. Name

5.4.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the types Most Common Instruction - List 1, Most Common Instruction - List
2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3 in the topic Man-machine Communication.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name to be visible on the button in the picklist.

Usage
If Name is set to an instruction or procedure spelled exactly as in RAPID, no other parameters
require a value. But, if Name contains more information, as recommended when using
instructions with arguments, then the parameter Instruction Name specifies the actual
instruction syntax.

Allowed values
The instruction name, a string with maximum 32 characters, e.g. "MoveJ".
Note! Do not use a backslash (\) in the name! Names using a backslash will cause errors,
unlike when programming in RAPID.
If an additional switch or argument is used, it is recommended to include this in the name for
clarity and append the name with a slash (/) and the argument, e.g. "ArcL/On". Furthermore
if an optional argument is included in the name then the parameter Instruction Name must be
set to the instruction.

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.
Instruction Name on page 289.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
Examples

Value: Description:
MoveJ The instruction MoveJ.
ArcL/On The instruction ArcL with the argument On.

286 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.3. Parameter Number

5.4.3. Parameter Number

Parent
Parameter Number belongs to the types Most Common Instruction - List 1, Most Common
Instruction - List 2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3 in the topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg name
param_nr

Description
Parameter Number specifies which argument should be used for instructions with optional
arguments.

Usage
If an instruction with optional arguments is used, then Parameter Number specifies which of
the arguments should be used. The instructions with parameter numbers are described in
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.
If left blank, no optional argument is used.

Allowed values
A positive integer value, starting from 0.

Additional information
If Parameter Number is used, then Alternative Number must also be used.

Related information
Instruction Name on page 289.
Alternative Number on page 288.
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 287

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.4. Alternative Number

5.4.4. Alternative Number

Parent
Alternative Number belongs to the types Most Common Instruction - List 1, Most Common
Instruction - List 2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3 in the topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg name
alt_nr

Description
Alternative Number defines which of the optional argument's alternatives to be used for the
instruction.

Usage
If the instruction has optional arguments, then Alternative Number specifies which of the
alternatives to use. The Parameter Number specifies which argument to be used.

Prerequisites
The parameter Parameter Number must be used.

Allowed values
The following values are allowed (depending on the number of alternatives available for the
instruction):

Value: Description:
0 no alternative is used
1 the first alternative is used
n... the nth alternative is used

Related information © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Instruction Name on page 289.
Parameter Number on page 287.
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.

288 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.5. Instruction Name

5.4.5. Instruction Name

Parent
Instruction Name belongs to the types Most Common Instruction - List 1, Most Common
Instruction - List 2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3 in the topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg name
instr_name

Description
Instruction Name defines which instruction to use if the parameter Name contains more
information than only the instruction.

Usage
If the instruction contains optional arguments, it is recommended to mark this in the
parameter Name. Then Instruction Name is used to specify the instruction, as spelled in
RAPID.

Allowed values
The instruction name, a string with maximum 32 characters, as spelled in RAPID.

Related information
Name on page 286.
Parameter Number on page 287.
Alternative Number on page 288.
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 289

5 Topic Man-machine Communication
5.4.6. Only for Motion Task

5.4.6. Only for Motion Task

Parent
Only for Motion Task belongs to the types Most Common Instruction - List 1, Most Common
Instruction - List 2, and Most Common Instruction - List 3 in the topic Man-machine
Communication.

Cfg name
only_mec_task

Description
Only for Motion Task defines if the instruction only should be visible in Motion Tasks, i.e.
should control the robot movement, e.g. MoveJ.

Usage
Set Only for Motion Task to True if the instruction only should be visible to Motion Tasks.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

290 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.1. The Motion topic

6 Topic Motion
6.1. The Motion topic

Overview
This chapter describes the types and parameters of the Motion topic. Each parameter is
described in the section for its type.
The topic Motion is extensive, with some 40 types. This manual revision covers the most
commonly used parameters and types.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 291
6 Topic Motion
6.1. The Motion topic

Continued

Description
Motion contains parameters associated with motion control in the robot and external
equipment. The topic includes configuring the calibration offset and the working space limits.
The described parameters are organized in the following types:
1. Acceleration Data
2. Arm
3. Arm Check Point
4. Arm Load
5. Brake
6. Control Parameters
7. Drive Module
8. Drive System
9. Force Master
10. Force Master Control
11. Friction Compensation
12. Jog Parameters
13. Joint
14. Lag Control Master 0
15. Linked M Process
16. Mains
17. Measurement Channel
18. Mechanical Unit
19. Motion Planner
20. Motion Supervision
21. Motion System

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

22. Motor
23. Motor Calibration
24. Motor Type
25. Path Sensor Synchronization
26. Process
27. Relay
28. Robot
29. Robot Serial Number
30. SG Process
31. Single
32. Single Type
33. SIS Parameters
34. Stress Duty Cycle
35. Supervision

Continues on next page

292 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 6 Topic Motion
6.1. The Motion topic

Continued

36. Supervision Type

37. Transmission
38. Uncalibrated Control Master 0

Configuration results
Changed motion parameters requires a restart of the controller. Otherwise the changes will
not have any effect on the system.
An exception to the rule is the motion supervision parameters which do not require a restart.
See the type Motion Supervision section for more information.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 293

6 Topic Motion
6.2.1. How to define base frame

6.2 Workflows

6.2.1. How to define base frame

The robot and the base frame

Normally, the base frame of the robot coincides with the world frame. However, the base
frame can be moved relative to the world frame.
CAUTION!
The programmed positions are always related to the world frame. Therefore, all positions are
also moved, as seen from the robot.

How to define the base frame

To define the base frame:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Robot.
2. Select the robot to define the base frame for.
3. Edit the parameters defining the base frame:
• Base Frame x
• Base Frame y
• Base Frame z
• Base Frame q1
• Base Frame q2
• Base Frame q3
• Base Frame q4
• Base Frame Moved by
For detailed information about each parameter, see the descriptions in the Robot type
section.
4. Save the changes.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Additional information
The illustration shows some examples of frame definitions.

en0300000423

Continues on next page

294 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 6 Topic Motion
6.2.1. How to define base frame

Continued

Related information
The Robot type on page 532.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 295

6 Topic Motion
6.2.2. How to define work area

6.2.2. How to define work area

Robot work area

The robot’s working area is set by defining a cube (for articulated robots) or by a cylinder (for
parallel arm robots) in which the TCP is allowed to move. The cube is defined by six
coordinates, three upper (x, y, z) and three lower (x, y, z), and the cylinder by four coordinates,
two upper (x, z) and two lower (x, z).

en0500001489

P1 Lower work area x, y, z

P2 Upper work area x, y, z

The coordinates are defined in the base coordinate system.

How to define the robot work area

To define the robot work area:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Robot.
2. Edit the parameters Upper Work Area and Lower Work Area for the coordinates x, y, and z.
See illustration above for descriptions.
3. Save the changes.

Related information
Upper Work Area x, y, z on page 542. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
Lower Work Area x, y, z on page 543.

296 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.2.3. How to define arm check point

6.2.3. How to define arm check point

Arm check point

If an extra load, such as a transformer or a welding-bar roller, is attached to arm 3, a point on
this equipment can be defined as a check point. The robot will then monitor the speed of this
point so that it does not exceed 250 mm/s in manual reduced speed mode.

en0300000425

P1 Arm check point

z3 z-axis for arm 3
x3 x-axis for arm 3

Limitations
The value for the Use Check Point parameter must be identical to the name used for the arm
check point.

Bound check point

The check point can also be restricted to stay within a defined cube, see illustration. The cube
is defined by six coordinates, three upper and three lower.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

en0500001489

P1 Lower check point bound x, y, z

P2 Upper check point bound x, y, z

How to define arm check point

To define the arm check point:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Arm Check Point.
2. Edit the parameters for the check point.
For detailed information, see the descriptions in the Arm Check Point type section.
3. Make a note of the Name parameter value to use later.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 297
6 Topic Motion
6.2.3. How to define arm check point

Continued

4. Save the changes.

5. In the topic Motion, choose the type Arm.
6. First select arm 3 to connect the check point to the arm. Then edit the parameter Use
Check Point. The value has to be identical to the name used for the arm check point (step
2-3 above).
For detailed information about the parameters, see sections Arm type and Arm Check
Point type.
7. Save the changes.
8. To restrict the check point, choose the type Robot in the topic Motion.
9. Edit the parameters Upper Check Point Bound and Lower Check Point Bound for the six
coordinates.
For detailed information about the parameters, see section Robot type.
10. Save the changes.

Related information
The Arm type on page 312.
The Arm Check Point type on page 330.
Upper Check Point Bound x, y, z on page 544.
Lower Check Point Bound x, y, z on page 545.
The Product manual for the robot.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

298 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.2.4. How to define arm loads

6.2.4. How to define arm loads

Arm load
Arm load is used for defining loads from equipment mounted on robot arms. If arm load is
not defined when equipment is mounted on robot arms, the performance of the robot is
negatively affected.
For more information about arm loads, see the type Arm Load.

Prerequisites
The mass, the mass center, and the moment of inertia of the load have to be measured or
calculated before defining the arm load.

Arms for relating arm load to

Arm loads can be related to robot arms 1, 2 and 3, see the illustration below. All loads
mounted on the upper arm are related to arm 3, including loads mounted on the rotating part.

en0300000424

If more than one load is mounted on the same arm, the total weight and center of gravity for
the loads have to be calculated.

How to define an arm load

To define an arm load:
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

1. In the topic Motion, choose the type Arm Load.

2. Select the arm load to define.
3. Enter or change the parameters of the arm load and save your changes.
For detailed information about each parameter, see the descriptions in the type Arm Load.
4. In the topic Motion, choose the type Arm and select the arm that the load is mounted on.
5. For the selected arm, choose the parameter Use Customer Arm Load and specify the name
of the arm load.
6. Save your changes.

Related information
The Arm Load type on page 333.
The Arm type on page 312.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 299

6 Topic Motion
6.2.5. How to optimize drive system parameters

6.2.5. How to optimize drive system parameters

The drive system parameters

The drive system can be configured so that it corresponds to the robot's installation. The
parameters related to the drive system are organized in two types.

To optimize the... ...use the parameters of the type:

tolerance for the mains power supply Mains
cable type and length Cable

Default and optimal values

All drive system parameters have nominal values after installation. For improving the robot's
performance, these parameters can be adjusted according to the robot's actual installation.
CAUTION!
Parameter settings outside the range of the robot's installation may negatively affect the
robot's performance.

How to optimize the mains tolerance

To optimize the tolerance for the mains power supply:
1. In the topic Motion, choose the type Mains.
2. Edit the Mains Tolerance Min parameter according to the robot's installation.
For detailed information about each parameter, see the descriptions in the type Mains.
3. Save the changes.

Related information
The Mains type on page 444.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

300 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.2.6. How to tune motion supervision

6.2.6. How to tune motion supervision

Motion supervision
Motion supervision is functionality for collision detection with the option Collision detection.

How to tune the motion supervision

To tune the motion supervision:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Motion Supervision.
2. Decide which robot to tune the supervision for.
3. Edit the parameters for motion supervision. For detailed information about each
parameter, see the descriptions in the type Motion Supervision.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
The Motion Supervision type on page 486.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 301

6 Topic Motion
6.2.7. How to define transmission gear ratio for independent joints

6.2.7. How to define transmission gear ratio for independent joints

Transmission gear ratio

An independent joint can rotate in one direction for a long time, resetting the measurement
system regularly. A small round-off in the transmission gear ratio can build up to large errors
over time. The transmission gear ratio must therefore be given as an exact fraction (e.g. 10/3
instead of 3.3333).
Define the transmission gear ratio by setting Transmission Gear High to the numerator and
Transmission Gear Low to the denominator.

Limitations
The parameters Transmission Gear High and Transmission Gear Low are only useful if you
have the RobotWare option Independent Axes.
When a joint is not in independent mode, it uses the parameter Transmission Gear Ratio
instead of Transmission Gear High and Transmission Gear Low.

How to calculate transmission gear ratio

If the proportions for the transmission gear ratio are complex, count the cogs to get the exact
ratio.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0300000285

In the illustration, the total transmission gear ratio is:

xx0300000272

N1, N2, n1 and n2 represent the number of cogs on each gearwheel.

To get an exact representation of the transmission gear ratio:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Transmission.
2. Decide which for joint to define the transmission gear ratio.
3. Set the parameter Transmission Gear High to the value N1 x N2.
4. Set the parameter Transmission Gear Low to the value n1 x n2.

Continues on next page

302 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 6 Topic Motion
6.2.7. How to define transmission gear ratio for independent joints

Continued

Related information
The Transmission type on page 622.
Application manual - Motion functions and events.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 303

6 Topic Motion
6.2.8. How to define external torque

6.2.8. How to define external torque

External torque
When external equipment, for instance a cable or a coiled hose, affects any joint significantly,
the external torque should be defined using the following formula:
T = A + |k × (0 - θ0)|
T = external torque [Nm]
A = constant torque [Nm]
k = scale factor for position dependent torque [Nm]
θ0= joint position when position dependent torque is zero [rad]
If the estimated value of a significant external torque is too low, there can be unnecessary path
deviations and the manipulator might be damaged. If the estimated value is too high, the
performance of the manipulator is reduced due to restrictive acceleration limits.

How to define external torque

To define external torque:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Arm.
2. Select the arm to edit.
3. Set the desired values for the parameters External Const Torque, External Proportional
Torque, and External Torque Zero Angle.
4. Save the changes

Related information
The Arm type on page 312.
External Const Torque on page 326.
External Proportional Torque on page 327.
External Torque Zero Angle on page 328.

Example © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

A coiled hose is mounted and affects joint 6 as follows:
0 Nm at 0 degrees.
5 Nm at 200 degrees.
This external torque can be defined using the following formula: A = 0, θ0 = 0, k = 5 / (200
× (pi / 180))

304 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.2.9. How to define supervision level

6.2.9. How to define supervision level

Supervision level
It is possible to change the default supervision levels if a system needs to be more or less
tolerant to external disturbances. A higher tune factor than 1.0 gives a more tolerant robot
system, and vice versa. E.g. increasing the tune factor from 1.0 to 2.0, doubles the allowed
supervision levels, which makes the robot system more tolerant to external disturbances.
NOTE!
Increasing the tune factors can reduce the lifetime of the robot.

How to define the supervision level

To define the supervision level:
1. In the Motion topic, choose the type Arm.
2. Select the arm to change.
3. For the selected arm, set the desired values of the parameters Jam Supervision Trim
Factor, Load Supervision Trim Factor, Speed Supervision Trim Factor, and Position
Supervision Trim Factor.
4. Save the changes.

Related information
The Arm type on page 312.
Jam Supervision Trim Factor on page 322.
Load Supervision Trim Factor on page 323.
Speed Supervision Trim Factor on page 324.
Position Supervision Trim Factor on page 325.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 305

6 Topic Motion
6.3.1. The Acceleration Data type

6.3 Type Acceleration Data

6.3.1. The Acceleration Data type

Overview
This section describes the type Acceleration Data, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
ACC_DATA

Type description
The type Acceleration Data is used to specify some acceleration characteristics for axes
without any dynamic model. This is the case for certain additional axes.
For axes that have a dynamic model, Acceleration Data must still be specified even if a more
complex model is normally used for the acceleration characteristics.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

306 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.3.2. Name

6.3.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Acceleration Data, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the set of Acceleration Data.

Usage
Name is used to reference a set of Acceleration Data from the parameter Use Acceleration
Data in the type Arm.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 307

6 Topic Motion
6.3.3. Nominal Acceleration

6.3.3. Nominal Acceleration

Parent
Nominal Acceleration belongs to the type Acceleration Data, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
wc_acc

Description
Worst case motor acceleration.

Usage
Set Nominal Acceleration to a value of the acceleration the axis can always perform (even
when gravity and friction are unfavorable).
Nominal Acceleration is always used by axes without any dynamic model. For axes with
dynamic model, it is only used in independent mode.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1000, in rad/s2 (or m/s2) on the arm side.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

308 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.3.4. Nominal Deceleration

6.3.4. Nominal Deceleration

Parent
Nominal Deceleration belongs to the type Acceleration Data, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
wc_dec

Description
Worst case motor deceleration.

Usage
Set Nominal Deceleration to a value of the deceleration the axis can always perform (even
when gravity and friction are unfavorable).
Nominal Deceleration is always used by axes without any dynamic model. For axes with
dynamic model, it is only used in independent mode.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1000, in rad/s2 (or m/s2) on the arm side.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 309

6 Topic Motion
6.3.5. Acceleration Derivate Ratio

6.3.5. Acceleration Derivate Ratio

Parent
Acceleration Derivate Ratio belongs to the type Acceleration Data, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
wc_dacc_ratio

Description
Acceleration Derivate Ratio defines how fast the acceleration can build up, i.e. an indication
of the derivative of the acceleration.

Usage
If the derivative of the acceleration is not limiting the acceleration, set Acceleration Derivate
Ratio to 1. If the acceleration must be increased at a slower rate, set Acceleration Derivate
Ratio to a ratio of the maximum acceleration derivative (e.g. 0.5 to increase the acceleration
half as fast as possible).

Limitations
Acceleration Derivate Ratio is not used during independent joint motion.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0.1 and 1. The value has no unit, but is a ratio of the maximum
acceleration derivative.
The default value is 1.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

310 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.3.6. Deceleration Derivate Ratio

6.3.6. Deceleration Derivate Ratio

Parent
Deceleration Derivate Ratio belongs to the type Acceleration Data, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
wc_ddec_ratio

Description
Deceleration Derivate Ratio defines how fast the deceleration can build up, i.e. an indication
of the derivative of the deceleration.

Usage
If the derivative of the deceleration is not limiting the deceleration, set Deceleration Derivate
Ratio to 1. If the deceleration must be increased at a slower rate, set Deceleration Derivate
Ratio to a ratio of the maximum deceleration derivative (e.g. 0.5 to increase the deceleration
half as fast as possible).

Limitations
Deceleration Derivate Ratio is not used during independent joint motion.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0.1 and 1. The value has no unit, but is a ratio of the maximum
deceleration derivative.
The default value is 1.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 311

6 Topic Motion
6.4.1. The Arm type

6.4 Type Arm

6.4.1. The Arm type

Overview
This section describes the type Arm, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter of
this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
ARM

Type description
The Arm type contains a number of parameters that defines the characteristics for an arm.
There is one set of parameters of the type Arm for each joint.

Related information
How to define supervision level on page 305.
How to define external torque on page 304.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

312 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.2. Name

6.4.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Name defines the name of the set of parameters for type Arm.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 313

6 Topic Motion
6.4.3. Independent Joint

6.4.3. Independent Joint

Parent
Independent Joint belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
independent_joint_on

Description
Independent Joint is a flag for each axis that indicates whether the axis can be changed to
independent mode.

Usage
Normally, all external axes and robot axis 6 allow independent mode. To prevent one of these
axes moving independently, set Independent Joint to OFF for that axis.

Limitations
Independent Joint is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Independent Axes.

Allowed values
ON or OFF.

Related information
Application manual - Motion functions and events.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

314 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.4. Upper Joint Bound

6.4.4. Upper Joint Bound

Parent
Upper Joint Bound belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
upper_joint_bound

Description
Upper Joint Bound defines the upper limit of the working area for this joint.

Usage
Upper Joint Bound can be used to limit the working area (in radians) of the joint.
Note that it is not possible to use a value that is larger than the maximal allowed limit for the
specific joint. Trying this will cause the system to use the maximal allowed value instead.

Allowed values
A value between -1,256,637 and 1,256,637 radians.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 315

6 Topic Motion
6.4.5. Lower Joint Bound

6.4.5. Lower Joint Bound

Parent
Lower Joint Bound belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
lower_joint_bound

Description
Lower Joint Bound defines the lower limit of the working area for this joint.

Usage
Lower Joint Bound can be used to limit the working area (in radians) of the joint.
Note that it is not possible to use a value that is smaller than the minimal allowed limit for the
specific joint. Trying this will cause the system to use the minimal allowed value instead.

Allowed values
A value between -1,256,637 and 1,256,637 radians.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

316 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.6. Independent Upper Joint Bound

6.4.6. Independent Upper Joint Bound

Parent
Independent Upper Joint Bound belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ind_upper_joint_bound

Description
Defines the upper limit of the working area for the joint when operating in independent mode.

Usage
Independent Upper Joint Bound is used together with Independent Lower Joint Bound to
limit the work area for a joint that is in independent mode.

Limitations
Independent Upper Joint Bound is only useful if you have the option Independent Axes.

Allowed values
Any number (in radians).

Related information
Application manual - Motion functions and events.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 317

6 Topic Motion
6.4.7. Independent Lower Joint Bound

6.4.7. Independent Lower Joint Bound

Parent
Independent Lower Joint Bound belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ind_lower_joint_bound

Description
Defines the lower limit of the working area for the joint when operating in independent mode.

Usage
Independent Lower Joint Bound is used together with Independent Upper Joint Bound to
limit the work area for a joint that is in independent mode.

Limitations
Independent Lower Joint Bound is only useful if you have the option Independent Axes.

Allowed values
Any number (in radians).

Related information
Application manual - Motion functions and events.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

318 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.8. Calibration Position

6.4.8. Calibration Position

Parent
Calibration Position belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
cal_position

Description
Calibration Position defines the position of the axis when it was fine calibrated.

Usage
If this value is to be updated, i.e. a fine calibration is to be performed, use Calibration
pendulum to achieve the correct kinematic position of the axis and then fine calibrate the axis.
It is then necessary to subsequently fine calibrate axes of higher order.

Allowed values
A value between -1000 and 1000, specifying the position in radians.

Related information
Product Manual for the manipulator.
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 319

6 Topic Motion
6.4.9. Load Id Acceleration Ratio

6.4.9. Load Id Acceleration Ratio

Parent
Load Id Acceleration Ratio belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
load_id_acc_ratio

Description
Load Id Acceleration Ratio can be used to reduce the acceleration of the joint during load
identification.

Usage
Reducing the acceleration of the joint during load identification can be useful if the torque
supervision is triggered when identifying payloads with large inertia. If this happens, try to
reduce the value of Load Id Acceleration Ratio until the problem disappears.

Allowed values
A number between 0.2 and 1.0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

320 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.10. Performance Quota

6.4.10. Performance Quota

Parent
Performance Quota belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
performance_quota

Description
Performance Quota can be used to reduce the acceleration for the joint.

Usage
Setting Performance Quota value to 1.0 gives normal performance, but if less acceleration is
desired, a lower value can be entered.

Allowed values
A number between 0.45 and 1.0.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 321

6 Topic Motion
6.4.11. Jam Supervision Trim Factor

6.4.11. Jam Supervision Trim Factor

Parent
Jam Supervision Trim Factor belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
supervision_jam_time_factor

Description
Jam Supervision Trim Factor defines the tune factor for jam supervision.

Usage
The tune factor influences the maximum time allowed at zero speed with maximum torque.

Allowed values
A number between 0.1 and 10.0.

Related information
How to define supervision level on page 305

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

322 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.12. Load Supervision Trim Factor

6.4.12. Load Supervision Trim Factor

Parent
Load Supervision Trim Factor belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
supervision_load_factor

Description
Load Supervision Trim Factor defines the tune factor for load supervision.

Usage
The factor influences the maximum time allowed at non-zero speed with maximum torque.

Allowed values
A number between 0.1 and 10.0.

Related information
How to define supervision level on page 305.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 323

6 Topic Motion
6.4.13. Speed Supervision Trim Factor

6.4.13. Speed Supervision Trim Factor

Parent
Speed Supervision Trim Factor belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
supervision_speed_factor

Description
Speed Supervision Trim Factor defines the tune factor for speed supervision.

Usage
The factor influences the maximum allowed speed error.

Allowed values
A number between 0.05 and 10.0.

Related information
How to define supervision level on page 305.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

324 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.14. Position Supervision Trim Factor

6.4.14. Position Supervision Trim Factor

Parent
Position Supervision Trim Factor belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
supervision_pos_factor

Description
Position Supervision Trim Factor defines the tune factor for position supervision.

Usage
The factor influences the maximum allowed position error.

Allowed values
A number between 0.1 and 10.0.

Related information
How to define supervision level on page 305.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 325

6 Topic Motion
6.4.15. External Const Torque

6.4.15. External Const Torque

Parent
External Const Torque belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ext_const_torque

Description
External Const Torque defines the external constant torque.

Usage
The value of External Const Torque is used in the formula for calculation of external torque.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100,000, specifying the constant torque in Nm.

Related information
How to define external torque on page 304.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

326 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.16. External Proportional Torque

6.4.16. External Proportional Torque

Parent
External Proportional Torque belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ext_prop_torque

Description
External Proportional Torque defines the scale factor for position-dependent torque.

Usage
The value of External Proportional Torque is used in the formula for calculation of external
torque.

Allowed values
A value between -100,000 and 100,000, specifying the scale factor in Nm/rad.

Related information
How to define external torque on page 304.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 327

6 Topic Motion
6.4.17. External Torque Zero Angle

6.4.17. External Torque Zero Angle

Parent
External Torque Zero Angle belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ext_prop_zero_angle

Description
External Torque Zero Angle defines the joint position when position-dependent torque is zero.

Usage
The value of External Torque Zero Angle is used in the formula for calculation of external
torque.

Allowed values
A value between -100,000 and 100,000, specifying the position in radians.

Related information
How to define external torque on page 304.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

328 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.4.18. Angle Acceleration Ratio

6.4.18. Angle Acceleration Ratio

Parent
Angle Acceleration Ratio belongs to the type Arm, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
angle_acc_ratio

Description
Angle Acceleration Ratio defines the maximum angle acceleration ratio for the motor sensor.

Usage
This parameter should only be changed by ABB.

Allowed values
A value between 0.02 and 1.0. Default value is 1.0.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 329

6 Topic Motion
6.5.1. The Arm Check Point type

6.5 Type Arm Check Point

6.5.1. The Arm Check Point type

Overview
This section describes the type Arm Check Point, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic.

Cfg name
ARM_CHECK_POINT

Type description
If an extra load, such as a transformer or a welding-bar roller, is attached to arm 3, a point on
this equipment can be defined as a check point. The robot will then monitor the speed of this
point so that it does not exceed 250 mm/s in manual reduced speed mode.

Related information
How to define arm check point on page 297.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

330 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.5.2. Name

6.5.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Arm Check Point, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the arm check point. A check point can be used to let the robot
monitor the speed of that specified point

Allowed values
A string with maximum 24 characters.

Related information
How to define arm check point on page 297.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 331

6 Topic Motion
6.5.3. Position x, y, z

6.5.3. Position x, y, z

Parent
Position x, Position y, and Position z belongs to the type Arm Check Point, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg names
position_x
position_y
position_z

Description
Position x defines the x-coordinate of the position of the check point, specified on the basis
of the current frame of the arm (in meters).
Position y defines the y-coordinate of the position of the check point, specified on the basis
of the current frame of the arm (in meters).
Position z defines the z-coordinate of the position of the check point, specified on the basis
of the current frame of the arm (in meters).

Allowed values
A value between -3 to 3, specifying the position in meters.

Related information
How to define arm check point on page 297.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

332 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.6.1. The Arm Load type

6.6 Type Arm Load

6.6.1. The Arm Load type

Overview
This section describes the type Arm Load, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter
of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
ARM_LOAD

Type description
Arm Load is used for defining loads from equipment mounted on robot arms. If the arm load
is not defined when equipment is mounted on the robot arm, the performance of the robot is
negatively affected.

Related information
How to define arm loads on page 299.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 333

6 Topic Motion
6.6.2. Name

6.6.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Arm Load, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name specifies the name of the arm load setting it belongs to.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters, specifying the name.

Related information
How to define arm loads on page 299.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

334 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.6.3. Mass

6.6.3. Mass

Parent
Mass belongs to the type Arm Load, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
mass

Description
Mass specifies the mass of the equipment mounted on a robot arm.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 500, specifying the weight in kg.

Related information
How to define arm loads on page 299.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 335

6 Topic Motion
6.6.4. Mass Center x, y, z

6.6.4. Mass Center x, y, z

Parent
Mass Center x, Mass Center y, and Mass Center z belongs to the type Arm Load, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg names
mass_centre_x
mass_centre_y
mass_centre_z

Description
Mass Center x specifies the x-coordinate of the mass center for an arm load in the arm frame.
Mass Center y specifies the y-coordinate of the mass center for an arm load in the arm frame.
Mass Center z specifies the z-coordinate of the mass center for an arm load in the arm frame.

Allowed values
A value between -3 and + 3, specifying the coordinate in meters.

Related information
How to define arm loads on page 299.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

336 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.6.5. Inertia x, y, z

6.6.5. Inertia x, y, z

Parent
Inertia x, Inertia y, and Inertia z belongs to the type Arm Load, in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
inertia_x
inertia_y
inertia_z

Description
Inertia x defines the x-component of the arm load's moment of inertia relative to the load's
mass center around the arm's coordinate axes.
Inertia y defines the y-component of the arm load's moment of inertia relative to the load's
mass center around the arm's coordinate axes.
Inertia z defines the z-component of the arm load's moment of inertia relative to the load's
mass center around the arm's coordinate axes.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100, specifying the moment of inertia in kgm2.

Related information
How to define arm loads on page 299.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 337

6 Topic Motion
6.7.1. The Brake type

6.7 Type Brake

6.7.1. The Brake type

Overview
This section describes the type Brake which belongs to the topic Motion.

Cfg name
BRAKE

Type description
The type Brake is used to specify brake parameters for a specific joint.

Related information
The Joint type on page 404.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

338 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.7.2. Name

6.7.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the brake.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 339

6 Topic Motion
6.7.3. Control Off Speed Limit

6.7.3. Control Off Speed Limit

Parent
Control Off Speed Limit belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
control_off_speed_limit

Description
Control Off Speed Limit defines the speed for selection of delay time.

Usage
The value for Control Off Speed Limit should not be modified.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1.
Default value is 0.02.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

340 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.7.4. Control Off Delay

6.7.4. Control Off Delay

Parent
Control Off Delay belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
control_off_delay_time

Description
Control Off Delay specifies the time of normal control before the motor torque is set to zero.

Usage
Control Off Delay is used when the joint is at zero speed when the brake algorithm is
activated. The controller must be active to avoid the joint to fall by gravity before the
mechanical brake is engaged.
Time must be longer than the time for mechanical brake to engage.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 30 seconds.
Default value is 0.010 seconds.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 341

6 Topic Motion
6.7.5. Brake Control On Delay

6.7.5. Brake Control On Delay

Parent
Brake Control On Delay belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
brake_control_on_delay_time

Description
Brake Control On Delay specifies the time of normal control before the motor torque is set to
zero.

Usage
Brake Control On Delay is used if the joint is moving when the brake algorithm is activated.
The controller must be active to avoid oscillations when the mechanical brake is engaged.
The time must be longer than the time for mechanical brake to engage. Normally set to same
value as parameter Control Off Delay.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 30 seconds.
Default value is 0.

Related information
Control Off Delay on page 341.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

342 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.7.6. Brake Control Min Delay

6.7.6. Brake Control Min Delay

Parent
Brake Control Min Delay belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
brake_control_on_min_delay_time

Description
Brake Control Min Delay defines the minimum delay time.

Usage
Brake Control Min Delay should not be changed.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5 seconds.
Default value is 0.010.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 343

6 Topic Motion
6.7.7. Absolute Brake Torque

6.7.7. Absolute Brake Torque

Parent
Absolute Brake Torque belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
absolute_brake_torque

Description
Absolute Brake Torque defines the brake torque to be used for a simulated electrical brake.

Usage
Absolute Brake Torque should not be changed.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100,000 Nm.
Default value is 0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

344 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.7.8. Brake Ramp Speed Limit

6.7.8. Brake Ramp Speed Limit

Parent
Brake Ramp Speed Limit belongs to the type Brake, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
brake_ramp_speed_limit

Description
Brake Ramp Speed Limit is the point of torque reduction for simulated electrical brake.

Usage
Brake Ramp Speed Limit should not be changed.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1.
Default value is 1 (equal to 100%).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 345

6 Topic Motion
6.8.1. The Control Parameters type

6.8 Type Control Parameters

6.8.1. The Control Parameters type

Overview
This section describes the type Control Parameters, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
CONTROL_PARAMETERS

Type description
Each set of parameters of the type Control Parameters belongs to a joint (robot joint or
external axis).
The parameters in Control Parameters define what compensations should be made for the
friction in the joint.

Limitation
Changing the parameter values in Control Parameters is only useful if you have the
RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.
The type Control Parameters is only used by robot models IRB 1400 and IRB 1410. All other
robot models use the type Friction Compensation instead. The parameters are the same
however.

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance, chapter Advanced Shape Tuning.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

346 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.8.2. Name

6.8.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Control Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name to use for the control parameters.

Limitations
Name is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 347

6 Topic Motion
6.8.3. Friction FFW On

6.8.3. Friction FFW On

Parent
Friction FFW On belongs to the type Control Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
friction_ffw_on

Description
Friction FFW On determines if the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning is active or
not.

Usage
Set Friction FFW On to TRUE if you want to use Advanced Shape Tuning.

Limitations
Friction FFW On is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.

Allowed values
TRUE or FALSE.

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

348 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.8.4. Friction FFW Level

6.8.4. Friction FFW Level

Parent
Friction FFW Level belongs to the type Control Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
friction_ffw_level

Description
Friction FFW Level is set to the level of friction in the robot axis. By setting a value that
closely corresponds to the real friction, and using the RobotWare option Advanced Shape
Tuning, the friction effects can be compensated.

Usage
Friction effects can cause path deviations when performing advanced shapes. By
compensating for the friction with the correct friction level value, these effects can be
minimized.
Permanent adjustments of the friction level can be made with Friction FFW Level. The
friction level can also be temporarily tuned with RAPID commands.

Limitations
Friction FFW Level is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.

Allowed values
A decimal number between 0 and 15 (in Nm).

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 349

6 Topic Motion
6.8.5. Friction FFW Ramp

6.8.5. Friction FFW Ramp

Parent
Friction FFW Ramp belongs to the type Control Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
friction_ffw_ramp

Description
Friction FFW Ramp is set to the speed of the robot axis when the friction has reached the
constant friction level defined in Friction FFW Level. See illustration below.

Usage
Friction effects can cause path deviations when performing advanced shapes. Friction FFW
Ramp is used when compensating for these friction effects.
Permanent adjustments of the friction ramp can be made with Friction FFW Ramp. The
friction ramp can also be temporarily tuned with RAPID commands.

Limitations
Friction FFW Ramp is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape
Tuning.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 10 (in radians/second).

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance.

Illustration

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

en0300000278

350 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.9.1. The Drive Module type

6.9 Type Drive Module

6.9.1. The Drive Module type

Overview
This section describes the type Drive Module, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
DRIVE_MODULE

Type description
The type Drive Module is used to identify and specify each drive module used in the robot
system. There is one set of parameters of the type Drive Module for each drive module in the
robot system.

Limitations
If the robot system does not use MultiMove, there is only one drive module, and therefore
only set of parameters of the type Drive Module.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 351

6 Topic Motion
6.9.2. Name

6.9.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Drive Module, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Defines the unique name of the drive module.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

352 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.9.3. Number

6.9.3. Number

Parent
Number belongs to the type Drive Module, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
number

Description
Defines the identifying number of the drive module.

Usage
The drive module number is used to identify the drive module by other system parameters.

Allowed values
An integer between 1 and 4.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 353

6 Topic Motion
6.10.1. The Drive System type

6.10 Type Drive System

6.10.1. The Drive System type

Overview
This section describes the type Drive System, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
DRIVE_SYSTEM

Type description
The type Drive System is used to identify and specify each drive system used in the robot
system.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

354 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.10.2. Name

6.10.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Drive System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Defines the name for the drive system.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 355

6 Topic Motion
6.10.3. Use Drive Unit

6.10.3. Use Drive Unit

Parent
Use Drive Unit belongs to the type Drive System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_drive_unit

Description
Use Drive Unit determines which drive unit should be used.

Usage
The name of the drive unit corresponds to which node it is located on.
For example: M1DM1: node 1, drive module 1 etc.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

356 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.10.4. Current Vector On

6.10.4. Current Vector On

Parent
Current Vector On belongs to the type Drive System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
current_vector_on

Description
Current Vector On defines if the vector control is active.

Usage
Current Vector On controls an activation switch. It is used to prevent that an axis with
uncommutated motor runs away at start up.
The parameter is reset by the service routine COMMUTATION, or manually via RobotStudio
Online or FlexPendant.

Allowed values
True or False.
Default value is False.

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller, section Tuning.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 357

6 Topic Motion
6.11.1. The Force Master type

6.11 Type Force Master

6.11.1. The Force Master type

Overview
This section describes the type Force Master, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
FORCE_MASTER

Type description
Force Master is used to define how a servo gun behaves during the two faces of the gun
closing:
• when approaching the point where position regulation is replaced by force control
• during force control.
Values for position, torque, force, etc. are specified for calibration and gun closing.

Limitations
Force Master can only be used for servo tools.

Non-editable parameters
The following parameters are visible but not editable in the software configuration tools:
• Force Detection Speed
• Max Pos Err Closing
As a consequence, the above parameters are not described in the manual.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

358 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.2. Name

6.11.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Force Master.

Usage
Name is used to reference a Force Master from the parameter Use Force Master in the type
SG Process.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 359

6 Topic Motion
6.11.3. Use Force Master Control

6.11.3. Use Force Master Control

Parent
Use Force Master Control belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_force_master_control

Description
Use Force Master Control determines which Force Master Control should be used.

Usage
Use Force Master Control is a reference to the parameter Name in the type Force Master
Control.

Prerequisites
A Force Master Control must be configured before Use Force Master Control can refer to it.

Limitations
Use Force Master Control can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Force Master Control type on page 372.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

360 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.4. References Bandwidth

6.11.4. References Bandwidth

Parent
References Bandwidth belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
bandwidth_ramping

Description
The frequency limit for the low pass filter for reference values. During position regulation,
when approaching the plate thickness, position and speed values will be filtered in this low
pass filter to avoid sharp step functions.

Usage
A high value on References Bandwidth will make little use of the low pass filter.
If the servo tool is vibrating due to irregular movements, References Bandwidth can be set to
a lower value. A low value will make the servo tool movements slower.

Limitations
References Bandwidth can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 124 (Hz).
The default value is 25 Hz.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 361

6 Topic Motion
6.11.5. Use Ramp Time

6.11.5. Use Ramp Time

Parent
Use Ramp Time belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ramp_time_switch

Description
Determines if the ramping of the tip force should use a constant time or a constant gradient.

Usage
If the tip force should be ramped up to its ordered value during the time specified in Ramp
Time, set Use Ramp Time to Yes. The ramp rate will then vary to make the ramp time constant.
If the tip force should be increased at a constant rate, specified in Ramp when Increasing
Force, set Use Ramp Time to No. The ramp time will then vary to make the ramp rate
constant.

Limitations
Use Ramp Time can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

362 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.6. Ramp when Increasing Force

6.11.6. Ramp when Increasing Force

Parent
Ramp when Increasing Force belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ramp_torque_ref_closing

Description
Ramp when Increasing Force decides how fast the torque is ramped up to the ordered torque
after contact position is reached at a close gun command.

Usage
A higher value of Ramp when Increasing Force will make the tip force build up faster.

Prerequisites
Ramp when Increasing Force is only used if Use Ramp Time is set to No.

Limitations
Ramp when Increasing Force can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A value between 1 and 10000, specifying the torque increase in Nm/s.
The default value is 100 Nm/s.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 363

6 Topic Motion
6.11.7. Ramp Time

6.11.7. Ramp Time

Parent
Ramp Time belongs to the type Force Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ramp_time

Description
Ramp Time decides how fast the torque is ramped up to the ordered torque after contact
position is reached at a close gun command.

Usage
A lower value of Ramp Time will make the tip force build up faster.

Prerequisites
Ramp Time is only used if Use Ramp Time is set to Yes.

Limitations
Ramp Time can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0.001 and 1 (seconds).
The default value is 0.07 s.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

364 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.8. Collision LP Bandwidth

6.11.8. Collision LP Bandwidth

Parent
Collision LP Bandwidth belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
bandwidth_lp

Description
Frequency limit for the low pass filter used for tip wear calibration. Position and speed
reference values will be filtered in this low pass filter to avoid sharp step functions.

Usage
The only reason for changing Collision LP Bandwidth is if repetitive tip wear calibrations
give varying results. A lower value for the low pass filter can stabilize the servo tool during
the calibration.

Limitations
Collision LP Bandwidth can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 124 (Hz).
The default value is 25 Hz.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 365

6 Topic Motion
6.11.9. Collision Alarm Torque

6.11.9. Collision Alarm Torque

Parent
Collision Alarm Torquebelongs to the typeForce Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
alarm_torque

Description
Collision Alarm Torque determines how hard the tool tips will be pressed together during the
first gun closing of new tips calibrations and tool change calibrations.

Usage
Collision Alarm Torque is used for the first gun closing of new tips calibrations and tool
change calibrations. This affects the position calibration.
The best way to determine the collision position (where the tool tips meet) is to keep closing
the gun until the motor torque reaches the value specified in Collision Alarm Torque. The
distance the gun then has moved beyond the collision position is defined by the parameter
Collision Delta Position.

Limitations
Collision Alarm Torque can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 50 (Nm).
The default value is 1.5 Nm.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

366 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.10. Collision Speed

6.11.10. Collision Speed

Parent
Collision Speed belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
col_speed

Description
Collision Speed determines the servo gun speed during the first gun closing of new tips
calibrations and tool change calibrations. These calibrations affect the position calibration.

Usage
The only reason for changing Collision Speed is if repetitive tip wear calibrations give
varying results. A lower speed can improve the repeatability.

Limitations
Collision Speed can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5 (m/s).
The default value is 0.02 m/s.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 367

6 Topic Motion
6.11.11. Collision Delta Position

6.11.11. Collision Delta Position

Parent
Collision Delta Position belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
distance_to_contact_position

Description
Collision Delta Position defines the distance the servo tool has gone beyond the contact
position when the motor torque has reached the value specified in Collision Alarm Torque.

Usage
Collision Delta Position is used for the first gun closing of new tips calibrations and tool
change calibrations. This affects the position calibration.
The best way to determine the collision position (where the tool tips meet) is to keep closing
the gun until the motor torque reach the value specified in Collision Alarm Torque. The
distance the gun then has moved beyond the collision position is defined in Collision Delta
Position.
Changing the value of Collision Delta Position can remove a constant calibration error, but
does not affect if repetitive tip wear calibrations give varying results.

Limitations
Collision Delta Position can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1 (m).
The default value is 0.0019 m.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

368 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.12. Force Detection Bandwidth

6.11.12. Force Detection Bandwidth

Parent
Force Detection Bandwidth belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
force_ready_detection_bandwidth

Description
Defines the bandwidth for the force detection filter.

Usage
The force detection filter is used to filter the speed of the servo tool. The filtered speed is used
to detect if the ordered force has been reached.

Limitations
Force Detection Bandwidth can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A value between 1 and 124 Hz.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 369

6 Topic Motion
6.11.13. Delay ramp

6.11.13. Delay ramp

Parent
Delay ramp belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
delay_ramp

Description
Delays the starting of torque ramp when force control is started.

Usage
Delay ramp can be used to give the servo gun some time to stabilize before the force control
starts. A higher value of Delay ramp can result in better accuracy of the squeeze force but will
increase the cycle time.

Limitations
Delay ramp can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1 (seconds).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

370 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.11.14. Ramp to real contact

6.11.14. Ramp to real contact

Parent
Ramp to real contact belongs to the type Force Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ramp_to_real_contact

Description
Determines if the feedback position should be used instead of reference position when
deciding the contact position.

Usage
Setting Ramp to real contact to Yes will make the detection of the contact position (where the
force control starts) more exact and improve the accuracy of the squeeze force, but increase
the cycle time.

Limitations
Ramp to real contact can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
Yes or No.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 371

6 Topic Motion
6.12.1. The Force Master Control type

6.12 Type Force Master Control

6.12.1. The Force Master Control type

Overview
This section describes the type Force Master Control, which belongs to the topic Motion.
Each parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
FORCE_MASTER_CONTROL

Type description
Force Master Control is used to prevent a servo tool from closing with too high a speed.
If a servo tool is not completely closed when the force control starts, it can gain too much
speed, which can cause damages when contact is reached. This can happen if the programmed
thickness is too high, or if the servo tool tips are not properly calibrated.
If the tool is ordered to close with a higher force, it might tolerate a higher speed at impact.
The speed limit can be defined as a function of the closing torque, which is a function of the
ordered tip force. The loop gain used for regulating the speed when it exceeds the limit is also
specified.
Up to 6 points can be defined for speed limit and speed loop gain.

Ordered closing torque: Speed limit: Speed loop gain:

torque 1 Speed Limit 1 Kv 1
torque 2 Speed Limit 2 Kv 2
torque 3 Speed Limit 3 Kv 3
torque 4 Speed Limit 4 Kv 4
torque 5 Speed Limit 5 Kv 5
torque 6 Speed Limit 6 Kv 6

Speed limit 1 and Kv 1 are valid for all torque values lower than torque 1. The highest defined © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
speed limit and loop gain are valid for all torque values higher than the highest defined torque.
For torque values between defined points, linear interpolation is used.
If only one point is defined, that speed limit and speed loop gain is valid for all torque values.

Limitations
Force Master Control can only be used if you have servo tools.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.

Continues on next page

372 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 6 Topic Motion
6.12.1. The Force Master Control type

Continued

Example
In this example, four points are used to define the speed limit and speed loop gain. Any values
given for point 5 and 6 are ignored.
The parameters in the type Force Master Control are set to the following values:

Parameter: Value:
No. of speed limits 4
torque 1 2
torque 2 4
torque 3 7
torque 4 9
Speed Limit 1 200
Speed Limit 2 400
Speed Limit 3 500
Speed Limit 4 600
Kv 1 0.3
Kv 2 0.4
Kv 3 0.7
Kv 4 0.8

The results of this configuration are the following graphs for speed limit and speed loop gain:
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0400000882

A Torque (Nm)
B Speed limit (rad/s on motor)
C Speed loop gain (Nms/rad)

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 373

6 Topic Motion
6.12.2. Name

6.12.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Force Master Control.

Usage
Name is used to reference a Force Master Control from the parameter Use Force Master in
the type Force Master.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

374 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.3. No. of Speed Limits

6.12.3. No. of Speed Limits

Parent
No. of Speed Limits belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
no_of_posts

Description
No. of Speed Limits defines the number of torque values you want to define for speed limit
and speed loop gain, i.e. the number of points in the speed limit graph (see Example on page
373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for a number of torque values. Set No.
of Speed Limits to the number of torque values you want to specify.

Limitations
No. of Speed Limits can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
An integer between 1 and 6.
The default value is 1.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 375

6 Topic Motion
6.12.4. torque 1

6.12.4. torque 1

Parent
torque 1 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_1

Description
torque 1 defines the ordered closing torque for the first point in the speed limit graph (see
Example on page 373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for some torque values. Set torque 1 to
the torque value of the first point you want to specify.

Limitations
torque 1 is used for servo tools and can only be used if you have the option Servo Tool
Control.

Allowed values
A number between -1000 and 1000 in Nm.
The default value is 1 Nm.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

376 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.5. torque 2

6.12.5. torque 2

Parent
torque 2 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_2

Description
torque 2 defines the ordered closing torque for the second point (if more than one) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for some torque values. Set torque 2 to
the torque value of the second point you want to specify.

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 2 or higher, otherwise the value of torque 2 is not used.

Limitations
torque 2 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between -1000 and 1000 in Nm.
The default value is 2 Nm.

Related information
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 377

6 Topic Motion
6.12.6. torque 3

6.12.6. torque 3

Parent
torque 3 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_3

Description
torque 3 defines the ordered closing torque for the third point (if more than two) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for some torque values. Set torque 3 to
the torque value of the third point you want to specify.

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 3 or higher, otherwise the value of torque 3 is not used.

Limitations
torque 3 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between -1000 and 1000 in Nm.
The default value is 3 Nm.

Related information
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

378 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.7. torque 4

6.12.7. torque 4

Parent
torque 4 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_4

Description
torque 4 defines the ordered closing torque for the fourth point (if more than three) in the
speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for some torque values. Set torque 4 to
the torque value of the fourth point you want to specify.

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 4 or higher, otherwise the value of torque 4 is not used.

Limitations
torque 4 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between -1000 and 1000 in Nm.
The default value is 4 Nm.

Related information
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 379

6 Topic Motion
6.12.8. torque 5

6.12.8. torque 5

Parent
torque 5 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_5

Description
torque 5 defines the ordered closing torque for the fifth point (if more than four) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for some torque values. Set torque 5 to
the torque value of the fifth point you want to specify.

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 5 or higher, otherwise the value of torque 5 is not used.

Limitations
torque 5 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between -1000 and 1000 in Nm.
The default value is 5 Nm.

Related information
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

380 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.9. torque 6

6.12.9. torque 6

Parent
torque 6 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_6

Description
torque 6 defines the ordered closing torque for the sixth point (if all six points are used) in the
speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Usage
Define the speed limit and speed loop gain you want for some torque values. Set torque 6 to
the torque value of the sixth point you want to specify.

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 6, otherwise the value of torque 6 is not used.

Limitations
torque 6 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between -1000 and 1000 in Nm.
The default value is 6 Nm.

Related information
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 381

6 Topic Motion
6.12.10. Speed Limit 1

6.12.10. Speed Limit 1

Parent
Speed Limit 1 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_lim_1

Description
Speed Limit 1 defines the maximum allowed speed for the torque specified in torque 1.

Usage
Set Speed Limit 1 to the speed limit for the first point you want to specify in the speed limit
graph (see Example on page 373).

Limitations
Speed Limit 1 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100000 in rad/s on the motor side.
The default value is 300.

Related information
torque 1 on page 376.
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

382 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.11. Speed Limit 2

6.12.11. Speed Limit 2

Parent
Speed Limit 2 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_lim_2

Description
Speed Limit 2 defines the maximum allowed speed for the torque specified in torque 2.

Usage
Set Speed Limit 2 to the speed limit for the second point (if more than one) you want to specify
in the speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 2 or higher, otherwise the value of Speed Limit 2 is not used.

Limitations
Speed Limit 2 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100000 in rad/s on the motor side.
The default value is 300.

Related information
torque 2 on page 377.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 383

6 Topic Motion
6.12.12. Speed Limit 3

6.12.12. Speed Limit 3

Parent
Speed Limit 3 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_lim_3

Description
Speed Limit 3 defines the maximum allowed speed for the torque specified in torque 3.

Usage
Set Speed Limit 3 to the speed limit for the third point (if more than two) you want to specify
in the speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 3 or higher, otherwise the value of Speed Limit 3 is not used.

Limitations
Speed Limit 3 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100000 in rad/s on the motor side.
The default value is 300.

Related information
torque 3 on page 378.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

384 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.13. Speed Limit 4

6.12.13. Speed Limit 4

Parent
Speed Limit 4 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_lim_4

Description
Speed Limit 4 defines the maximum allowed speed for the torque specified in torque 4.

Usage
Set Speed Limit 4 to the speed limit for the fourth point (if more than three) you want to
specify in the speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 4 or higher, otherwise the value of Speed Limit 4 is not used.

Limitations
Speed Limit 4 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100000 in rad/s on the motor side.
The default value is 300.

Related information
torque 4 on page 379.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 385

6 Topic Motion
6.12.14. Speed Limit 5

6.12.14. Speed Limit 5

Parent
Speed Limit 5 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_lim_5

Description
Speed Limit 5 defines the maximum allowed speed for the torque specified in torque 5.

Usage
Set Speed Limit 5 to the speed limit for the fifth point (if more than four) you want to specify
in the speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Limitations
Speed Limit 5 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100000 in rad/s on the motor side.
The default value is 300.

Related information
torque 5 on page 380.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

386 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.15. Speed Limit 6

6.12.15. Speed Limit 6

Parent
Speed Limit 6 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_lim_6

Description
Speed Limit 6 defines the maximum allowed speed for the torque specified in torque 6.

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 6, otherwise the value of Speed Limit 6 is not used.

Usage
Set Speed Limit 6 to the speed limit for the sixth point (if all six points are used) you want to
specify in the speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Limitations
Speed Limit 6 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100000 in rad/s on the motor side.
The default value is 300.

Related information
torque 6 on page 381.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 387

6 Topic Motion
6.12.16. Kv 1

6.12.16. Kv 1

Parent
Kv 1 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv_1

Description
Kv 1 defines the proportional gain in the speed loop for the torque specified in torque 1. This
gain determines how fast the speed is regulated when the speed limit is exceeded.

Usage
Set Kv 1 to the proportional gain you want for the first point in the speed limit graph (see
Example on page 373).

Limitations
Kv 1 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100.
The default value is 0.5.

Related information
torque 1 on page 376.
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

388 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.17. Kv 2

6.12.17. Kv 2

Parent
Kv 2 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv_2

Description
Kv 2 defines the proportional gain in the speed loop for the torque specified in torque 2. This
gain determines how fast the speed is regulated when the speed limit is exceeded.

Usage
Set Kv 2 to the proportional gain you want for the second point (if more than one) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 2 or higher, otherwise the value of Kv 2 is not used.

Limitations
Kv 2 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100.
The default value is 0.5.

Related information
torque 2 on page 377.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 389

6 Topic Motion
6.12.18. Kv 3

6.12.18. Kv 3

Parent
Kv 3 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv_3

Description
Kv 3 defines the proportional gain in the speed loop for the torque specified in torque 3. This
gain determines how fast the speed is regulated when the speed limit is exceeded.

Usage
Set Kv 3 to the proportional gain you want for the third point (if more than two) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 3 or higher, otherwise the value of Kv 3 is not used.

Limitations
Kv 3 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100.
The default value is 0.5.

Related information
torque 3 on page 378.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

390 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.19. Kv 4

6.12.19. Kv 4

Parent
Kv 4 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv_4

Description
Kv 4 defines the proportional gain in the speed loop for the torque specified in torque 4. This
gain determines how fast the speed is regulated when the speed limit is exceeded.

Usage
Set Kv 4 to the proportional gain you want for the fourth point (if more than three) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 4 or higher, otherwise the value of Kv 4 is not used.

Limitations
Kv 4 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100.
The default value is 0.5.

Related information
torque 4 on page 379.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 391

6 Topic Motion
6.12.20. Kv 5

6.12.20. Kv 5

Parent
Kv 5 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv_5

Description
Kv 5 defines the proportional gain in the speed loop for the torque specified in torque 5. This
gain determines how fast the speed is regulated when the speed limit is exceeded.

Usage
Set Kv 5 to the proportional gain you want for the fifth point (if more than four) in the speed
limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 5 or higher, otherwise the value of Kv 5 is not used.

Limitations
Kv 5 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100.
The default value is 0.5.

Related information
torque 5 on page 380.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

392 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.12.21. Kv 6

6.12.21. Kv 6

Parent
Kv 6 belongs to the type Force Master Control, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv_6

Description
Kv 6 defines the proportional gain in the speed loop for the torque specified in torque 6. This
gain determines how fast the speed is regulated when the speed limit is exceeded.

Usage
Set Kv 6 to the proportional gain you want for the sixth point (if all six points are used) in the
speed limit graph (see Example on page 373).

Prerequisites
No. of Speed Limits must be set to 6, otherwise the value of Kv 6 is not used.

Limitations
Kv 6 can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 100.
The default value is 0.5.

Related information
torque 6 on page 381.
No. of Speed Limits on page 375.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 393

6 Topic Motion
6.13.1. The Friction Compensation type

6.13 Type Friction Compensation

6.13.1. The Friction Compensation type

Overview
This section describes the type Friction Compensation, which belongs to the topic Motion.
Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
CFRIC_BLOCK

Type description
Each set of parameters of the type Friction Compensation belongs to a joint (robot joint or
external axis).
The parameters in Friction Compensation define what compensations should be made for the
friction in the joint.

Limitation
Changing the parameter values in Friction Compensation is only useful if you have the
RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.
The type Friction Compensation equivalent to the type Control Parameters. The type Control
Parameters is used by robot models IRB 1400 and IRB 1410, all other robot models use the
type Friction Compensation. The parameters are the same however.

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance, chapter Advanced Shape Tuning.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

394 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.13.2. Name

6.13.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Friction Compensation, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the friction compensation.

Limitations
Name is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 395

6 Topic Motion
6.13.3. Friction FFW On

6.13.3. Friction FFW On

Parent
Friction FFW On belongs to the type Friction Compensation, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
friction_ffw_on

Description
Friction FFW On determines if the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning is active or
not.

Usage
Set Friction FFW On to TRUE if you want to use Advanced Shape Tuning.

Limitations
Friction FFW On is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.

Allowed values
TRUE or FALSE.

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

396 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.13.4. Friction FFW Level

6.13.4. Friction FFW Level

Parent
Friction FFW Level belongs to the type Friction Compensation , in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
friction_ffw_level

Description
Friction FFW Level is set to the level of friction in the robot axis. By setting a value that
closely corresponds to the real friction, and using the RobotWare option Advanced Shape
Tuning, the friction effects can be compensated.

Usage
Friction effects can cause path deviations when performing advanced shapes. By
compensating for the friction with the correct friction level value, these effects can be
minimized.
Permanent adjustments to the friction level can be made with Friction FFW Level. The
friction level can also be temporarily tuned with RAPID commands. For more information,
see Application manual - Motion performance.

Limitations
Friction FFW Level is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape Tuning.

Allowed values
A decimal number between 0 and 15 (in Nm).

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 397

6 Topic Motion
6.13.5. Friction FFW Ramp

6.13.5. Friction FFW Ramp

Parent
Friction FFW Ramp belongs to the type Friction Compensation, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
friction_ffw_ramp

Description
Friction FFW Ramp is set to the speed of the robot axis when the friction has reached the
constant friction level defined in Friction ffw level. See illustration below.

Usage
Friction effects can cause path deviations when performing advanced shapes. Friction FFW
Ramp is used when compensating for these friction effects.
Permanent adjustments to the friction ramp can be made with Friction FFW Ramp. The
friction ramp can also be temporarily tuned with RAPID commands. For more information,
see Application manual - Motion performance.

Limitations
Friction FFW Ramp is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Advanced Shape
Tuning.

Allowed values
A number between 0.001 and 10 (in radians/second).

Related information
Application manual - Motion performance.

Illustration

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

en0300000278

398 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.14.1. The Jog Parameters type

6.14 Type Jog Parameters

6.14.1. The Jog Parameters type

Overview
This section describes the type Jog Parameters, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic.

Cfg name
JOG_PARAMETERS

Type description
The Jog Parameters type contains parameters that define the step size in the different jogging
modes when using incremental jogging with user-defined step.

Incremental movement
Incremental movement is used to adjust the position of the robot exactly. Each time the
joystick is moved, the robot moves one step (one increment).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 399

6 Topic Motion
6.14.2. Name

6.14.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Jog Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Name

Description
Name defines the name of the Jog parameters data.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

400 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.14.3. Configurable Linear Step Size

6.14.3. Configurable Linear Step Size

Parent
Configurable Linear Step Size belongs to the type Jog Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
linear_step_size

Description
Configurable Linear Step Size defines the step size for user-defined incremental linear
jogging.

Usage
Linear jogging step size is set in meters.

Allowed values
0 - 0.005 meters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 401

6 Topic Motion
6.14.4. Configurable Reorient Step Size

6.14.4. Configurable Reorient Step Size

Parent
Configurable Reorient Step Size belongs to the type Jog Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
reorient_step_size

Description
Configurable Reorient Step Size defines the step size for user-defined incremental reorient
jogging.

Usage
Reorient jogging step size is set in radians.
Convert degrees to radians: radians = (degrees/360)*(2*pi)

Allowed values
0 - 0.009 radians.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

402 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.14.5. Configurable Joint Step Size

6.14.5. Configurable Joint Step Size

Parent
Configurable Joint Step Size belongs to the type Jog Parameters, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
joint_step_size

Description
Configurable Joint Step Size defines the step size for user-defined incremental axes jogging.

Usage
Axes jogging step size is set in radians.
Convert degrees to radians: radians = (degrees/360)*(2*pi)

Allowed values
0 - 0.0025 radians.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 403

6 Topic Motion
6.15.1. The Joint type

6.15 Type Joint

6.15.1. The Joint type

Overview
This section describes the type Joint which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter is
described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
JOINT

Type description
The Joint type contains parameters that define a joint.

Related information
The Arm type on page 312.
The Measurement Channel type on page 448.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

404 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.15.2. Name

6.15.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Joint, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the unique name to use for this joint.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 405

6 Topic Motion
6.15.3. Logical Axis

6.15.3. Logical Axis

Parent
Logical Axis belongs to the type Joint, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
logical_axis

Description
Logical Axis defines the axis number as seen by a RAPID program.

Usage
The value of Logical Axis is used by RAPID programs to identify individual axes in
mechanical units.
Two mechanical units can have the same value set for Logical Axis, but then they cannot be
activated at the same time by a RAPID program.
Robots from ABB normally use the values 1-6, while additional axes use 7-12.

Allowed values
A value between 1 and 12.

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

406 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.15.4. Use Process

6.15.4. Use Process

Parent
Use Process belongs to the type Joint, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_process

Description
Use Process defines which process to use for this joint.

Usage
Use Process points to a process id defined by the parameter Name in the type Process.
The process can be used to define the joints behavior for either Electronically Linked Motors
or Spot Servo.

Prerequisites
The additional axes must be configured before setting Use Process.

Limitations
Use Process is only used for additional axes.
Use Process is only useful if you have either of the RobotWare options Electronically Linked
Motors or Spot Servo.

Allowed values
A string.

Related information
Name on page 526.
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 407

6 Topic Motion
6.15.5. Lock Joint in Ipol

6.15.5. Lock Joint in Ipol

Parent
Lock Joint in Ipol belongs to the type Joint, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
lock_joint_in_ipol

Description
A flag that locks the axis so it is not used in the path interpolation.

Usage
When setting Lock Joint in Ipol to TRUE, this axis will not be used for path interpolation.
When using Electronically Linked Motors, this parameter must be set to TRUE for the
follower axis.

Prerequisites
The additional axes must be configured before setting Lock Joint in Ipol.

Limitations
Lock Joint in Ipol is only used for additional axes.

Allowed values
TRUE or FALSE.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

408 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.15.6. Follower to Joint

6.15.6. Follower to Joint

Parent
Follower to Joint belongs to the type Joint, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
follower_to_joint

Description
When using Electronically Linked Motors, Follower to Joint defines which master axis this
axis should follow.

Usage
When using Electronically Linked Motors, the follower axis has the Follower to Joint set to
the name of the master axis.

Prerequisites
The additional axes must be configured before setting Follower to Joint.

Limitations
Follower to Joint is only used for external axes.
Follower to Joint is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Allowed values
A string.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 409

6 Topic Motion
6.16.1. The Lag Control Master 0 type

6.16 Type Lag Control Master 0

6.16.1. The Lag Control Master 0 type

Overview
This section describes the type Lag Control Master 0, which belongs to the topic Motion.
Each parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
LCM0

Type description
The type Lag Control Master 0 is normally used for control of axes without any dynamic
model. This is the case for some additional axes.
For axes that have a dynamic model, Lag Control Master 0 is only used in exceptional cases.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

410 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.2. Name

6.16.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Lag Control Master 0.

Usage
Name is used to reference a Lag Control Master 0 from the parameter Normal Control Master
in the type Joint.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 411

6 Topic Motion
6.16.3. Kp, Gain Position Loop

6.16.3. Kp, Gain Position Loop

Parent
Kp, Gain Position Loop belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kp

Description
Proportional gain in the position control loop.

Usage
The higher the value of Kp, Gain Position Loop, the better tracking and disturbance rejection.
If the position control overshoots, decrease Kp, Gain Position Loop.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1000 (1/s).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

412 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.4. Kv, Gain Speed Loop

6.16.4. Kv, Gain Speed Loop

Parent
Kv, Gain Speed Loop belongs to the type Lag Control Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv

Description
Proportional gain in the speed regulation loop.

Usage
The higher the value of Kv, Gain Speed Loop, the better tracking and disturbance rejection.
If the level of oscillation or noise is too high, decrease Kv, Gain Speed Loop.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100 (Nms/rad).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 413

6 Topic Motion
6.16.5. Ti Integration Time Speed Loop

6.16.5. Ti Integration Time Speed Loop

Parent
Ti Integration Time Speed Loop belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Ti

Description
Integration time in the speed regulation loop.

Usage
The lower the value of Ti Integration Time Speed Loop, the better tracking and disturbance
rejection.
If the level of oscillation or noise is too high, increase Ti Integration Time Speed Loop.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 10 (seconds).
The default value is 10 seconds.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

414 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.6. Forced Control Active

6.16.6. Forced Control Active

Parent
Forced Control Active belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_inpos_forced_control

Description
Determines whether forced control is active for this joint.

Usage
Forced Control can be used if the last part of the movement before a fine point is to slow. The
function changes the parameters Forced Factor for Kp and Forced Factor for Ki in the last
part of the movement.
Note! Wrongly used Forced Control (too high force factors) might impair the movement with
oscillations.
If Forced Control Active is set to True, Affects forced ctrl in type Supervision should normally
also be set to True for this joint.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Forced Factor for Kp on page 416.
Forced Factor for Ki on page 417.
Affects Forced Control on page 606, in the type Supervision.
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 415

6 Topic Motion
6.16.7. Forced Factor for Kp

6.16.7. Forced Factor for Kp

Parent
Forced Factor for Kp belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kp_forced_factor

Description
The forced factor for Kp, if forced gain control is active.

Usage
Forced Factor for Kp defines the gain increase factor.
A typical value is 2.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 4.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

416 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.8. Forced Factor for Ki

6.16.8. Forced Factor for Ki

Parent
Forced Factor for Ki belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Ki_forced_factor

Description
The forced factor for Ki, if forced gain control is active.

Usage
Forced Factor for Ki defines the gain increase factor.
Ki equals Kv/Ti, integral gain.
A typical value is 2.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 4.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 417

6 Topic Motion
6.16.9. Raise Time for Kp

6.16.9. Raise Time for Kp

Parent
Raise Time for Kp belongs to the type Lag Control Master, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kp_raise_time

Description
Defines the raise time for forced Kp.

Usage
To avoid transient effects, Kp must be increased slowly over a period of time. This period is
defined by Raise Time for Kp.
A typical value is 0.2.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0.002 and 0.5 seconds.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

418 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.10. Notch Filter Active

6.16.10. Notch Filter Active

Parent
Notch Filter Active belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_filter_active

Description
Defines if the notch filter is activated or not.

Usage
Notch filters are only used in certain arc welding applications.
Notch Filter Active can be used to avoid interference between the additional axis and the
weaving frequency that can cause vibrations in the additional axis.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 419

6 Topic Motion
6.16.11. Notch Filter Frequency

6.16.11. Notch Filter Frequency

Parent
Notch Filter Frequency belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_filter_frequency

Description
Defines the frequency of speed variation for the notch filter.

Usage
Notch Filter Frequency is used when Notch Auto Mode is set to False. Note! It is always
recommended to use Notch Auto Mode (set to True) if the notch function is needed.
A typical value is 2 * Weld speed/Weave length.

Limitations
This parameter is only used when Notch Auto Mode is set to False.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 100 (Hz).

Related information
Notch Auto Mode on page 422.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

420 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.12. Notch Filter Width

6.16.12. Notch Filter Width

Parent
Notch Filter Width belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_filter_width

Description
Defines the width of the notch filter.

Usage
A higher value increases the width but can also have a negative effect on the performance
(response) of the additional axis. Recommended value is 0.2.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0.01 and 0.4.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 421

6 Topic Motion
6.16.13. Notch Auto Mode

6.16.13. Notch Auto Mode

Parent
Notch Auto Mode belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_auto_mode

Description
Defines if the notch filter frequency will adjust automatically to the weave frequency.

Usage
If Notch Auto Mode is set to True, the notch filter frequency will automatically adjust to the
weave frequency according to the formula: Notch Filter Frequency = 2 * Weld speed/Weave
length.
It is recommended to always set Notch Auto Mode to True if a notch filter function is needed.

Allowed values
True or False.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

422 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.14. Auto No Weave Frequency

6.16.14. Auto No Weave Frequency

Parent
Auto No Weave Frequency belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_auto_no_weave_freq

Description
Defines the default frequency for the auto mode notch filter.

Usage
The default value should only be changed by advanced programmers.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 100 Hz.

Related information
Notch Auto Mode on page 422.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 423

6 Topic Motion
6.16.15. Auto Min Frequency

6.16.15. Auto Min Frequency

Parent
Auto Min Frequency belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_auto_min_frequency

Description
Minimum frequency for the on line notch filter.

Usage
Auto Min Frequency defines the minimum notch filter frequency when Notch Auto Mode is
set to True.
The default value should only be changed by advanced programmers.

Limitations
This parameter is only used when Notch Auto Mode is set to True.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 100 Hz.

Related information
Notch Auto Mode on page 422.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

424 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.16. Auto Max Relative Change

6.16.16. Auto Max Relative Change

Parent
Auto Max Relative Change belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
notch_auto_max_rel_change

Description
A factor that sets the maximum instant change in the notch filter when Notch Auto Mode is
set to True.

Usage
If the instant change of the notch filter should be limited to 10%, set Auto Max Relative
Change to 0.1.
The default value should only be changed by advanced programmers.

Limitations
This parameter is only used when Notch Auto Mode is set to True.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 10.

Related information
Notch Auto Mode on page 422.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 425

6 Topic Motion
6.16.17. FFW Mode

6.16.17. FFW Mode

Parent
FFW Mode belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ffw_mode

Description
FFW Mode defines the control type to use, i.e. if feed forward should be used.

Usage
To regulate the position, you can:
• use only the desired position as reference.
• in addition to the position, use feed forward of the current speed value.
• in addition to the position, use feed forward of the current speed and torque values.

Allowed values
FFW Mode can have the following values:

Value: Name: Description:

0 No The controller is driven by the position error (lag). Because a relatively
large lag is needed to move the axis, the position error can be large.
1 Spd The controller receives information about the desired speed of the axis.
As a result, the position lag is greatly reduced compared to the No
configuration. For this reason, Spd is the recommended configuration.
2 Trq The controller uses the desired speed and acceleration of the axis to
calculate the desired motor torque.
This requires knowledge of the mass moment of inertia of the axis,
which must be supplied by the user. For this reason this configuration
is more difficult to tune. It is only recommended for experienced users.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
The default value is 0. Recommended value is 1.

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.

426 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.18. Bandwidth

6.16.18. Bandwidth

Parent
Bandwidth belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
bandwidth

Description
Defines the controller bandwidth when FFW Mode is set to 1 or 2.

Usage
A high bandwidth value gives faster control but increases risk of vibrations and overshoot.
The default value is recommended, but can be reduced if undesired vibrations occur.

Allowed values
A value between 3 and 40. Default value is 25.

Related information
FFW Mode on page 426.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 427

6 Topic Motion
6.16.19. Df

6.16.19. Df

Parent
Df belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
resonance_frequency

Description
Reduces oscillations.

Usage
Df can be used to damp oscillations of the axis due to mechanical resonance.
Initially Df should be left at its default value. It can be adjusted once the other controller
parameters have been fixed (Kv Gain Speed Loop, Kp Gain Position Speed Loop, Ti
Integration Time Speed Loop, and Inertia).
Df is only used when FFW Mode is set to 2.

Allowed values
A value between 2 and 100. Default value is 100.

Related information
FFW Mode on page 426.
Kp, Gain Position Loop on page 412.
Kv, Gain Speed Loop on page 413.
Ti Integration Time Speed Loop on page 414.
Inertia on page 431.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

428 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.20. Dw

6.16.20. Dw

Parent
Dw belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
resonance_damping

Description
Can reduce oscillations further when Df is set.

Usage
The default value of Dw is recommended.

Allowed values
A value between 0.002 to 1. Default value is 0.01.

Related information
Df on page 428.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 429

6 Topic Motion
6.16.21. Delay

6.16.21. Delay

Parent
Delay belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
delay_time

Description
Reduces overshoot.

Usage
Delay can be used when Df is set, to reduce overshoot but it impairs the axis coordination
when increased.
The default value of Delay should normally not be changed.

Allowed values
A value between 0.0 and 0.02. Default value is 0.004.

Related information
Df on page 428.
Dw on page 429.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

430 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.22. Inertia

6.16.22. Inertia

Parent
Inertia belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
inertia

Description
Defines the external axis’ inertia (if rotation) or mass (if translation).

Usage
Inertia is used for calculating the torque when FFW Mode is set to 2.

Allowed values
A value between 0.0 and 10,000.

Related information
FFW Mode on page 426.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 431

6 Topic Motion
6.16.23. K Soft Max Factor

6.16.23. K Soft Max Factor

Parent
K Soft Max Factor belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
soft_servo_K_max_factor

Description
Determines the value of the product Kp Gain Position Loop * Kv Gain Speed Loop when the
soft servo is used with softness 0%.

Usage
K Soft Max Factor should be in the range 0.1 - 2.0 (default 1.0). When the soft servo is
activated with 0% softness, the control parameters Kp Gain Position Loop (Kp) and Kv Gain
Speed Loop (Kv) will be tuned such that Kp*Kv = (Kp*Kv)normal*K Soft Max Factor, where
(Kp*Kv)normal is the product of Kp and Kv during normal operation.

Allowed values
A value between 0.1 and 2.0. Default value is 1.0.

Related information
Kp, Gain Position Loop on page 412.
Kv, Gain Speed Loop on page 413.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

432 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.24. K Soft Min Factor

6.16.24. K Soft Min Factor

Parent
K Soft Min Factor belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
soft_servo_K_min_factor

Description
Determines the value of the product Kp Gain Position Loop * Kv Gain Speed Loop if the soft
servo is used with softness 100%.

Usage
K Soft Min Factor should be in the range 0.001 - 0.1 (default 0.01). When the soft servo is
activated with 100% softness, the control parameters Kp Gain Position Loop (Kp) and Kv
Gain Speed Loop (Kv) are tuned such that Kp*Kv = (Kp*Kv)normal*K Soft Min Factor.

Allowed values
A value between 0.001 and 0.1. Default value is 0.01.

Related information
Kp, Gain Position Loop on page 412.
Kv, Gain Speed Loop on page 413.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 433

6 Topic Motion
6.16.25. Kp/Kv Ratio Factor

6.16.25. Kp/Kv Ratio Factor

Parent
Kp/Kv Ratio Factor belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
soft_servo_Kp_Kv_ratio_factor

Description
Defines the factor used to tune the Kp Gain Position Loop/Kv Gain Speed Loop ratio.

Usage
Kp/Kv Ratio Factor is used to alter the Kp Gain Position Loop/Kv Gain Speed Loop ratio
during soft servo. Kp/Kv Ratio Factor should be in the range 0.1 - 1.0 (default 1.0). In soft
servo mode, Kp and Kv are tuned such that Kp/Kv = (Kp/Kv)normal * Kp/Kv Ratio Factor.

Allowed values
A value between 0.1 and 1.0.

Related information
Kp, Gain Position Loop on page 412.
Kv, Gain Speed Loop on page 413.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

434 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.16.26. Ramp Time

6.16.26. Ramp Time

Parent
Ramp Time belongs to the type Lag Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
soft_servo_t_ramp

Description
Defines the default Soft Servo ramp time.

Usage
Ramp Time is used to define the default time for activation of the soft servo.

Allowed values
A value between 0.01 and 0.5. Default value is 0.05.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 435

6 Topic Motion
6.17.1. The Linked M Process type

6.17 Type Linked M Process

6.17.1. The Linked M Process type

Overview
This section describes the type Linked M Process, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
LINKED_M_PROCESS

Type description
A Linked M Process contains information about alignments between the master axis and the
follower axis for Electronically Linked Motors.

Limitations
Linked M Process is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control, chapter Electronically Linked Motors.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

436 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.17.2. Name

6.17.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the identity of the linked motor process.

Usage
The Name is used when referencing the linked motor process.
The linked motor process defines the behavior of a joint for Electronically Linked Motors.

Limitations
This parameter is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Allowed values
A string.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 437

6 Topic Motion
6.17.3. Offset Adjust Delay Time

6.17.3. Offset Adjust Delay Time

Parent
Offset Adjust Delay Time belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
offset_adj_delay_time

Description
Offset Adjust Delay Time defines the time delay from control on until the follower axis starts
to follow its master axis.

Usage
When using Electronically Linked Motors, you might want to give the master axis some time
to stabilize before the follower axis starts following.

Limitations
Offset Adjust Delay Time is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically
Linked Motors.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 2, specifying the delay in seconds.
Default value: 0.2

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

438 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.17.4. Max Follower Offset

6.17.4. Max Follower Offset

Parent
Max Follower Offset belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_offset

Description
Max Follower Offset defines the maximum allowed difference in position between the master
and the follower axis.

Usage
If the follower offset exceeds the Max Follower Offset, emergency stop is activated and
automatic offset adjustment is prohibited.

Limitations
Max Follower Offset is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5, specifying the maximum offset in radians (for rotational axes) or
meters (for linear axes) on the arm side.
Default value: 0.05.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 439

6 Topic Motion
6.17.5. Max Offset Speed

6.17.5. Max Offset Speed

Parent
Max Offset Speed belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_offset_speed

Description
Max Offset Speed defines the maximum allowed difference in speed between the master and
the follower axis.

Usage
If the speed difference exceeds the Max Offset Speed, emergency stop is activated and
automatic offset adjustment is prohibited.

Limitations
Max Offset Speedis only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1000, specifying the maximum difference in rad/s (for rotational axes)
or m/s (for linear axes) on the arm side.
Default value: 0.05.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

440 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.17.6. Offset Speed Ratio

6.17.6. Offset Speed Ratio

Parent
Offset Speed Ratio belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
offset_speed_ratio

Description
Offset Speed Ratio defines how large a part of the Max Offset Speed can be used to
compensate for position error.

Usage
Offset Speed Ratio multiplied by Max Offset Speed is the highest speed by which the position
offset is reduced.

Limitations
Offset Speed Ratiois only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1. The value has no unit since it is a multiplication factor.
Default value: 0.33.

Related information
Max Offset Speed on page 440.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 441

6 Topic Motion
6.17.7. Ramp Time

6.17.7. Ramp Time

Parent
Ramp Time belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ramp_time

Description
Ramp Time defines the acceleration up to Max Offset Speed.

Usage
The proportion constant for position regulation is ramped from zero up to its final value
(Master Follower kp) during Ramp Time.

Limitations
Ramp Timeis only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked Motors.

Allowed values
A value between 0.01 and 10, specifying the time in seconds.
Default value: 0.05

Related information
Master Follower kp on page 443.
Max Offset Speed on page 440.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

442 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.17.8. Master Follower kp

6.17.8. Master Follower kp

Parent
Master Follower kp belongs to the type Linked M Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
kp_offset

Description
Master Follower kp is the proportion constant for position regulation.

Usage
Master Follower kp determines how fast the position error is compensated. If the value is too
low, the compensation will be slow. If the value is to large, the compensation will be unstable.

Limitations
Master Follower kp is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically Linked
Motors.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5 (unit is 1/s).
Default value: 0.05.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 443

6 Topic Motion
6.18.1. The Mains type

6.18 Type Mains

6.18.1. The Mains type

Overview
This section describes the type Mains, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter of
the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MAINS

Type description
The type Mains defines the drive system's mains power tolerance. The parameters of the
Mains type have nominal values.
The parameters of the type Mains can be used to improve the robot's performance by
adjusting them according to the robot's actual installation.
CAUTION!
Parameter settings outside the range of the robot's installation may negatively affect the
robot's performance.

Related information
How to optimize drive system parameters on page 300.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

444 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.18.2. Name

6.18.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Mains, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name specifies the name of the mains tolerance setting it belongs to.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters, specifying the name.

Related information
How to optimize drive system parameters on page 300.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 445

6 Topic Motion
6.18.3. Mains Tolerance Min

6.18.3. Mains Tolerance Min

Parent
Mains Tolerance Min belongs to the type Mains, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
u_tolerance_min

Description
Mains Tolerance Min specifies the minimum value of the mains tolerance as a percentage.
The value is set to -15% on delivery. If the minimum tolerance is less than 15%, the cycle
time can be improved by changing the parameter.

Allowed values
A value between -1 and +1 (equals -100% and 100%).
The default value is -0.15 (equals -15%).

Related information
How to optimize drive system parameters on page 300.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

446 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.18.4. Mains Tolerance Max

6.18.4. Mains Tolerance Max

Parent
Mains Tolerance Max belongs to the type Mains, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
u_tolerance_max

Description
Mains Tolerance Max specifies the maximum value of the mains tolerance. Its default value
is 0.1 (10%). This value should not be increased since the equipment is rated for this
maximum mains tolerance and might be damaged if the voltage is increased.

Limitations
This parameter should not be changed as that could cause damage to the equipment.

Allowed values
The default value is 0.1.

Related information
How to optimize drive system parameters on page 300.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 447

6 Topic Motion
6.19.1. The Measurement Channel type

6.19 Type Measurement Channel

6.19.1. The Measurement Channel type

Overview
This section describes the type Measurement Channel which belongs to the topic Motion.
Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MEASUREMENT_CHANNEL

Type description
The type Measurement Channel describes which channel is used to send measurement data
from the axis computer to the controller.

Non-editable parameters
The following parameters are visible but not editable in the software configuration tools:
• Max Normalized Input Level
• Min Normalized Input Level
As a consequence, the above parameters are not described in the manual.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

448 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.19.2. Name

6.19.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Measurement Channel, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the axis computer's channel name.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 449

6 Topic Motion
6.19.3. Use Measurement Board Type

6.19.3. Use Measurement Board Type

Parent
Use Measurement Board Type belongs to the type Measurement Channel, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_measurement_board_type

Description
Use Measurement Board Type defines which type of measurement board is used.

Usage
The type Measurement Board Type defines the measurement board data.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

450 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.19.4. Disconnect at Deactivate

6.19.4. Disconnect at Deactivate

Parent
Disconnect at Deactivate belongs to the type Measurement Channel, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
disconnect_at_deactivate

Description
Disconnect at Deactivate defines if the channel should be deactivated when the mechanical
unit is deactivated.

Usage
Set Disconnect at Deactivate to True to avoid error reports when the resolver is disconnected,
for instance when switching between tools.

Allowed values
True or False.
Default value is False.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 451

6 Topic Motion
6.19.5. Measurement Link

6.19.5. Measurement Link

Parent
Measurement Link belongs to the type Measurement Channel, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
measurement_link

Description
An axis resolver is connected to a Serial Measurement Board (SMB). The SMB
communicates with the axis computer via a serial measurement link.
Measurement Link defines the number of the measurement link.

Usage
There are two contacts on the axis computer marked Measurement link 1 and Measurement
link 2.
An ABB robot is normally connected to link 1.

Allowed values
1 or 2.
Default value is 1.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

452 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.19.6. Board Position

6.19.6. Board Position

Parent
Board Position belongs to the type Measurement Channel, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
board_position

Description
Board Position defines the position number of the board used for the measurement system.

Usage
The value of Board Position defines the physical position of the board on the measurement
link. Board position one is closest to the axis computer.

Allowed values
An integer value between 1 and 2.
Default value is 1.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 453

6 Topic Motion
6.20.1. The Mechanical Unit type

6.20 Type Mechanical Unit

6.20.1. The Mechanical Unit type

Overview
This section describes the type Mechanical Unit which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MECHANICAL_UNIT

Type description
The Mechanical Unit type describes the common parameters for a mechanical unit. There is
one set of parameters for each mechanical unit.
This type is only possible to edit for additional axes, not for robots delivered from ABB.

Non-editable parameters
The following parameter is visible but not editable in the software configuration tools:
• Use Run Enable
As a consequence, the above parameter is not described in the manual.

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

454 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.20.2. Name

6.20.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name for the mechanical unit.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 455

6 Topic Motion
6.20.3. Use Activation Relay

6.20.3. Use Activation Relay

Parent
Use Activation Relay belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_activation_relay

Description
Use Activation Relay defines the Id name for the activation relay.

Usage
Use Activation Relay points out a relay that will be activated or deactivated when the
mechanical unit is activated or deactivated.
More information can be found in Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions,
Functions and Data types under the instructions ActUnit/DeactUnit.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

456 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.20.4. Use Brake Relay

6.20.4. Use Brake Relay

Parent
Use Brake Relay belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_brake_relay

Description
Use Brake Relay defines the Id name for the brake relay.

Usage
Use Brake Relay points out what brake relay will be activated or deactivated when the
mechanical unit goes to state control on or control off.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 457

6 Topic Motion
6.20.5. Use Connection Relay

6.20.5. Use Connection Relay

Parent
Use Connection Relay belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_connection_relay

Description
Use Connection Relay defines the Id name for the connection relay.

Usage
Use Connection Relay points out a relay that must be activated when the mechanical unit is
activated.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

458 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.20.6. Use Robot

6.20.6. Use Robot

Parent
Use Robot belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_robot

Description
Use Robot defines which robot is part of the mechanical unit.

Usage
The robot is defined in the type Robot.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Name on page 533, of the type Robot.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 459

6 Topic Motion
6.20.7. Use Single 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

6.20.7. Use Single 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Parent
Use Single 1, Use Single 2, Use Single 3, Use Single 4, Use Single 5, and Use Single 6 belongs
to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
use_single_0
use_single_1
use_single_2
use_single_3
use_single_4
use_single_5

Description
Use Single defines which singles are part of the mechanical unit.

Usage
The mechanical unit can have six singles, Use Single 1, Use Single 2, Use Single 3, Use Single
4, Use Single 5, and Use Single 6. The singles are defined in the type Single.

Allowed values
Each single value is a string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
Name on page 575, in the type Single.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

460 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.20.8. Allow Move of User Frame

6.20.8. Allow Move of User Frame

Parent
Allow Move of User Frame belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
allow_move_of_user_frame

Description
Allow Move of User Frame defines if a robot or single is allowed to move a user frame.

Usage
A user frame can be moved by a robot or a single that is part of the mechanical unit. Set Allow
Move of User Frame to True to allow a robot or single to move a user frame.
Note that the definition of the work object must allow it to be moved, see wobjdata
(ufprog and ufmec) in Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and
Data types.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 461

6 Topic Motion
6.20.9. Activate at Startup

6.20.9. Activate at Startup

Parent
Activate at Startup belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
activate_at_start_up

Description
Activate at Startup defines if the mechanical unit should be activated at start-up.

Usage
Set the value to True to activate the mechanical unit at startup.

Allowed values
True or False.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

462 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.20.10. Deactivation Forbidden

6.20.10. Deactivation Forbidden

Parent
Deactivation Forbidden belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
deactivation_forbidden

Description
Deactivation Forbidden defines if the mechanical unit is allowed to be deactivated.

Usage
Set Deactivation Forbidden to False if the mechanical unit should be allowed to be
deactivated.
Robots from ABB always has the value set to True. They should not be deactivated. The value
False is only used for additional axes that should be possible to deactivate.

Allowed values
True or False.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 463

6 Topic Motion
6.20.11. Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect

6.20.11. Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect

Parent
Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
deactivate_ptc_at_disconnect

Description
When set to Yes, the PTC supervision is disabled when the mechanical unit is disconnected
and enabled again when it is activated.

Usage
The PTC supervision is used to detect high motor temperatures for mechanical units. If a unit
is physically disconnected while the PTC supervision is active, an error will occur.
When using Servo Tool Change, it must be possible to disconnect the servo tool. By setting
Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect to Yes, the servo tool can be deactivated and removed
without an error. When the new tool is connected and activated, PTC supervision is activated
again.

Prerequisites
Setting Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect to Yes is only useful if an additional axis is
disconnected without turning off the robot system. This can only be done if you have the
options Servo Tool Control and Servo Tool Change.

Limitations
If Deactivate PTC superv. at disconnect is set to Yes and the mechanical unit is deactivated,
the PTC supervision is disabled for all additional axes in the system (but not for the robot).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

464 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.20.12. Activate from any motion task

6.20.12. Activate from any motion task

Parent
Activate from any motion task belongs to the type Mechanical Unit, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
allow_activation_from_any_motion_task

Description
If Activate from any motion task is set to Yes, the mechanical unit can be deactivated by one
task and then activated by another motion task. The mechanical unit is then controlled by the
task that has activated it.

Usage
If Activate from any motion task is set to Yes, a mechanical unit, for example a servo gun, can
be used by two different robots in a MultiMove system.

Example
A servo gun is held by robot 1 and controlled by the task T_ROB1. It is deactivated and
disconnected from robot 1. The servo gun is then connected to robot 2 and activated by the
task T_ROB2.

Limitations
The parameter Deactivation Forbidden must be set to No for this mechanical unit. Activate
from any motion task can only be used for a mechanical unit that can be deactivated, i.e. not
for a robot.
Activate from any motion task is only useful for a MultiMove system.
The mechanical unit must still belong to a mechanical unit group, see Type Mechanical Unit
Group on page 81. This configuration determines which task that will control the mechanical
unit at start up.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Default value
The default value is No.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Additional information
If the program pointer is moved to main, the mechanical unit regains its configuration from
the system parameters, i.e. it is activated by its original task. Make sure the program is not
restarted from main with the mechanical unit mounted on another robot than configured in
the system parameters.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 465

6 Topic Motion
6.21.1. The Motion Planner type

6.21 Type Motion Planner

6.21.1. The Motion Planner type

Overview
This section describes the type Motion Planner, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.
NOTE!
When several task programs are run in synchronized mode, the movements of all their
mechanical unit groups are calculated by the same motion planner. It is then the first set of
parameters of the type Motion Planner that is used.

Cfg name
MOTION_PLANNER

Type description
A motion planner is a process on the controller that calculates how mechanical units shall
move. A controller that handles more than one robot also has more than one motion planner.
Each mechanical unit group has its own motion planner.

Limitations
Unless the option MultiMove is installed, there can only be one motion planner configuration.

Related information
Application manual - MultiMove.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

466 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.2. Name

6.21.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the motion planner.

Usage
This is the public identity of the motion planner. It is used by the parameter Use Motion
Planner in the type Mechanical Unit Group.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters. The name must not be changed!

Related information
The Mechanical Unit Group type on page 81 in the topic Controller.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 467

6 Topic Motion
6.21.3. Brake on Time

6.21.3. Brake on Time

Parent
Brake on Time belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
brake_on_timeout

Description
Brake on Time is used to delay the use of brakes when the robot is waiting to move. It defines
the time from when the robot stops to when the mechanical brakes are activated.
NOTE!
The brake on time value should be kept high to maintain the reliability of the servo at high
level.

Allowed values
A value between 0.3 to 3,600,000, specifying the time in seconds.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

468 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.4. Dynamic Resolution

6.21.4. Dynamic Resolution

Parent
Dynamic Resolution belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
dynamic_resolution

Limitation
Dynamic Resolution is optimized for the system at delivery. It should normally not be
changed.

Allowed values
A predefined value, specified in seconds.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 469

6 Topic Motion
6.21.5. Path Resolution

6.21.5. Path Resolution

Parent
Path Resolution belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
path_resolution

Description
The parameter corresponds in some sense to the distance between two points in the path.
Increasing path resolution means increasing the distance, which leads to a decrease in the
resolution of the path!
Increasing path resolution is a way to deal with robot installations that have external axes with
long deceleration times due to high CPU load. In such applications the warning "50082
Deceleration limit" can be reported, simultaneously generating a quick-stop. Increasing the
path resolution solves the problem.

Prerequisites
It is important to set the path resolution value as low as possible in order to achieve a high
path resolution at high speed. Keeping the path resolution low can also give shorter cycle
times if the cycle contains many stop points and the move instructions following these stop
points have low speeds.

Usage
Path Resolution might require tuning when:
• The acceleration value of an external axis (and the robot) is decreased using the first
parameter of the RAPID instruction AccSet.
• The acceleration derivative is decreased using the second parameter of the RAPID
instruction AccSet.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

• The speed is increased.
• The distances between closely programmed positions are decreased.
• The number of simultaneously controlled axes are increased.
• Using coordinated interpolation.
• Using Weldguide.
• Using the option Conveyor Tracking.
• Using RAPID controlled path correction.
• Using multitasking with computationally demanding RAPID programs.
• Reorienting with a small or no TCP movement.

Allowed values
A value between 0.1667 to 6.00, specifying the resolution in seconds.

Additional information
There is also a RAPID instruction named PathResol which affects the resolution of the path.

Continues on next page

470 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 6 Topic Motion
6.21.5. Path Resolution

Continued

Related information
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 471

6 Topic Motion
6.21.6. Queue Time

6.21.6. Queue Time

Parent
Queue Time belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
std_servo_queue_time

Description
Increasing Queue Time makes the system more tolerant to uneven CPU loads.
NOTE!
The real queue time is a multiple of a sample time related to dynamic resolution. If the
parameter value is not an even multiple of the dynamic resolution, the controller will
automatically use a queue time as close as possible to the given value.

Allowed values
A value between 0.004032 to 0.290304, specifying the time in seconds.

Additional information
A drawback with increasing the queue time is that the robot reacts more slowly when jogging
and when stopping a program execution. However, the emergency brake is not affected. The
accuracy of a sensor process, e.g. WeldGuide and Conveyor tracking, may also be affected.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

472 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.7. Teach Mode Max Speed

6.21.7. Teach Mode Max Speed

Parent
Teach Mode Max Speed belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
teach_mode_max_speed

Description
Teach Mode Max Speed can be used to set the maximum speed in manual mode to less than
the default value 0.25 m/s.

Allowed values
A value between 0.010 to 0.250, specifying the speed in meter per seconds.
The default value is 0.25 m/s.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 473

6 Topic Motion
6.21.8. Process Update Time

6.21.8. Process Update Time

Parent
Process Update Time belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
process_linearization_time

Description
Process Update Time determines how often the process path information is calculated. This
information is used for path following in Conveyor tracking, WeldGuide and Rapid Weave,
for example.

Usage
Decreasing the process update time improves accuracy but also increases CPU load.
Increasing the parameter decreases the CPU load.

Limitations
When running programs in which the manipulator is moving at high speed, the parameter
value should be kept small in order to get the best performance. When the manipulator is
moving slowly, the process update time is not critical.

Allowed values
A value between 0.012096 to 1.93536, specifying the time in seconds.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

474 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.9. Prefetch Time

6.21.9. Prefetch Time

Parent
Prefetch Time belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ipol_prefetch_time

Description
Prefetch Time affects the point in time at which the controller starts to plan for the motion
through a corner zone. If the planning time is too short, the corner zone becomes a fine point.
This generates a warning called“ 50024 Corner path failure”.

Usage
If the planning time is too short because of high CPU load, increasing the parameter value
may solve the problem. However, it will not solve the problem when it is caused by too many
corner zones placed very close together or by incorrect use of instructions, e.g. a corner zone
followed by a WaitDI instruction. Normally, Prefetch Time should only be increased when
the corner zone is really needed in the application. When it is not really needed, change the
corner zone to a fine point.

Limitations
There is a drawback when increasing the parameter. The difference between the position of
the executed RAPID instruction and the current position of the manipulator will increase.
This means that after pressing stop during program execution, the program counter on the
teach pendant unit may show an instruction that has not yet affected the manipulator. When
starting again, the manipulator continues along the original path.

Allowed values
A value between 0 to 10, specifying the time in seconds.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 475

6 Topic Motion
6.21.10. Event Preset Time

6.21.10. Event Preset Time

Parent
Event Preset Time belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
event_preset_time

Description
Event Preset Time is used to delay the robot to make it possible to activate/control external
equipment in advance. This is to compensate for the internal delay of the equipment.

Usage
Adjustment for the internal delay of the equipment can be made with the instruction
TriggEquip. This takes advantage of the delay between the RAPID commands and the robot
movement. In this way an output signal can be set up to about 70 ms in advance. If the delay
of the equipment is longer than 70 ms, then Event Preset Time must be used to increase the
delay of the robot movement.
Configure Event Preset Time to the longest equipment delay time needed (if more than 70
ms).

Limitations
Event Preset Time is only useful if you have the RobotWare option Fixed Position Events and
use the instruction TriggEquip.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 0.5, specifying the time in seconds.

Additional information
Remember that when using Event Preset Time, the start of the robot is delayed and the
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
performance of WeldGuide and conveyor will be decreased.

Related information
Application manual - Motion functions and events.

Example
If you use Fixed Position Event with the following RAPID instructions, you should configure
Event Preset Time to 0.2 seconds (the maximum delay required by TriggEquip)
TriggEquip gunon, 10, 0.2 \DOp:=gun, 1;
TriggL p1, v500, gunon, z50, gun1;

476 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.11. CPU Load Equalization

6.21.11. CPU Load Equalization

Parent
CPU Load Equalization belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
cpu_load_equalization

Description
CPU Load Equalization affects the CPU load in terms of peak load versus average load.

Usage
When there is a CPU load problem, indicated for example by error message “50082
Deceleration limit”, one solution could be to use CPU Load Equalization to distribute the
CPU load over time in some other way. Sometimes a higher peak load can be acceptable, as
long as it occurs at a favorable moment in time. Try changing CPU equalization both upwards
and downwards to find the optimal value.

Allowed values
An integer value between 1 and 10.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 477

6 Topic Motion
6.21.12. Use Motion Supervision

6.21.12. Use Motion Supervision

Parent
Use Motion Supervision belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_motion_sup

Description
Use Motion Supervision defines which set of motion supervision parameters to be used for
this motion planner.

Usage
Motion supervision is used to activate, deactivate or adjust the collision detection
functionality. For detailed information about collision detection, see the Application manual
- Motion coordination and supervision, chapter Collision Detection.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Motion Supervision type on page 486.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

478 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.13. Motion Supervision Permanent Off

6.21.13. Motion Supervision Permanent Off

Parent
Motion Supervision Permanent Off belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
motion_sup_permanent_off

Description
Motion Supervision Permanent Off is used to turn off all motion supervision to save CPU
power.

Allowed values
YES
NO
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 479

6 Topic Motion
6.21.14. Motion Supervision Max Level

6.21.14. Motion Supervision Max Level

Parent
Motion Supervision Max Level belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
motion_sup_max_level

Description
The maximum allowed supervision level, both for program execution and jogging.

Usage
Motion Supervision Max Level stops the operator from tuning the supervision level to values
that are too high.
The supervision level for program execution is a combination of the parameter Path Collision
Detection Level and a tuning value set with the RAPID instruction MotionSup. Motion
Supervision Max Level is a maximum limit for this combined value.

Limitations
Changing this parameter only affects the system if the option Collision Detection is installed.

Allowed values
An integer in the interval 10 to 500 (percent).
The default value is 300.

Related information
Path Collision Detection Level on page 490.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

Example
Motion Supervision Max Level is set to 300. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Path Collision Detection Level is set to 250.

A RAPID program uses the instruction MotionSup to tune the supervision level with 200%.
Normally this would lead to a supervision level of 500% (2.5 * 2 = 5), but since Motion
Supervision Max Level is 300, the supervision level will not exceed 300%.

480 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.15. Remove Corner Path Warning

6.21.15. Remove Corner Path Warning

Parent
Remove Corner Path Warning belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
remove_corner_path_warning

Description
Remove Corner Path Warning is used to disable the corner path failure warnings. Corner
warnings will still be executed as fine points but the warning will not be shown in the event
log.

Usage
The warning "50024 Corner Path Failure" occurs when RAPID program execution does not
provide a new Move instruction while the robot is entering a corner zone. This may be due to
a programming oversight or an explicit desire of the programmer.

Allowed values
YES
NO
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 481

6 Topic Motion
6.21.16. Time Event Supervision

6.21.16. Time Event Supervision

Parent
Time Event Supervision belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
require_event_accuracy

Description
Time Event Supervision is used to detect if a programmed event can be accurately positioned
or not. If not, the system will stop and display a warning.

Usage
If the event cannot be accurately positioned, suggested program modifications are to either
lower the programmed speed or to increase the distance between the start of the segment and
the desired event position.

Allowed values
YES or NO

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

482 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.17. High Interpolation Priority

6.21.17. High Interpolation Priority

Parent
High Interpolation Priority belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
high_interpolation_priority

Description
High Interpolation Priority is used to allow the system to temporarily increase the priority of
the path planning in critical situations.

Usage
When the warning "50082 Deceleration limit" occurs at installations, this parameter can be
useful. The parameters Path Resolution and CPU Load Equalization might also be useful in
this situation.
NOTE!
Using High Interpolation Priority might affect the performance of the application, e.g. spot
welding or sealing. Thus it is very important to verify the process performance after the
parameter has been set.

Allowed values
ON or OFF.

Related information
Path Resolution on page 470.
CPU Load Equalization on page 477.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 483

6 Topic Motion
6.21.18. Speed Control Warning

6.21.18. Speed Control Warning

Parent
Speed Control Warning belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_control_warning

Description
By setting Speed Control Warning to Yes, a warning will be given when the robot moves
slower than the programmed speed.

Usage
When several robots (and other mechanical units) are in synchronized movement mode, in a
MultiMove application, all simultaneous move instruction finish at the same time. This
means that if one robot has a longer path or a slower programmed speed than another robot,
the speed of the second robot is decreased.
If a robot is working with an application where the speed is important (e.g. arc welding or
gluing), Speed Control Warning can be used to give a warning when the actual speed is slower
than the programmed speed.

Limitations
This parameter is only useful when using the RobotWare option MultiMove.
The speed is only supervised for robot TCP speed. No warning is given for the speed of
additional axes.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Additional information
When several tasks are in synchronized movement mode, all these tasks are planned by the © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
same Motion Planner (the first Motion Planner of those involved in the synchronization). If
this Motion Planner has Speed Control Warning set to Yes, all the synchronized robot speeds
are supervised. If it has Speed Control Warning set to No, no robot speeds are supervised.

484 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.21.19. Speed Control Percent

6.21.19. Speed Control Percent

Parent
Speed Control Percent belongs to the type Motion Planner, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_control_percent

Description
If Speed Control Warning is set to Yes, a warning will be issued when the actual speed is
slower than this percentage of the programmed speed.

Usage
If a robot is working with an application where the speed is important (e.g. arc welding or
gluing), Speed Control Percent defines the slowest speed (in percent of programmed speed)
that is acceptable.

Limitations
This parameter is only useful when using the RobotWare option MultiMove.
The speed is only supervised for robot TCP speed. No warning is given for the speed of
additional axes.

Allowed values
A number between 0 and 100 (in percent of programmed speed).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 485

6 Topic Motion
6.22.1. The Motion Supervision type

6.22 Type Motion Supervision

6.22.1. The Motion Supervision type

Overview
This section describes the type Motion Supervision, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MOTION_SUP

Type description
Motion supervision is used to activate, deactivate or adjust the collision detection
functionality. For detailed information about collision detection, see the Application manual
- Motion coordination and supervision, chapter Collision Detection.

No controller restart required

Most of the motion supervision parameters do not require a restart of the controller when
modified.

Limitations
The type Motion supervision is mainly used to configure the installed option Collision
detection. For a system without this option, changing the values for most of the parameters
does not affect the system.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

486 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.22.2. Name

6.22.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Motion Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the motion supervision setup.

Limitation
This parameter cannot be changed.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 487

6 Topic Motion
6.22.3. Path Collision Detection

6.22.3. Path Collision Detection

Parent
Path Collision Detection belongs to the type Motion Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
path_col_detect_on

Description
Path Collision Detection turns the collision detection on or off for program execution.

Usage
Setting Path Collision Detection to YES turns on the collision detection, NO turns off the
collision detection.

Allowed values
YES or NO.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

488 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.22.4. Jog Collision Detection

6.22.4. Jog Collision Detection

Parent
Jog Collision Detection belongs to the type Motion Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
jog_col_detect_on

Description
Jog collision Detection turns the collision detection on or off for jogging.

Limitation
Changing this parameter only affects the system if the option Collision detection is installed.

Allowed values
YES or NO.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 489

6 Topic Motion
6.22.5. Path Collision Detection Level

6.22.5. Path Collision Detection Level

Parent
Path Collision Detection Level belongs to the type Motion Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
path_col_detect_level

Description
Path Collision Detection Level modifies the supervision level for the collision detection for
program execution by a specified percentage value.

Usage
The supervision level for collision detection in program execution is specified as a
percentage. A large value makes the function less sensitive. The default value is 100%. For
detailed information, see the Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

Limitation
Changing this parameter only affects the system if the option Collision detection is installed.

Allowed values
A value in the interval 1 to 300, specifying the supervision level in %.
The default value is 100%.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

490 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.22.6. Jog Collision Detection Level

6.22.6. Jog Collision Detection Level

Parent
Jog Collision Detection Level belongs to the type Motion Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
jog_col_detect_level

Description
Jog Collision Detection Level modifies the supervision level for the collision detection for
jogging by a specified percentage value.

Usage
The supervision level for collision detection in jogging is specified as a percentage, where a
large value makes the function less sensitive. The default value is 100%. For detailed
information, see the Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

Limitations
Changing this parameter only affects the system if the option Collision detection is installed.

Allowed values
A value in the interval 1 to 300, specifying the supervision level in %.
The default level is 100%.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 491

6 Topic Motion
6.22.7. Collision Detection Memory

6.22.7. Collision Detection Memory

Parent
Collision Detection Memory belongs to the type Motion Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
collision_detection_memory

Description
Collision Detection Memory defines how much the robot moves back on the path after a
collision.
The parameter requires a restart of the controller when modified.

Usage
The robot movement back on the path after a collision is specified in seconds. If the robot was
moving quickly before the collision, it will move further back than if the speed was lower.
For detailed information, see the Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

Allowed values
A value in the interval 0.025 to 0.5, specifying the movement in seconds.

Related information
How to tune motion supervision on page 301.
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

492 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.23.1. The Motion System type

6.23 Type Motion System

6.23.1. The Motion System type

Overview
This section describes the type Motion System, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MOTION_SYSTEM

Type description
Motion System includes parameters that are common for the entire system.

Non-editable parameters
The following parameter is visible but not editable in the software configuration tools:
• Sensor Memory Mode
As a consequence, the above parameter is not described in the manual.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 493

6 Topic Motion
6.23.2. Name

6.23.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Motion System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name specifies the name of the Motion System type.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

494 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.23.3. Min Temperature Cabinet

6.23.3. Min Temperature Cabinet

Parent
Min Temperature Cabinet belongs to the type Motion System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
min_temp_ambient_cabinet

Description
Min Temperature Cabinet defines the minimum ambient temperature where the cabinet is
situated.

Allowed values
A value between -100 to 100 C, specifying the temperature in degrees Celsius.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 495

6 Topic Motion
6.23.4. Max Temperature Cabinet

6.23.4. Max Temperature Cabinet

Parent
Max Temperature Cabinet belongs to the type Motion System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_temp_ambient_cabinet

Description
Max Temperature Cabinet defines the maximum ambient temperature where the cabinet is
situated.

Allowed values
A value between -100 to 100 C, specifying the temperature in degrees Celsius.

Additional information
This parameter does not have to be changed if the controller is equipped with an extra fan for
the cabinet.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

496 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.23.5. Min Temperature Robot

6.23.5. Min Temperature Robot

Parent
Min Temperature Robot belongs to the type Motion System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
min_temp_ambient_robot

Description
Min Temperature Robot defines the minimum ambient temperature where the robot is
situated.

Allowed values
A value between -100 to 100 C, specifying the temperature in degrees Celsius.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 497

6 Topic Motion
6.23.6. Max Temperature Robot

6.23.6. Max Temperature Robot

Parent
Max Temperature Robot belongs to the type Motion System, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_temp_ambient_robot

Description
Max Temperature Robot defines the maximum ambient temperature where the robot is
situated.

Allowed values
A value between -100 to 100 C, specifying the temperature in degrees Celsius.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

498 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.24.1. The Motor type

6.24 Type Motor

6.24.1. The Motor type

Overview
This section describes the Motor type which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter is
described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MOTOR

Type description
The type Motor describes the motor used for each axis. There is one configuration of the type
Motor for each axis.
Note that only external axes are visible, the robot's axes motors are configured on delivery
and should not be changed.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 499

6 Topic Motion
6.24.2. Name

6.24.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Motor, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the motor.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

500 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.24.3. Use Motor Type

6.24.3. Use Motor Type

Parent
Use Motor Type belongs to the type Motor, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_motor_type

Description
Use Motor Type defines which type of motor is used for this type.

Usage
The type Motor Type defines the motor data.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The type Motor Type on page 510.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 501

6 Topic Motion
6.24.4. Use Motor Calibration

6.24.4. Use Motor Calibration

Parent
Use Motor Calibration belongs to the type Motor, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_motor_calib

Description
Use Motor Calibration defines which type of motor calibration to be used.

Usage
The type Motor Calibration defines the motor's calibration data.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Motor Calibration type on page 503.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

502 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.25.1. The Motor Calibration type

6.25 Type Motor Calibration

6.25.1. The Motor Calibration type

Overview
This section describes the type Motor Calibration, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MOTOR_CALIB

Type description
With the parameters in the Motor Calibration type, you can calibrate the robot's motors by
entering the calibration values.
Motor calibration configuration is normally done during robot calibration. However, if the
values are known, they can be specified directly.

Limitations
If calibration or commutator offset parameters are set, the corresponding offset valid
parameters have to be set to YES, otherwise the offset parameter will not be used.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 503

6 Topic Motion
6.25.2. Name

6.25.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Motor Calibration, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name specifies the name of the motor calibration setting it belongs to.

Usage
Name is used to reference the Motor Calibration from the parameter Use Motor Calibration
in the type Motor.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

504 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.25.3. Commutator Offset

6.25.3. Commutator Offset

Parent
Commutator Offset belongs to the type Motor Calibration, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
com_offset

Description
Commutator Offset defines the position of the motor (resolver) when the rotor is in the
predefined commutation position relative to the stator.

Usage
ABB motors normally uses Commutation Offset value 1.57080.

Allowed values
A value between -6.283186 and 6.283186, specifying the offset in radians.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 505

6 Topic Motion
6.25.4. Commutator Offset Valid

6.25.4. Commutator Offset Valid

Parent
Commutator Offset Valid belongs to the type Motor Calibration, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
valid_com_offset

Description
Commutator Offset Valid specifies whether the commutator offset is defined or not.

Allowed values
YES or NO.

Related information
Commutator Offset on page 505.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

506 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.25.5. Calibration Offset

6.25.5. Calibration Offset

Parent
Calibration Offset belongs to the type Motor Calibration, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
cal_offset

Description
Calibration Offset defines the position of the motor (resolver) when the arm is in the
calibration (zero) position.

Allowed values
A value between -6.283186 and 6.283186, specifying the offset in radians.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 507

6 Topic Motion
6.25.6. Calibration Offset Valid

6.25.6. Calibration Offset Valid

Parent
Calibration Offset Valid belongs to the type Motor Calibration, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
valid_cal_offset

Description
Calibration Offset Valid specifies whether the calibration offset is defined or not.

Allowed values
YES or NO.

Related information
Calibration Offset on page 507.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

508 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.25.7. Calibration Sensor Position

6.25.7. Calibration Sensor Position

Parent
Calibration Sensor Position belongs to the type Motor Calibration, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
cal_sensor_position

Description
Calibration Sensor Position defines the calibration sensor position on the arm side.

Usage
The value is set in degrees.

Allowed values
A value between -180 and 180 degrees.
Default value is 0 degrees.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 509

6 Topic Motion
6.26.1. The type Motor Type

6.26 Type Motor Type

6.26.1. The type Motor Type

Overview
This section describes the type Motor Type, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
MOTOR_TYPE

Type description
The type Motor Type is used to describe characteristics for the motor.

Limitations
The parameter values for Motor Type can only be changed for additional axis motors. The
values can be observed for robot motors, but cannot be changed.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

510 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.26.2. Name

6.26.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Motor Type.

Usage
Name is used to reference a motor type from the parameter Use Motor Type in the type Motor.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 511

6 Topic Motion
6.26.3. Pole Pairs

6.26.3. Pole Pairs

Parent
Pole Pairs belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
pole_pairs

Description
Defines the number of pole pairs for the motor type.

Usage
Set Pole Pairs to the number of pole pairs (i.e. number of poles divided with 2) that the motor
has.

Limitations
Pole Pairs can only be changed for additional axis motors. The values can be observed for
robot motors, but cannot be changed.

Allowed values
An integer between 0 and 20.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

512 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.26.4. Stall Torque

6.26.4. Stall Torque

Parent
Stall Torque belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_0

Description
The continuous stall torque, i.e. the torque the motor can produce at no speed and during an
infinite time.

Usage
Set Stall Torque to the stall torque (T0) specified by the motor manufacturer.

Limitations
Stall Torque can only be changed for additional axis motors. The values can be observed for
robot motors, but cannot be changed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100000 (Nm).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 513

6 Topic Motion
6.26.5. ke Phase to Phase

6.26.5. ke Phase to Phase

Parent
ke Phase to Phase belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
ke

Description
Nominal voltage constant.

Usage
ke Phase to Phase is the induced voltage (phase to phase) that corresponds to the speed 1 rad/
s.

Limitations
ke Phase to Phase can only be changed for additional axis motors. The values can be observed
for robot motors, but cannot be changed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 10 (Vs/rad).

Additional information
Some motor manufacturers specify the value kt instead of ke. ke can then be calculated
according to the formula:
ke = kt / ÷3

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

514 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.26.6. Max Current

6.26.6. Max Current

Parent
Max Current belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
i_max

Description
Max current without irreversible magnetization.

Usage
Set Max Current to the root-mean-square of the maximum current the motor can withstand
without irreversible demagnetization.

Limitations
Max Current can only be changed for additional axis motors. The values can be observed for
robot motors, but cannot be changed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100 (A rms).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 515

6 Topic Motion
6.26.7. Phase Resistance

6.26.7. Phase Resistance

Parent
Phase Resistance belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
r_stator_20

Description
Nominal winding resistance per phase at 20 degrees Celsius.

Usage
Set Phase Resistance to the stator phase resistance (R20) specified by the motor manufacturer.

Limitations
Phase Resistance can only be changed for additional axis motors. The values can be observed
for robot motors, but cannot be changed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100 (ohm).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

516 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.26.8. Phase Inductance

6.26.8. Phase Inductance

Parent
Phase Inductance belongs to the type Motor Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
l_stator

Description
Nominal winding inductance per phase at zero current.

Usage
Set Phase Inductance to the stator phase inductance (L0) specified by the motor manufacturer.

Limitations
Phase Inductance can only be changed for additional axis motors. The values can be observed
for robot motors, but cannot be changed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100 (H).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 517

6 Topic Motion
6.27.1. The Path Sensor Synchronization type

6.27 Type Path Sensor Synchronization

6.27.1. The Path Sensor Synchronization type

Parent
This section describes the type Path Sensor Synchronization which belongs to the topic
Motion. Each parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this
section.

Cfg name
PATH_SENSOR_SYNC

Type description
The type Path Sensor Synchronization define settings for sensor synchronization. The
parameters of this type are used to set limits for the movements of a robot that is synchronized
with an external device. Limits can be set for allowed deviation between calculated and actual
position, and minimum/maximum TCP speed.

Limitations
Path Sensor Synchronization can only be used if you have the option Sensor synchronization
installed.

Related information
Application manual - Motion coordination and supervision, chapter Sensor synchronization.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

518 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.27.2. Name

6.27.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Path Sensor Synchronization, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name for the path sensor synchronization.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 519

6 Topic Motion
6.27.3. Max Advance Distance

6.27.3. Max Advance Distance

Parent
Max Advance Distance belongs to the type Path Sensor Synchronization, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_adv_dist_for_decel

Description
Max Advance Distance defines the maximum allowed advance distance between the sensor’s
interpolated position and its actual position.
The interpolated position of the sensor axis corresponds to the robot’s position along its path
when the robot is synchronized with the sensor.

en0400001243

Usage
If the interpolated position of the sensor axis is ahead of the actual position, a collision may
occur. For example, if the robot enter a press based on the information that the press is open, © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
but the press is actually still closed, the robot may move into the closed press. This can be
avoided by using Max Advance Distance. If Max Advance Distance is exceeded, motion and
execution is stopped.

Limitations
Max Advance Distance can only be used if you have the option Sensor synchronization
installed.

Allowed values
A value between 0.01 and 5.0 (meters of movement on the external device that is connected
to the sensor).
Default value is 0.1.

520 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.27.4. Max Delay Distance

6.27.4. Max Delay Distance

Parent
Max Delay Distance belongs to the type Path Sensor Synchronization, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_delay_dist_for_decel

Description
Max Delay Distance defines the maximum allowed delay distance between sensor’s
interpolated position and its actual position.
The interpolated position of the sensor axis corresponds to the robot’s position along its path
when the robot is synchronized with the sensor.

en0400001244

Usage
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

If the interpolated position of the sensor axis is behind the actual position, a collision may
occur. A robot that is moving in an area where the external device will be later in the cycle
can collide with the external device because of the incorrect timing. This can be avoided by
using Max Delay Distance. If Max Delay Distance is exceeded, motion and execution is
stopped.
Max Delay Distance can be disabled by setting its value to 0.

Limitations
Max Delay Distance can only be used if you have the option Sensor synchronization installed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0.0 and 5.0 (meters of movement on the external device that is
connected to the sensor).
Default value is 0, which means that the supervision of the delay distance is not used.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 521

6 Topic Motion
6.27.5. Max Synchronization Speed

6.27.5. Max Synchronization Speed

Parent
Max Synchronization Speed belongs to the type Path Sensor Synchronization, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
max_sync_speed

Description
Max Synchronization Speed defines the maximum allowed robot TCP speed during
synchronization with an external device.

Usage
If the external device (that the robot is synchronized with) moves so fast that the robot should
exceed Max Synchronization Speed, the robot speed will be limited to Max Synchronization
Speed. The robot will slip behind, and the interpolated sensor position will be delayed
compared to the actual sensor position, until the Max Delay Distance is reached.

Limitations
Max Synchronization Speed can only be used if you have the option Sensor synchronization
installed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1.0 and 10.0 (m/s).
Default value is 4.0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

522 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.27.6. Min Synchronization Speed

6.27.6. Min Synchronization Speed

Parent
Min Synchronization Speed belongs to the type Path Sensor Synchronization, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
min_sync_speed

Description
Min Synchronization Speed defines the minimum allowed robot TCP speed during
synchronization with an external device.

Usage
If the external device (that the robot is synchronized with) stops, the robot speed will maintain
the Max Synchronization Speed. The robot will move ahead, and the interpolated sensor
position will be in advance compared to the actual sensor position, until the Max Advance
Distance is reached.

Limitations
Min Synchronization Speed can only be used if you have the option Sensor synchronization
installed.

Allowed values
A value between 0.0 and 2.0 (m/s).
Default value is 0.1.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 523

6 Topic Motion
6.27.7. Synchronization Type

6.27.7. Synchronization Type

Parent
Synchronization Type belongs to the type Path Sensor Synchronization, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
sync_type

Description
Synchronization Type defines what type of synchronization to be used.

Limitations
Synchronization Type can only be used if you have the option Sensor synchronization
installed.

Allowed values

Value: Description:
MINIMAL_DIST Synchronization based on distance, actual sensor position in
corvec.
NOM_SPEED_SENS Synchronization based on nominal sensor speed, actual
sensor position in corvec.
NOM_SPEED_CALC Synchronization based on nominal sensor speed, calculated
sensor position in corvec.
MIN_DIST_CALC Synchronization based on distance, calculated sensor
position in corvec.
LOW_SPEED_SYNC When robot and sensor speed is lower than 0.2 m/sec.
ROBOT_TO_ROBOT To synchronize two robots through DeviceNet bus.
ROBOT_TO_PRESS To synchronize robot with press moved by electric motor.
ROBOT_TO_HPRESS To synchronize robot with hydraulic press.
SYNC_TO_IMM To synchronize with injection moulding machine.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

524 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.28.1. The Process type

6.28 Type Process

6.28.1. The Process type

Overview
This section describes the type Process, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter
of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
PROCESS

Type description
A process can be called from the parameter Use Process in the type Joint. The parameters in
the type Process point out a process in the type Linked M Process or SG Process that will be
used for that joint.

Related information
Use Process on page 407.
The Linked M Process type on page 436.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 525

6 Topic Motion
6.28.2. Name

6.28.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the identity of the process.

Usage
The Name of the process is used by a joint to call the process.
The process will, in its turn, call either a linked motor process (type Linked M Process) or a
servo gun process (type SG Process).

Limitations
This parameter is only useful if you have either of the RobotWare options Electronically
Linked Motors or Spot Servo.

Allowed values
A string.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

526 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.28.3. Use SG Process

6.28.3. Use SG Process

Parent
Use SG Process belongs to the type Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_sg_process

Description
Use SG Process defines which SG Process to use.

Usage
Use SG Process refers to a process id defined by the parameter Name in the type SG Process.
SG Process is used to define a servo tool’s behavior.

Limitations
SG Process can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A string.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 527

6 Topic Motion
6.28.4. Use Linked Motor Process

6.28.4. Use Linked Motor Process

Parent
Use Linked Motor Process belongs to the type Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_linked_m_proc

Description
Use Linked Motor Process defines which linked motor process to use.

Usage
Use Linked Motor Process points to a process id defined by the parameter Name in the type
Linked M Process.
The linked motor process is used to define a joint's behavior for Electronically Linked Motors.

Limitations
Use Linked Motor Processis only useful if you have the RobotWare option Electronically
Linked Motors.

Allowed values
A string.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

528 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.29.1. The Relay type

6.29 Type Relay

6.29.1. The Relay type

Overview
This section describes the type Relay which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter of
this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
RELAY

Type description
The type Relay defines the characteristics of the relays that are used for the mechanical units,
e.g. brake relays and run relays.
All relays for a robot supplied from ABB are defined on delivery. This means that adding or
editing parameters of the Relay type is only necessary when additional axes are installed.

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 529

6 Topic Motion
6.29.2. Output Signal

6.29.2. Output Signal

Parent
Output Signal belongs to the type Relay in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Out_signal

Description
Output Signal defines the logical name of the output signal to the relay.

Usage
Characteristics of relays for manipulators need to be defined when additional axes are
installed.
The value of Output Signal must be identical to the name of the signal, including upper and
lower case letters.

Prerequisites
The logical signal name must be defined in the type Signal in the topic I/O.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Signal type on page 179.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

530 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.29.3. Input Signal

6.29.3. Input Signal

Parent
Input Signal belongs to the type Relay in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
in_signal

Description
Input Signal defines the logical name of the input signal to the relay.

Usage
Characteristics of relays for manipulators need to be defined when additional axes are
installed.
The value of Input Signal must be identical to the name of the signal, including upper and
lower case letters.

Prerequisites
The logical signal name must be defined in the type Signal in the topic I/O.
The signal must be defined as "safety" and "INTERNAL".

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Signal type on page 179.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 531

6 Topic Motion
6.30.1. The Robot type

6.30 Type Robot

6.30.1. The Robot type

Overview
This section describes the type Robot which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter of
this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
ROBOT

Type description
The type Robot contains a number of parameters that are common for a robot in the robot
system. The robot is a mechanical unit with more than one joint. Parameters of this type are
used to define which joints the robot consists of and the base frame of the robot.

Non-editable parameters
The following parameter is visible but not editable in the software configuration tools:
• Use Robot Calibration
As a consequence, the above parameter is not described in the manual.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

532 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.2. Name

6.30.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the robot.

Limitations
This parameter cannot be changed.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 533

6 Topic Motion
6.30.3. Use Old SMB

6.30.3. Use Old SMB

Parent
Use Old SMB belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_old_smb

Description
To adapt earlier robot systems, running earlier SMB board versions without flash memory, to
later software versions, the parameter Use Old SMB is to be set to TRUE.

Usage
Earlier systems, in this context, is any robot system delivered with an SMB board of any of
these revisions:
• DSQC 313, all revisions
• DSQC 520, revision 5 and earlier
• DSQC 562, revision 2 and earlier

Allowed values
True or False.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

534 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.4. Use Joint 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

6.30.4. Use Joint 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Parent
Use Joint 1, Use Joint 2, Use Joint 3, Use Joint 4 , Use Joint 5, and Use Joint 6 belongs to
the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
use_joint_0
use_joint_1
use_joint_2
use_joint_3
use_joint_4
use_joint_5

Description
Use joint 1 defines which joint data to use as the robot's first joint.
Use joint 2 defines which joint data to use as the robot's second joint.
Use joint 3 defines which joint data to use as the robot's third joint.
Use joint 4 defines which joint data to use as the robot's fourth joint.
Use joint 5 defines which joint data to use as the robot's fifth joint.
Use joint 6 defines which joint data to use as the robot's sixth joint.

Usage
The joints are defined in the type Joint.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters, specifying an already defined joint.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Related information
The Joint type on page 404.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 535

6 Topic Motion
6.30.5. Base Frame x, y, z

6.30.5. Base Frame x, y, z

Parent
Base Frame x, Base Frame y, and Base Frame z belongs to the type Robot, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg names
base_frame_pos_x
base_frame_pos_y
base_frame_pos_z

Description
Base Frame x defines the x-direction of the base frame position in relation to the world frame
(in meters).
Base Frame y defines the y-direction of the base frame position in relation to the world frame
(in meters).
Base Frame z defines the z-direction of the base frame position in relation to the world frame
(in meters).

Allowed values
A value between -1000 to 1000, specifying the relation in meters.

Related information
How to define base frame on page 294.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

536 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.6. Base Frame q1, q2, q3, q4

6.30.6. Base Frame q1, q2, q3, q4

Parent
Base Frame q1, Base Frame q2, Base Frame q3, and Base Frame q4 belongs to the type
Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
base_frame_orient_u0
base_frame_orient_u1
base_frame_orient_u2
base_frame_orient_u3

Description
Base Frame q1 defines the first quaternion (q1) of the base frame orientation in relation to the
world frame.
Base Frame q2 defines the second quaternion (q2) of the base frame orientation in relation to
the world frame.
Base Frame q3 defines the third quaternion (q3) of the base frame orientation in relation to
the world frame.
Base Frame q4 defines the fourth quaternion (q4) of the base frame orientation in relation to
the world frame.

Allowed values
A value between -1 to 1 specifying the orientation.

Related information
How to define base frame on page 294.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 537

6 Topic Motion
6.30.7. Base Frame Moved by

6.30.7. Base Frame Moved by

Parent
Base Frame Moved by belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
base_frame_coordinated

Description
Base Frame Moved by defines the name of a mechanical unit (a robot or a single joint) that
moves the base frame of the robot.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters, specifying the unit name.

Related information
How to define base frame on page 294.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

538 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.8. Gravity Alpha

6.30.8. Gravity Alpha

Parent
Gravity Alpha belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
gravity_alpha

Description
Gravity Alpha defines the orientation of gravity with respect to the base frame.

Usage
The alpha gravity is a positive rotation direction around the x-axis in the base frame. The
value is set in radians.

Allowed values
A value between -6.283186 and 6.283186 radians.
Default value is 0.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 539

6 Topic Motion
6.30.9. Gravity Beta

6.30.9. Gravity Beta

Parent
Gravity Beta belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
gravity_beta

Description
Gravity Beta defines the orientation of gravity with respect to the base frame.

Usage
The beta gravity is a positive rotation direction around the y-axis in the base frame. The value
is set in radians.

Allowed values
A value between -6.283186 and 6.283186 radians.
Default value is 0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

540 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.10. Gamma Rotation

6.30.10. Gamma Rotation

Parent
Gamma Rotation belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
gamma_rotation

Description
Gamma Rotation defines the orientation of the robot’s foot on the travel carriage.

Usage
The gamma rotation is a positive rotation direction around the z-axis of the base frame of the
travel carriage (track motion). The value is set in radians.

Prerequisites
This parameter is only useful if the parameter 7 axes high performance motion is set.

Allowed values
A value between -6.283186 and 6.283186 radians.
Default values is 0.

Related information
7 axes high performance motion on page 548.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 541

6 Topic Motion
6.30.11. Upper Work Area x, y, z

6.30.11. Upper Work Area x, y, z

Parent
Upper Work Area x, Upper Work Area y, and Upper Work Area z belongs to the type Robot,
in the topic Motion

Cfg names
upper_work_area_x
upper_work_area_y
upper_work_area_z

Description
Upper work area x defines the x-coordinate of the upper bound of the work area for the robot.
Upper work area y defines the y-coordinate of the upper bound of the work area for the robot.
Upper work area z defines the z-coordinate of the upper bound of the work area for the robot.

Allowed values
A numeric value higher than the respective Lower Work Area value in meters.

Related information
How to define work area on page 296.
Lower Work Area x, y, z on page 543.
How to define base frame on page 294.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

542 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.12. Lower Work Area x, y, z

6.30.12. Lower Work Area x, y, z

Parent
Lower Work Area x, Lower Work Area y, and Lower Work Area z belongs to the type Robot,
in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
lower_work_area_x
lower_work_area_y
lower_work_area_z

Description
Lower work area x defines the x-coordinate of the lower bound of the work area for the robot.
Lower work area y defines the y-coordinate of the lower bound of the work area for the robot.
Lower work area z defines the z-coordinate of the lower bound of the work area for the robot.

Allowed values
A numeric value lower than the respective Upper Work Area value in meters.

Related information
How to define work area on page 296.
Upper Work Area x, y, z on page 542.
How to define base frame on page 294.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 543

6 Topic Motion
6.30.13. Upper Check Point Bound x, y, z

6.30.13. Upper Check Point Bound x, y, z

Parent
Upper Check Point Bound x, Upper Check Point Bound y, and Upper Check Point Bound z
belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
upper_arm_cp_bound_x
upper_arm_cp_bound_y
upper_arm_cp_bound_z

Description
Upper Check Point Bound x defines the cartesian x-coordinate upper check point bound on
arm check point.
Upper Check Point Bound y defines the cartesian y-coordinate upper check point bound on
arm check point.
Upper Check Point Bound z defines the cartesian z-coordinate upper check point bound on
arm check point.

Usage
The arm check point can be bound to restrict the movement area.

Allowed values
A numeric value higher than the respective coordinate Lower Check Point Bound in meters.

Related information
How to define arm check point on page 297.
Lower Check Point Bound x, y, z on page 545.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

544 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.14. Lower Check Point Bound x, y, z

6.30.14. Lower Check Point Bound x, y, z

Parent
Lower Check Point Bound x, Lower Check Point Bound y, and Lower Check Point Bound z
belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
lower_arm_cp_bound_x
lower_arm_cp_bound_y
lower_arm_cp_bound_z

Description
Lower Check Point Bound x defines the cartesian x-coordinate lower check point bound on
arm check point.
Lower Check Point Bound y defines the cartesian y-coordinate lower check point bound on
arm check point.
Lower Check Point Bound z defines the cartesian z-coordinate lower check point bound on
arm check point.

Usage
The arm check point can be bound to restrict the movement area.

Allowed values
A numeric value lower than the respective coordinate Upper Check Point Bound in meters.

Related information
How to define arm check point on page 297.
Upper Check Point Bound x, y, z on page 544.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 545

6 Topic Motion
6.30.15. Use Six Axes Corvec

6.30.15. Use Six Axes Corvec

Parent
Use Six Axes Corvec belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_six_axis_corvec

Description
Defines if the position adjustment is made on six axes.

Usage
Set Use Six Axes Corvec to Yes if the position adjustment should be made on on six axes. In
this case, the orientation of the tool is exact. Otherwise the correction is only made on axis 1,
2, and 3 and the orientation accuracy is lower.
Using Six Axes Corvec takes a little more CPU time and should not be used if not needed.

Limitations
Use Six Axes Corvec can only be used if Conveyor tracking option is installed.
Use Six Axes Corvec has no effect on coordinated tracks.
Use Six Axes Corvec is only possible to use on six axes robots.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

546 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.16. Track Conveyor with Robot

6.30.16. Track Conveyor with Robot

Parent
Track Conveyor with Robot belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
track_convey_with_robot

Description
Defines if the robot should track the conveyor.

Usage
Set Track Conveyor with Robot to Yes if the robot should track the conveyor without using
the track axis, even if robot is coordinated with track. Default value is No.

Limitations
Track Conveyor with Robot can only be used with option Conveyor tracking installed.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 547

6 Topic Motion
6.30.17. 7 axes high performance motion

6.30.17. 7 axes high performance motion

Parent
7 axes high performance motion belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
seven_axes_hp_motion

Description
7 axes high performance motion defines the name of the single that moves the robot.

Usage
This parameter should only be set if a "high performance track motion"-additional package
is present in your mediapool.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters, specifying the unit name.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

548 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.30.18. Time to Inposition

6.30.18. Time to Inposition

Parent
Time to Inposition belongs to the type Robot, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
time_to_inpos

Description
Time to Inposition defines the delay time between the last position reference and the
inposition event when reaching a fine point.

Limitations
Time to Inposition is only used by the option Conveyor tracking.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 2.0 seconds.
Default value is 0.08 seconds. This should not be changed!

Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 549

6 Topic Motion
6.31.1. The Robot Serial Number type

6.31 The Robot Serial Number type

6.31.1. The Robot Serial Number type

Overview
This section describes the type Robot Serial Number, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
ROBOT_SERIAL_NUMBER

Type description
The type Robot Serial Number contains parameters that define the robot’s serial number.

Related information
The Robot type on page 532.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

550 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.31.2. Name

6.31.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Robot Serial Number, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name specifies the name of the robot that the serial number belongs to.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 551

6 Topic Motion
6.31.3. Robot Serial Number High Part

6.31.3. Robot Serial Number High Part

Parent
Robot Serial Number High Part belongs to the type Robot Serial Number, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
robot_serial_number_high_part

Description
Robot Serial Number High Part defines the high part of the robot’s serial number.

Usage
The high part is the first four characters of the serial number.
The serial number can be found on the robot’s identification plate.

Allowed values
A string with maximum four characters.
Default value is 0000.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

552 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.31.4. Robot Serial Number Low Part

6.31.4. Robot Serial Number Low Part

Parent
Robot Serial Number Low Part belongs to the type Robot Serial Number, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
robot_serial_number_low_part

Description
Robot Serial Number Low Part defines the low part of the robot’s serial number.

Usage
The low integer part of the serial number.
The serial number can be found on the robot’s identification plate.

Allowed values
An integer value with maximum nine digits.
Default value is 0.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 553

6 Topic Motion
6.32.1. The SG Process type

6.32 Type SG Process

6.32.1. The SG Process type

Overview
This section describes the type SG Process, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SG_PROCESS

Type description
The type SG Process contains parameters to configure the behavior of a servo gun (or other
servo tool). There are parameters for adjusting the timing, force and thickness when closing
and opening a servo gun. It is also possible to specify how the tip wear calibration will be
performed. The relation between tip force and motor torque is configured as shown below.

Limitations
SG Process can only be used if you have servo tools.

Force-torque relation
Tip Force 1-10 and Motor Torque 1-10 are used to define the motor torque the motor should
apply when a gun closing is ordered with a certain tip force. Due to friction, the relation
between force and torque is not always linear.
Between 2 and 10 points can be used to define the motor torque as a function of the tip force.
The number of points used is defined in Number of Stored Forces.

Ordered closing tip force: Resulting motor torque:

Tip Force 1 Motor Torque 1
Tip Force 2 Motor Torque 2
Tip Force 3 Motor Torque 3 © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
Tip Force 4 Motor Torque 4
Tip Force 5 Motor Torque 5
Tip Force 6 Motor Torque 6
Tip Force 7 Motor Torque 7
Tip Force 8 Motor Torque 8
Tip Force 9 Motor Torque 9
Tip Force 10 Motor Torque 10

When calculating the force-torque function, the origin (force=0, torque=0) is considered to
be an extra point in the diagram. For tip force values between points, linear interpolation is
used. For tip force values higher than the highest defined tip force, extrapolation from the last
two points is used.

Continues on next page

554 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
 6 Topic Motion
6.32.1. The SG Process type

Continued

Example
In this example, four points are used to define the relation between tip force and motor torque.
Any values given for point 5 to 10 are ignored.
These parameters and values are configured:

Parameter: Value:
Number of Stored Forces 4
Tip Force 1 50
Tip Force 2 200
Tip Force 3 500
Tip Force 4 1800
Motor Torque 1 3
Motor Torque 2 7
Motor Torque 3 10
Motor Torque 4 15

The results of this configuration is the following graph for motor torque as function of tip
force:

xx0400000938

A Tip force (N)

B Motor torque (Nm)
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 555

6 Topic Motion
6.32.2. Name

6.32.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the SG Process.

Usage
Name is used to reference a SG Process from the parameter Use SG Process in the type
Process.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

556 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.3. Use Force Master

6.32.3. Use Force Master

Parent
Use Force Master belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_force_master

Description
Use Force Master determines which Force Master should be used.

Usage
Use Force Master is a reference to the parameter Name in the type Force Master.

Prerequisites
A Force Master must be configured before Use Force Master can refer to it.

Limitations
Use Force Master can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Force Master type on page 358.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 557

6 Topic Motion
6.32.4. Sync Check Off

6.32.4. Sync Check Off

Parent
Sync Check Off belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
sync_check_off

Description
Defines if the servo tool synchronization check is turned off.

Usage
Set Sync Check Off to Yes to disable the servo tool synchronization check. This can be useful
to do to manage the servo tool before having done the service calibration.

Limitations
Sync Check Off can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
Yes or No.

Related information
Application manual - Servo motor control.

Example
To turn off the synchronization check, use this RAPID code:
STTune SERVOGUN, 1, SyncCheckOff;
To turn on the synchronization check again:
STTuneReset SERVOGUN;

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

558 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.5. Close time adjust

6.32.5. Close time adjust

Parent
Close time adjust belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
min_close_time_adjust

Description
Adjustment of the ordered minimum close time of the gun.

Usage
If the servo gun is ordered to start closing before the robot is in position, the tips might touch
the work piece too early. By setting Close time adjust to a positive value, this can be avoided.
If there is a waiting period when the robot is in position but before the servo gun is closing,
the cycle time can be reduced by setting Close time adjust to a negative value.
Close time adjust may be used to delay the closing slightly when the synchronized pre closing
is used for welding.

Limitations
Close time adjust can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
Numerical value between -100 and 100 (seconds).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 559

6 Topic Motion
6.32.6. Close position adjust

6.32.6. Close position adjust

Parent
Close position adjust belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
close_position_adjust

Description
Adjustment of the ordered position when closing the gun to a position and force.
When the tool tips reach the position (plate thickness) ordered by the close instruction, the
force control starts. This tool tip position can be adjusted with Close position adjust to make
the force control start earlier.

Usage
To make sure the tool tips do not touch the work piece before the force control starts, Close
position adjust can be used to leave some space between the tool tips and the work object.

Limitations
Close position adjust can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
Numeric value between 0 and 0.005 (meters).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

560 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.7. Force Ready Delay

6.32.7. Force Ready Delay

Parent
Force Ready Delay belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
pre_sync_delay_time

Description
Force Ready Delay is used to delay the close ready event. This will make the servo gun wait
some extra time when the closing is finished and the ordered force is achieved.

Usage
Force Ready Delay can be used if the servo gun needs some extra time for the force to be
stabilized.

Limitations
Force Ready Delay can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 30 (seconds).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 561

6 Topic Motion
6.32.8. Max Force Control Motor Torque

6.32.8. Max Force Control Motor Torque

Parent
Max Force Control Motor Torque belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_motor_torque

Description
Max allowed motor torque for force control. Commanded force will be reduced, if the
required motor torque is higher than this value.

Usage
Max Force Control Motor Torque is used to protect the gun from mechanical overload.

Limitations
Max Force Control Motor Torque can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100 (Nm).
The default value is 7 Nm.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

562 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.9. Post-synchronization Time

6.32.9. Post-synchronization Time

Parent
Post-synchronization Time belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
post_sync_time

Description
Post-synchronization Time is used to anticipate the open ready event. The open instruction
will be considered ready before the servo gun is completely open.

Usage
Post-synchronization Time can be used to save cycle time. The waiting time between the
opening of the servo gun and the execution of the next instruction can be reduced.
The synchronization may fail if Post-synchronization Time is set too high.

Limitations
Post-synchronization Time can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 0.5 (seconds).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 563

6 Topic Motion
6.32.10. Calibration Mode

6.32.10. Calibration Mode

Parent
Calibration Mode belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
calib_mode

Description
Number of tip wear calibration points, i.e. the number of times the servo gun closes during a
tip wear calibration.

Usage
If the flexibility of a servo gun is not linearly dependent of the force, more than two
measurement points may be necessary. This will improve the plate thickness detection.

Limitations
Calibration Mode can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
An integer between 2 and 10.
The default value is 2.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

564 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.11. Calibration Force High

6.32.11. Calibration Force High

Parent
Calibration Force High belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
calib_force_high

Description
The force used for the last closing when calibrating the tip wear of a servo gun.
Calibration Force High affects the gun stiffness calibration.

Usage
Set Calibration Force High to a value close to the highest force you intend to use the servo
gun for. This way it will be well calibrated for forces of that size.

Limitations
Calibration Force High can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 12000 (N).
The default value is 3500 N.

Additional information
The force of the first gun closing in a tip wear calibration is specified in Calibration Force
Low. If more than two measurement points are used, the force of these measurement points
are evenly distributed between Calibration Force Low and Calibration Force High.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 565

6 Topic Motion
6.32.12. Calibration Force Low

6.32.12. Calibration Force Low

Parent
Calibration Force Low belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
calib_force_low

Description
The force used for:
• the second gun closing of a new tips calibration
• the second gun closing of a tool change calibration
• the first gun closing of a tip wear calibration.
Calibration Force Low affects the gun position calibration.

Usage
It is recommended to set Calibration Force Low to a value close to the lowest force you intend
to use the servo gun for, but not a higher value than half the value of Calibration Force High.

Limitations
Calibration Force Low can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 12000 (N).
The default value is 1500 N.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

566 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.13. Calibration Time

6.32.13. Calibration Time

Parent
Calibration Time belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
calib_time

Description
The time that the servo gun waits in closed position during calibration.

Usage
If the servo gun needs more time to stabilize, Calibration Time can be increased. This can
improve the gun position calibration.
In order to make the calibrations faster, Calibration Time can be decreased.

Limitations
Calibration Time can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 30 (seconds).
The default value is 0.5 seconds.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 567

6 Topic Motion
6.32.14. Number of Stored Forces

6.32.14. Number of Stored Forces

Parent
Number of Stored Forces belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
no_of_active_db_posts

Description
Used to define the relation between tip force and motor torque for a servo gun. Number of
Stored Forces defines for how many tip force values you want to define the motor torque, i.e.
the number of points in the force-torque graph (see Force-torque relation on page 554).

Usage
Measure the tip force and motor torque for a number of points. Set Number of Stored Forces
to the number of points you want to specify.

Limitations
Number of Stored Forces can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
An integer between 2 and 10.
The default value is 3.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

568 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.15. Tip Force 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

6.32.15. Tip Force 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

Parent
Tip Force 1, Tip Force 2, Tip Force 3, Tip Force 4, Tip Force 5, Tip Force 6, Tip Force 7, Tip
Force 8, Tip Force 9, and Tip Force 10 belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
squeeze_force_1
squeeze_force_2
squeeze_force_3
squeeze_force_4
squeeze_force_5
squeeze_force_6
squeeze_force_7
squeeze_force_8
squeeze_force_9
squeeze_force_10

Description
Used to define the relation between tip force and motor torque for a servo gun (see Force-
torque relation on page 554).
Tip Force 1 defines the ordered closing force for the first point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 2 defines the ordered closing force for the second point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 3 defines the ordered closing force for the third point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 4 defines the ordered closing force for the fourth point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 5 defines the ordered closing force for the fifth point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 6 defines the ordered closing force for the sixth point in the force-torque graph.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Tip Force 7 defines the ordered closing force for the seventh point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 8 defines the ordered closing force for the eighth point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 9 defines the ordered closing force for the ninth point in the force-torque graph.
Tip Force 10 defines the ordered closing force for the tenth point in the force-torque graph.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 569
6 Topic Motion
6.32.15. Tip Force 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

Continued

Usage
Measure the tip force and the motor torque for some different values.
Set Tip Force 1 to the tip force value of the first point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
1 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 2 to the tip force value of the second point you want to specify, and Motor
Torque 2 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 3 to the tip force value of the third point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
3 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 4 to the tip force value of the fourth point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
4 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 5 to the tip force value of the fifth point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
5 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 61 to the tip force value of the sixth point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
6 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 7 to the tip force value of the seventh point you want to specify, and Motor
Torque 7 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 8 to the tip force value of the eighth point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
8 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 9 to the tip force value of the ninth point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
9 to the corresponding motor torque.
Set Tip Force 10 to the tip force value of the tenth point you want to specify, and Motor Torque
10 to the corresponding motor torque.

Limitations
Tip Force can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 20000 (N).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

570 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.16. Motor Torque 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

6.32.16. Motor Torque 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

Parent
Motor Torque 1, Motor Torque 2, Motor Torque 3, Motor Torque 4, Motor Torque 5, Motor
Torque 6, Motor Torque 7, Motor Torque 8, Motor Torque 9, and Motor Torque 10 belongs to
the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
squeeze_torque_1
squeeze_torque_2
squeeze_torque_3
squeeze_torque_4
squeeze_torque_5
squeeze_torque_6
squeeze_torque_7
squeeze_torque_8
squeeze_torque_9
squeeze_torque_10

Description
Used to define the relation between tip force and motor torque for a servo gun (see Force-
torque relation on page 554).
Motor Torque 1 defines the motor torque for the first point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 2 defines the motor torque for the second point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 3 defines the motor torque for the third point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 4 defines the motor torque for the fourth point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 5 defines the motor torque for the fifth point in the force-torque graph.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Motor Torque 6 defines the motor torque for the sixth point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 7 defines the motor torque for the seventh point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 8 defines the motor torque for the eighth point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 9 defines the motor torque for the ninth point in the force-torque graph.
Motor Torque 10 defines the motor torque for the tenth point in the force-torque graph.

Continues on next page

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 571
6 Topic Motion
6.32.16. Motor Torque 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

Continued

Usage
Measure the tip force and the motor torque for some different values
Set Motor Torque 1 to the motor torque value of the first point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 1 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 2 to the motor torque value of the second point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 2 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 3 to the motor torque value of the third point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 3 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 4 to the motor torque value of the fourth point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 4 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 5 to the motor torque value of the fifth point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 5 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 6 to the motor torque value of the sixth point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 6 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 7 to the motor torque value of the seventh point you want to specify, and
Tip Force 7 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 8 to the motor torque value of the eighth point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 8 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 9 to the motor torque value of the ninth point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 91 to the corresponding tip force.
Set Motor Torque 10 to the motor torque value of the tenth point you want to specify, and Tip
Force 10 to the corresponding tip force.

Limitations
Motor Torque can only be used for servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between -100 and 100 (Nm).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

572 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.32.17. Soft Stop Timeout

6.32.17. Soft Stop Timeout

Parent
Soft Stop Timeout belongs to the type SG Process, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
soft_stop_timeout

Description
If a soft stop occurs during constant force, Soft Stop Timeout defines how long the force will
be maintained. The force will be reduced after this time-out, or when opening is commanded.

Usage
If you want the gun to remain closed a short period after a soft stop, set Soft Stop Timeout to
the desired time-out value.
Setting Soft Stop Timeout to 0 will make the gun release its force immediately when a soft
stop occurs.

Limitations
Soft Stop Timeout can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1.2 (seconds).
The default value is 0.3 seconds.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 573

6 Topic Motion
6.33.1. The Single type

6.33 Type Single

6.33.1. The Single type

Overview
This section describes the type Single, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each parameter of
this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SINGLE

Type description
The type Single contains a number of parameters that are common for a single in the robot
system. The single is a mechanical unit with one joint. Parameters of this type are used to
define which joint the single consist of and the base frame of the single.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

574 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.33.2. Name

6.33.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Single, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the single.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 575

6 Topic Motion
6.33.3. Use Single Type

6.33.3. Use Single Type

Parent
Use Single Type belongs to the type Single, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_single_type

Description
Use Single Type defines what single type is used.

Usage
The single type is defined in the type Single Type.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Single Type type on page 581.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

576 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.33.4. Use Joint

6.33.4. Use Joint

Parent
Use Joint belongs to the type Single, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
use_joint

Description
Use Joint defines which joint data to use for the single.

Usage
The joints are defined in the type Joint.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
The Joint type on page 404.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 577

6 Topic Motion
6.33.5. Base Frame x, y, z

6.33.5. Base Frame x, y, z

Parent
Base Frame x, Base Frame y, and Base Frame z belongs to the type Single in the topic
Motion.

Cfg names
base_frame_pos_x
base_frame_pos_y
base_frame_pos_z

Description
Base Frame x defines the x-direction of the base frame position in relation to the world frame
(in meters).
Base Frame y defines the y-direction of the base frame position in relation to the world frame
(in meters).
Base Frame z defines the z-direction of the base frame position in relation to the world frame
(in meters).

Allowed values
A value between -1,000 and 1,000 meters.

Related information
How to define base frame on page 294.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

578 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.33.6. Base Frame q1, q2, q3, q4

6.33.6. Base Frame q1, q2, q3, q4

Parent
Base Frame q1, Base Frame q2, Base Frame q3, and Base Frame q4 belongs to the type
Single in the topic Motion.

Cfg names
base_frame_orient_u0
base_frame_orient_u1
base_frame_orient_u2
base_frame_orient_u3

Description
Base Frame q1 defines the first quarternion (q1) of the base frame orientation in relation to
the world frame.
Base Frame q2 defines the second quarternion (q2) of the base frame orientation in relation
to the world frame.
Base Frame q3 defines the third quarternion (q3) of the base frame orientation in relation to
the world frame.
Base Frame q4 defines the fourth quarternion (q4) of the base frame orientation in relation to
the world frame.

Allowed values
A value between -1 and 1 specifying the orientation.

Related information
How to define base frame on page 294.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 579

6 Topic Motion
6.33.7. Base Frame Coordinated

6.33.7. Base Frame Coordinated

Parent
Base Frame Coordinated belongs to the type Single in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
base_frame_coordinated

Description
Base Frame Coordinated defines the name of robot or single that moves the base frame of
this single.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

Related information
How to define base frame on page 294.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

580 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.34.1. The Single Type type

6.34 Type Single Type

6.34.1. The Single Type type

Overview
This section describes the type Single Type which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SINGLE_TYPE

Type description
The type Single Type contains a number of parameters that are common for a single type in
the robot system. The single is a mechanical unit with one joint.

Related information
The Single type on page 574.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 581

6 Topic Motion
6.34.2. Name

6.34.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Single Type in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the name of the single type.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

582 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.34.3. Mechanics

6.34.3. Mechanics

Parent
Mechanics belongs to the type Single Type in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
mechanics

Description
Mechanics defines what type of mechanics the single type uses.

Allowed values
The following mechanics are available/allowed:

Value: Description:
TRACK Linear track
EXT_LIN Conveyor, linear
FREE_ROT Rotating axis
EXT_CTL For internal use only
EXT_ROT Conveyor, rotating
SS_ROT Sensor synchronization, rotating movement
SS_LIN Sensor synchronization, linear movement

Related information
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 583

6 Topic Motion
6.35.1. The SIS Parameters type

6.35 Type SIS Parameters

6.35.1. The SIS Parameters type

Overview
This section describes the type SIS Parameters which belong to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SIS_EXTERNAL

Type description
The type SIS Parameters describes the service intervals and warning levels for the robot. The
service interval can be set in both production time and calendar time.

Limitations
Changing the parameter values in SIS Parameters is only useful if you have an IRB 6600,
IRB 6650, or IRB 7600 robot.

Related information
Product manual for the robot.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

584 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.35.2. Name

6.35.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type SIS Parameters in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
Name defines the SIS parameters’ name.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 585

6 Topic Motion
6.35.3. Operational Limit

6.35.3. Operational Limit

Parent
Operational Limit belongs to the type SIS Parameters in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
prod_time_service_interval

Description
Operational Limit describes the service interval measured in production time.

Usage
The service interval for production time, Operational Limit, for ABB robots is normally set
to 20,000 hours on delivery and should not be changed.
When the Operational Limit is reached, the FlexPendant displays a message from the elog.
If Operational Limit is set to 0, the function is disabled.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 50,000 hours.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

586 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.35.4. Calendar Limit

6.35.4. Calendar Limit

Parent
Calendar Limit belongs to the type SIS Parameters in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
calender_time_service_interval

Description
Calendar Limit defines the service interval in calender time.

Usage
The service interval for calendar time, Calendar Limit, for ABB robots is normally set to 1
year on delivery and should not be changed.
When the Calendar Limit is reached, the FlexPendant displays a message from the elog.
If Calendar Limit is set to 0, the function is disabled.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 20 years.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 587

6 Topic Motion
6.35.5. Operational Warning

6.35.5. Operational Warning

Parent
Operational Warning belongs to the type SIS Parameters in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
prod_time_warning_level

Description
Operational Warning defines when the warning before reached service level for production
time should occur.

Usage
The value of Operational Warning is a percentage of the Operational Limit. A lower number
gives a shorter time between the warning and the reached service level.
If Operational Warning is set to 0, the function is disabled.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100 %.

Related information
Operational Limit on page 586.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

588 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.35.6. Calendar Warning

6.35.6. Calendar Warning

Parent
Calendar Warning belongs to the type SIS Parameters in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
calender_time_warning_level

Description
Calendar Warning defines when the warning before reached service level for calender time
should occur.

Usage
The value of Calendar Warning is a percentage of the Calendar Limit. A lower number gives
a shorter time between the warning and the reached service level.
If Calendar Warning is set to 0, the function is disabled.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100 %.

Related information
Calendar Limit on page 587.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 589

6 Topic Motion
6.35.7. Gearbox Warning

6.35.7. Gearbox Warning

Parent
Gearbox Warning belongs to the type SIS Parameters in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
gear_box_warning_level

Description
Gearbox Warning defines when the warning before reached service level for gear box should
occur.

Usage
The gearbox service level is calculated automatically, using among other other things the
value of Gearbox Warning.
For an ABB robot using SIS Parameters, the value is typically set to 100.
If Gearbox Warning is set to 0, the function is disabled.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 100%.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

590 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.36.1. The Stress Duty Cycle type

6.36 Type Stress Duty Cycle

6.36.1. The Stress Duty Cycle type

Overview
This section describes the type Stress Duty Cycle, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
STRESS_DUTY_CYCLE

Type description
The type Stress Duty Cycle is used to protect axes, gearboxes, etc. Damages due to too high
mechanical forces are avoided by setting limits for speed and torque.

Limitations
Parameters of the type Stress Duty Cycle can only be defined for additional axes.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 591

6 Topic Motion
6.36.2. Name

6.36.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Stress Duty Cycle, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Stress Duty Cycle.

Usage
Name is used to reference a Stress Duty Cycle from the parameter Use Stress Duty Cycle in
the type Drive System.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

592 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.36.3. Speed Absolute Max

6.36.3. Speed Absolute Max

Parent
Speed Absolute Max belongs to the type Stress Duty Cycle, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_absolute_max

Description
The absolute highest motor speed to be used.

Usage
Limit the motor speed with Speed Absolute Max to avoid too much stress on the axis. If, for
example, the gear box is the limiter for the speed, set Speed Absolute Max to a value that will
protect the gear box.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1500 (rad/s on motor side).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 593

6 Topic Motion
6.36.4. Torque Absolute Max

6.36.4. Torque Absolute Max

Parent
Torque Absolute Max belongs to the type Stress Duty Cycle, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
torque_absolute_max

Description
The absolute highest motor torque to be used.

Usage
Limit the motor torque with Torque Absolute Max to avoid too much stress on the axis. If, for
example, the gear box is the limiter for the torque, set Torque Absolute Max to a value that
will protect the gear box.

Limitation
Torque Absolute Max can only be defined for additional axes.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100000 (Nm on motor side).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

594 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.1. The Supervision type

6.37 Type Supervision

6.37.1. The Supervision type

Overview
This section describes the type Supervision, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SUPERVISION

Type description
The type Supervision is used for supervision of joints. Each joint has one set of parameters of
the type Supervision.

Limitation
Parameters of the type Supervision can only be defined for additional axes.

Related information
The Joint type on page 404.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 595

6 Topic Motion
6.37.2. Name

6.37.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the supervision.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

596 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.3. Brake Release Supervision On

6.37.3. Brake Release Supervision On

Parent
Brake Release Supervision On belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
brake_release_supervision_on

Description
Brake Release Supervision On defines if the brake release supervision is on or off.

Usage
Set Brake Release Supervision On to True to turn on brake release supervision. This activates
a position supervision algorithm during brake release.

Allowed values
True or False.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 597

6 Topic Motion
6.37.4. Speed Supervision

6.37.4. Speed Supervision

Parent
Speed Supervision belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
speed_supervision_on

Description
Defines if the speed supervision should be activated or not.

Usage
Speed supervision should normally be on (True).
Note! Deactivating the speed supervision can be dangerous.

Allowed values
True or False.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

598 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.5. Position Supervision

6.37.5. Position Supervision

Parent
Position Supervision belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
position_supervision_on

Description
Defines if the position supervision should be activated or not.

Usage
The position supervision should normally be on (True).
Note! Deactivating the position supervision can be dangerous.

Allowed values
True or False.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 599

6 Topic Motion
6.37.6. Counter Supervision

6.37.6. Counter Supervision

Parent
Counter Supervision belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
counter_supervision_on

Description
Defines if the measurement system supervision should be activated or not.

Usage
The counter supervision should normally be on (True).
Note! Deactivating the counter supervision can be dangerous.

Allowed values
True or False.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

600 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.7. Jam Supervision

6.37.7. Jam Supervision

Parent
Jam Supervision belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
jam_supervision_on

Description
Defines if the jam supervision should be activated or not.

Usage
The jam supervision should normally be activated (True).
Note! Deactivating the jam supervision can be dangerous.

Allowed values
True or False.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 601

6 Topic Motion
6.37.8. Load Supervision

6.37.8. Load Supervision

Parent
Load Supervision belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
load_supervision_on

Description
Defines if the load supervision should be activated or not.

Usage
The load supervision should normally be on (True).

Allowed values
True or False.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

602 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.9. Power Up Position Supervision

6.37.9. Power Up Position Supervision

Parent
Power Up Position Supervision belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
power_up_position_on

Description
Defines if the power up position supervision should be activated or not.

Usage
The power up position supervision should normally be on (True).
Note! Deactivating the power up position supervision can be dangerous.

Allowed values
True or False.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 603

6 Topic Motion
6.37.10. In Position Range

6.37.10. In Position Range

Parent
In Position Range belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
in_position_range

Description
Defines the allowed position deviation from fine point when the axis is considered to have
reached the fine point.

Usage
Normally set to 1.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 10 radians on motor side.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

604 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.11. Zero Speed

6.37.11. Zero Speed

Parent
Zero Speed belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
normalized_zero_speed

Description
Defines the maximum speed when the axis is considered to be standing still.

Usage
Normally set to 0.02.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1, where 1 equals max speed.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 605

6 Topic Motion
6.37.12. Affects Forced Control

6.37.12. Affects Forced Control

Parent
Affects Forced Control belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
joint_affect_forced_Kp

Description
Defines if the joint affects the in position forced control used in fine point.

Usage
Set to True if the joint should affect the in position forced control.
The forced control is used to reduce time for axis to go into the fine point.

Allowed values
True or False.

Related information
Forced Control Active on page 415, in the type Lag Control Master 0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

606 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.37.13. Forced on Position Limit

6.37.13. Forced on Position Limit

Parent
Forced on Position Limit belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kp_forced_on_limit

Description
The upper position limit for activation of forced control, measured from the fine point.

Usage
The upper position limit is measured in radians on the motor shaft.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5.

Related information
Affects Forced Control on page 606.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 607

6 Topic Motion
6.37.14. Forced off Position Limit

6.37.14. Forced off Position Limit

Parent
Forced off Position Limit belongs to the type Supervision, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kp_forced_off_limit

Description
The lower position limit for deactivation of forced control used close to the fine point.

Usage
The lower position limit is measured in radians on the motor shaft.

Limitations
Must have a lower value than Forced on Position Limit.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5.

Related information
Forced on Position Limit on page 607.
Affects Forced Control on page 606.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

608 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.1. The type Supervision Type

6.38 Type Supervision Type

6.38.1. The type Supervision Type

Overview
This section describes the type Supervision Type, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
SUPERVISION_TYPE

Type description
The type Supervision Type is used for continuos supervision of position, speed and torque.
These values should follow the planned path, within a tolerance interval, or the movement is
stopped.

Limitations
Parameters of the type Supervision Type can only be defined for additional axes.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 609

6 Topic Motion
6.38.2. Name

6.38.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Supervision Type.

Usage
Name is used to reference a Supervision Type from the parameter Use Supervision Type in the
type Supervision.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

610 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.3. Max Force Control Position Error

6.38.3. Max Force Control Position Error

Parent
Max Force Control Position Error belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
fc_position_limit

Description
Max allowed position error during force control.
If the position error is larger than Max Force Control Position Error, all movement is stopped.

Usage
When a servo gun is in force control mode it is not allowed to move more than the distance
specified in Max Force Control Position Error.
The most common reasons for a servo gun to move during force control are:
• the servo gun is flexible and can give in when high forces are applied
• the force control may start before the gun has closed around the plate, e.g. because the
ordered plate thickness is larger than the real plate thickness, or because the parameter
Close position adjust is set to a value larger than 0.

Limitations
Max Force Control Position Error can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 0.10 (meter).
The default value is 0.03 m.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 611

6 Topic Motion
6.38.4. Max Force Control Speed Limit

6.38.4. Max Force Control Speed Limit

Parent
Max Force Control Speed Limit belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
fc_speed_limit_factor

Description
Speed error factor during force control.
The speed limits for force control is defined in the type Force Master Control. If this speed
limit multiplied with Max Force Control Speed Limit is exceeded, all movement is stopped.

Usage
The speed may for a short period of time exceed the speed limit (defined in type Force Master
Control) before it is regulated to a value within the limits. To allow the speed to exceed the
limit during this regulation without stopping all movement, Max Force Control Speed Limit
must be set to a value larger than 1. How much the speed is allowed to over-shoot the limit is
determined by Max Force Control Speed Limit.

Limitations
Max Force Control Speed Limit can only be used if you have servo tools.

Allowed values
A numeric value between 1 and 10. The value has no unit, but is a ratio of the speed limit
defined in the type Force Master Control.
The default value is 1.1.

Related information
The Force Master Control type on page 372.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

612 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.5. Dynamic Power Up Position Limit

6.38.5. Dynamic Power Up Position Limit

Parent
Dynamic Power Up Position Limit belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
dynamic_power_up_position_limit

Description
Defines the maximum accepted power up position error at maximum speed.

Usage
Dynamic Power Up Position Limit sets a dynamic limit for measurement system supervision
of moment during power fail.
A typical value is 120% of the maximum brake distance.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1000 in radians.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 613

6 Topic Motion
6.38.6. Teach Max Speed Main

6.38.6. Teach Max Speed Main

Parent
Teach Max Speed Main belongs to the type Supervision Type, In the topic Motion.

Cfg name
teach_mode_speed_max_main

Description
Defines the maximum speed for references in manual mode.

Usage
Teach Max Speed Main is used to limit the maximum speed in manual mode.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1, where 1 equals max speed.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

614 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.7. Max Jam Time

6.38.7. Max Jam Time

Parent
Max Jam Time belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_jam_time

Description
Defines the maximum allowed time with maximum torque at zero speed.

Usage
Set Max Jam Time to protect the robot and equipment from faults and damage that may occur
if the torque is high while the speed is zero.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 2.0 seconds.
A typical value is 0.5.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 615

6 Topic Motion
6.38.8. Max Overload Time

6.38.8. Max Overload Time

Parent
Max Overload Time belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
max_overload_time

Description
Defines the maximum allowed time with maximum torque while moving.

Usage
Set Max Overload Time to protect the robot and equipment from faults and damage. If Max
Overload Time is exceeded, the controller will indicate an error in hardware, robot, load, or
programming.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 20 seconds.
A typical value is 0.2.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

616 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.9. Teach Normalized Low Speed

6.38.9. Teach Normalized Low Speed

Parent
Teach Normalized Low Speed belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
teach_normalized_low_speed

Description
Defines the servo supervision limit in manual mode.

Usage
The value of Teach Normalized Low Speed should be set so that the axis speed does not
exceed 250 mm/s.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1, where 1 equals max speed.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 617

6 Topic Motion
6.38.10. Auto Max Speed Supervision Limit

6.38.10. Auto Max Speed Supervision Limit

Parent
Auto Max Speed Supervision Limit belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
auto_mode_max_speed_sup_limit

Description
Defines the maximum speed supervision limit in automatic mode.

Usage
Auto Max Speed Supervision Limit is typically set to 1.2 to allow margin against speed
overshoot, interference from external forces, etc.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 5, where 1 equals max speed.
A typical value is 1.2.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

618 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.11. Influence Group

6.38.11. Influence Group

Parent
Influence Group belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
influence_group

Description
Defines the type of influence group for the Supervision Type. An influence group is a group
of axes, mechanically affecting each other.

Usage
Influence Group is used to calculate supervision levels.
Normally, for axes not affecting each other, deactivate the function by setting Influence
Group to 0.

Allowed values
An integer between 0 and 10.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 619

6 Topic Motion
6.38.12. Alarm Position Limit for Brake Release

6.38.12. Alarm Position Limit for Brake Release

Parent
Alarm Position Limit for Brake Release belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
brake_release_position_alarm_limit

Description
Alarm Position Limit for Brake Release defines the emergency stop limit for position
supervision during brake release.

Usage
An emergency stop is generated if the axis motor moves more than the defined value of Alarm
Position Limit for Brake Release directly after brake release.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1000, defined in radians on motor side.
Default value is 1.0.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

620 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.38.13. Position OK Ratio for Brake Release

6.38.13. Position OK Ratio for Brake Release

Parent
Position OK Ratio for Brake Release belongs to the type Supervision Type, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
brake_release_position_ok_ratio

Description
Position OK Ratio for Brake Release defines the maximum position error for the axis when
the axis should leave the brake supervision state and change to normal operation.

Usage
The value of Position OK Ratio for Brake Release is a ratio of the value of parameter Alarm
Position Limit for Brake Release.

Allowed values
A value between 0 and 1.
Default value is 0.2, a normal value is 0.2 - 0.5.

Related information
Alarm Position Limit for Brake Release on page 620.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 621

6 Topic Motion
6.39.1. The Transmission type

6.39 Type Transmission

6.39.1. The Transmission type

Overview
This section describes the type Transmission, which belongs to the topic Motion. Each
parameter of this type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
TRANSMISSION

Type description
Each set of parameters of the type Transmission belongs to a joint (robot joint or external
axis).
The parameters in Transmission determine the transmission gear ratio between the motor and
the axis.

Limitations
The transmission gear ratio can only be defined for additional axes.
The transmission gear ratio for the robot joints are defined by ABB and cannot be changed.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

622 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.39.2. Name

6.39.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Transmission, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
name

Description
The name of the Transmission.

Usage
Name is used to reference a Transmission from the parameter Use Transmission in the type
Joint.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 623

6 Topic Motion
6.39.3. Rotating Move

6.39.3. Rotating Move

Parent
Rotating Move belongs to the type Transmission, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
rotating_move

Description
Rotating Move defines if the axis is rotating or linear.

Usage
For rotating axes, set Rotating Move to Yes. For linear axes, set Rotating Move to No.
Rotating Move affects if the transmission gear ratio is defined as motor radians per joint
radians, or motor radian per joint meter.

Allowed values
Yes or No.
The default value is No (i.e. that the axis is linear).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

624 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.39.4. Transmission Gear Ratio

6.39.4. Transmission Gear Ratio

Parent
Transmission Gear Ratio belongs to the type Transmission, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
transm_joint

Description
Transmission Gear Ratio defines the transmission gear ratio between motor and joint.

Usage
For rotating axes, set Transmission Gear Ratio to the number of revolutions the motor
performs for every revolution of the joint. For linear axes, set Transmission Gear Ratio to
motor radians per meter.

Limitations
Transmission Gear Ratio can only be defined for external axes. Transmission Gear Ratio for
the robot joints are defined by ABB and cannot be changed.

Allowed values
A numeric value between -100 000 and +100 000.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 625

6 Topic Motion
6.39.5. Transmission Gear High

6.39.5. Transmission Gear High

Parent
Transmission Gear High belongs to the type Transmission, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
high_gear

Description
When a joint is in independent mode, Transmission Gear High is the numerator in the fraction
representing the transmission gear ratio between motor and joint. The denominator is the
parameter Transmission Gear Low.

Usage
When a joint is set to independent mode, the transmission gear ratio is represented as
Transmission Gear High divided by Transmission Gear Low. See How to define transmission
gear ratio for independent joints for more information on how to use these parameters.

Limitations
The parameter Transmission Gear High is only useful if you have the RobotWare option
Independent Axes.
When a joint is not in independent mode, it uses the parameter Transmission Gear Ratio
instead of Transmission Gear High and Transmission Gear Low.

Allowed values
An integer value.

Related information
How to define transmission gear ratio for independent joints on page 302.
Transmission Gear Low on page 627.
Application manual - Motion functions and events. © Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

626 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.39.6. Transmission Gear Low

6.39.6. Transmission Gear Low

Parent
Transmission Gear Low belongs to the type Transmission, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
low_gear

Description
When a joint is in independent mode, Transmission Gear Low is the denominator in the
fraction representing the transmission gear ratio between motor and joint. The numerator is
the parameter Transmission Gear High.

Usage
When a joint is set to independent mode, the transmission gear ratio is represented as
Transmission Gear High divided by Transmission Gear Low. See How to define transmission
gear ratio for independent joints for more information on how to use these parameters.

Limitations
The parameter Transmission Gear Low is only useful if you have the RobotWare option
Independent Axes.
When a joint is not in independent mode, it uses the parameter Transmission Gear Ratio
instead of Transmission Gear High and Transmission Gear Low.

Allowed values
An integer value.

Related information
How to define transmission gear ratio for independent joints on page 302.
Transmission Gear High on page 626.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

Application manual - Motion functions and events.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 627

6 Topic Motion
6.40.1. The Uncalibrated Control Master 0 type

6.40 Type Uncalibrated Control Master 0

6.40.1. The Uncalibrated Control Master 0 type

Overview
This section describes the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, which belongs to the topic
Motion. Each parameter of the type is described in a separate information topic in this section.

Cfg name
UCCM0

Type description
The type Uncalibrated Control Master 0 is used to regulate uncalibrated axes. If one axis in
a mechanical unit is uncalibrated, Uncalibrated Control Master 0 is used to regulate all axes
in that mechanical unit.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

628 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.40.2. Name

6.40.2. Name

Parent
Name belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
UCCM0 name

Description
The name of the Uncalibrated Control Master 0.

Usage
Name is used to reference an Uncalibrated Control Master 0 from the parameter
Uncalibrated Control Master in the type Joint.

Allowed values
A string with maximum 32 characters.
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 629

6 Topic Motion
6.40.3. Kp, Gain Position Loop

6.40.3. Kp, Gain Position Loop

Parent
Kp, Gain Position Loop belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
Kp

Description
Proportional gain in the position regulation loop.

Usage
The higher the value of Kp, Gain Position Loop, the better tracking and disturbance rejection.
If the position regulation overshoots, decrease Kp, Gain Position Loop.

Limitations
Kp, Gain Position Loop only affects the axis when it is uncalibrated (or when another axis in
the same mechanical unit is uncalibrated).

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 1000 (1/s).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

630 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.40.4. Kv, Gain Speed Loop

6.40.4. Kv, Gain Speed Loop

Parent
Kv, Gain Speed Loop belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the topic Motion.

Cfg name
Kv

Description
Proportional gain in the speed regulation loop.

Usage
The higher the value of Kv, Gain Speed Loop, the better tracking and disturbance rejection.
If the level of oscillation or noise is too high, decrease Kv, Gain Speed Loop.

Limitations
Kv, Gain Speed Loop only affects the axis when it is uncalibrated (or when another axis in the
same mechanical unit is uncalibrated).

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 100 (Nms/rad).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 631

6 Topic Motion
6.40.5. Ti Integration Time Speed Loop

6.40.5. Ti Integration Time Speed Loop

Parent
Ti Integration Time Speed Loop belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the
topic Motion.

Cfg name
Ti

Description
Integration time in the speed regulation loop.

Usage
The lower the value of Ti Integration Time Speed Loop, the better tracking and disturbance
rejection.
If the level of oscillation or noise is too high, increase Ti Integration Time Speed Loop.

Limitations
Ti Integration Time Speed Loop only affects the axis when it is uncalibrated (or when another
axis in the same mechanical unit is uncalibrated).

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 10 (seconds).
The default value is 10 seconds.

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

632 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.40.6. Speed Max Uncalibrated

6.40.6. Speed Max Uncalibrated

Parent
Speed Max Uncalibrated belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the topic
Motion.

Cfg name
speed_max_n

Description
Speed Max Uncalibrated defines the maximum allowed speed for an uncalibrated axis.

Usage
Use Speed Max Uncalibrated as a limit for the speed of the axis when it is regulated as an
uncalibrated axis.

Limitations
Speed Max Uncalibrated only affects the axis when it is uncalibrated (or when another axis
in the same mechanical unit is uncalibrated).

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 670 (rad/s on motor side).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 633

6 Topic Motion
6.40.7. Acceleration Max Uncalibrated

6.40.7. Acceleration Max Uncalibrated

Parent
Acceleration Max Uncalibrated belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the
topic Motion.

Cfg name
acc_max_n

Description
Acceleration Max Uncalibrated defines the maximum allowed acceleration for an
uncalibrated axis.

Usage
Use Acceleration Max Uncalibrated as a limit for the acceleration of the axis when it is
regulated as an uncalibrated axis.

Limitations
Acceleration Max Uncalibrated only affects the axis when it is uncalibrated (or when another
axis in the same mechanical unit is uncalibrated).

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 10000 (rad/s2 on motor side).

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

634 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 6 Topic Motion
6.40.8. Deceleration Max Uncalibrated

6.40.8. Deceleration Max Uncalibrated

Parent
Deceleration Max Uncalibrated belongs to the type Uncalibrated Control Master 0, in the
topic Motion.

Cfg name
dec_max_n

Description
Deceleration Max Uncalibrated defines the maximum allowed deceleration for an
uncalibrated axis.

Usage
Use Deceleration Max Uncalibrated as a limit for the deceleration of the axis when it is
regulated as an uncalibrated axis.

Limitations
Deceleration Max Uncalibrated only affects the axis when it is uncalibrated (or when another
axis in the same mechanical unit is uncalibrated).

Allowed values
A numeric value between 0 and 10000 (rad/s2 on motor side).
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 635

6 Topic Motion
6.40.8. Deceleration Max Uncalibrated

© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

636 3HAC17076-1 Revision: F

 Index

A N
acceleration data, type 306 NORMAL task type 119
access level, type 137 NoSafety trustlevel 122
application protocol, type 29
O
arm check point, type 330
arm load, type 333 operator safety, type 96
arm, type 312 P
Auto Condition Reset, type 62
path return region, type 99
B path sensor synchronization, type 518
brake, type 338 physical channel, type 44
bus, type 144 process, type 525

C R
communication, topic 25 relay, type 529
control parameters, type 346 robot serial number, type 550
controller, topic 59 robot, type 532
cross connection, type 153 Run Mode Settings, type 105

D S
drive module, type 351 safety run chain, type 108
drive system, type 354 SEMISTATIC task type 119
SG process, type 554
E signal, type 179
event routine, type 73 single type, type 581
single, type 574
F
SIS parameters, type 584
fieldbus command type, type 174 STATIC task type 119
fieldbus command, type 170 stress duty cycle, type 591
force master control, type 372 supervision type, type 609
force master, type 358 SysFail trustlevel 122
friction compensation, type 394 SysHalt trustlevel 122
I SysStop trustlevel 122
system input, type 206
I/O, topic 129 system misc, type 111
J system output, type 231
system parameter definition 23
jog parameters, type 399
system parameters
joint, type 404
Internal Slave 273
L Internal Slave Input Size 274
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

lag control master 0, type 410 Internal Slave Output Size 275
linked m process, type 436 Product ID 272
PROFIBUS Address 264
M
T
mains, type 444
man-machine communication 277 task, type 116
measurement channel, type 448 topic definition 23
mechanical unit group, type 81 transmission protocol, type 53
mechanical unit, type 454 transmission, type 622
modpos settings, type 86 type definition 23
most common I/O signal, type 278 U
most common instruction, type 284
uncalibrated control master, type 628
motion planner, type 466
unit type, type 266
motion supervision, type 486
unit, type 254
motion system, type 493
motion, topic 292
motor calibration, type 503
motor type, type 510
motor, type 499

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F 637

638
Index

3HAC17076-1 Revision: F
© Copyright 2003-2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
 3HAC17076-1, rev F, en

ABB Robotics
S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS
SWEDEN
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000
Telefax: +46 (0) 21 132592